FUJI MEDICAL NETWORK CONVERTER

DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

Document No. 006-260-05

First Edition July 10, 2002
Revised Edition Nov. 30, 2004

Fuji Photo Film Co., LTD.

Printed in Japan
 0.1

FCR © is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

Copyright © 2002-2004 by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.1
 0.2

SERVICE MANUAL APPROPRIATIONS

1. All rights are reserved by the Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. (FUJIFILM).
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service
personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is
therefore proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
4. FUJIFILM's prior consent is required in regard to the following.
• Manual copying in whole or in part.
• Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
• Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.2
 0.3

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

■ Scope
This Service Manual applies to the Fuji Medical Network Converter DRYPIX Link.

■ Notation of Unit Symbols

For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units
(SI) are used, as a rule. However, some metric units that are not allowed in the SI but
are permitted under the Measurement Law are partially used.

■ Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.

The notation formats of “WARNING”, “CAUTION”, “INSTRUCTIONS”, “NOTE”,
“REMARKS” and “REFERENCE” are shown below.

WARNING
Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in death or
serious injuries.

CAUTION
Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in light or moderate
injuries, or serious malfunction (unrecoverable or difficult to recover) of the equipment.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in damage to the
equipment, or other problems.

<NOTE>
Indicated where special attention is required during a work procedure.

<REMARKS>
Indicated where description of the term used or supplementary explanation is given.

Used to indicate the relevant reference.

■ Descriptions of Connection Specifications

In this manual, inputs from the Fuji Film printer interface used by the FCRs are
indicated as “E-I/F input”.
Inputs from diagnostic devices such as analog and digital signal output CTs and MRIs
are indicated as “AD-I/F input”.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.3
 0.4

DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

GENERAL CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTION
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION .............................................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
1.1 General Precautions...................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
2. DISPOSING THE EQUIPMENT .................................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
3. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS ............................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
4. CLASSIFICATION ....................................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
5. SAFETY LABELS ....................................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
5.1 Labels ............................................................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-6

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.4
 0.5

SPECIFICATIONS
1. SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................... SPECIFICATIONS-2
1.1 Part Names ............................................................. SPECIFICATIONS-2
1.2 List of Optional Parts ............................................ SPECIFICATIONS-3
1.3 General Specifications .......................................... SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.4 Equipment Dimensions, Weight and Center
of Gravity .............................................................. SPECIFICATIONS-11
1.5 Environmental Requirements ............................. SPECIFICATIONS-12
1.6 Electrical Requirements ...................................... SPECIFICATIONS-13
1.7 Other Specifications ............................................ SPECIFICATIONS-14
1.8 Equipment Installation Space ............................ SPECIFICATIONS-15

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.5
 0.6

DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... MD-2
1.1 System Configuration Example .................................................... MD-2
2. OVERALL CONFIGURATION AND NAME OF PARTS .............................. MD-4
2.1 External View .................................................................................. MD-4
2.2 Internal Configuration .................................................................... MD-6
2.3 Operation Panel .............................................................................. MD-8
3. INPUT IMAGE I/F SPECIFICATION .......................................................... MD-10
4. MESSAGE DISPLAY ................................................................................. MD-12
5. ELECTRICAL CONTROL .......................................................................... MD-16
5.1 System Block Diagram................................................................. MD-16
5.2 Function of Each Board ............................................................... MD-17
5.2.1 MTH15B Board .................................................................. MD-17
5.2.2 CPU90K Board ................................................................... MD-17
5.2.3 IMG15C Board ................................................................... MD-18
5.2.4 PNL15C Board ................................................................... MD-18
5.2.5 LAN90C Board ................................................................... MD-19
5.2.6 Power Supply Unit .............................................................. MD-20
6. IMAGE DATA PROCESSING .................................................................... MD-22
6.1 Image Data Flow ........................................................................... MD-22
6.1.1 E-I/F Connection ................................................................ MD-22
6.1.2 AD-I/F Connection .............................................................. MD-24
6.1.3 When Connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager
Function) by AD-I/F ............................................................ MD-26
6.2 Relation Between Image Memory and Storable Images ........... MD-28

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.6
 0.7

TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD ................................................................. MT-2
2. ERROR CODE.............................................................................................. MT-4
2.1 Checking Error Codes .................................................................... MT-4
2.2 Format of Detailed Information ..................................................... MT-6
2.2.1 MFC Related Detailed Error Information ............................... MT-8
2.3 Error Code Tables ........................................................................ MT-10
3. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS ...................................................................... MT-38
3.1 How to Read the Troubleshooting Flow ..................................... MT-38
3.2 POWER LED is Lit, but Nothing is Displayed on Message
Display ........................................................................................... MT-40
3.3 DC Output has Stopped ............................................................... MT-42
4. TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE ........................................................ MT-44
4.1 Latout of Fuse ............................................................................... MT-44
4.1.1 HAV90A Board .................................................................... MT-44
4.1.2 HAV90B Board .................................................................... MT-44
4.1.3 DVI90A Board ..................................................................... MT-45
4.1.4 DPI90A/DPI90B Board ........................................................ MT-45
4.1.5 HAV90E Board .................................................................... MT-46
4.2 LED Lighting Information ............................................................ MT-47
4.2.1 CPU90K Board .................................................................... MT-47
4.2.2 FIX90A Board ...................................................................... MT-48
4.2.3 HAV90A Board .................................................................... MT-48
4.2.4 HAV90B Board .................................................................... MT-49
4.2.5 DVI90A Board ..................................................................... MT-49
4.2.6 DPI90A/DPI90B Board ........................................................ MT-50
4.2.7 Remote Panel ...................................................................... MT-51
4.2.8 HAV90E Board .................................................................... MT-52
4.2.9 LAN90C Board .................................................................... MT-53
4.3 Checking the DC Voltage ............................................................. MT-54
4.4 HOST Auto-Filming Connection I/F Cable Connection
Diagram ......................................................................................... MT-56
5. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ...........................................................................MT-62

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.7
 0.8

SERVICE MODE (MU)

1. SERVICE MODE OF OPERATION PANEL ................................................. MU-2
1.1 Transition of Modes ....................................................................... MU-2
1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode .................................................. MU-2
1.3 Common Operations of Service Mode ......................................... MU-3
2. M-UTILITY COMMAND TREE ..................................................................... MU-4
3. M-UTILITY .................................................................................................... MU-8
3.1 Starting and Ending the M-Utility .................................................. MU-8
3.2 Details of Operation Panel Display ............................................... MU-9
3.3 M-Utility Commands ..................................................................... MU-10
[1] System> ............................................................................. MU-10
[1-1] Configuration> .................................................................... MU-10
[1-1-1] Set Date> ........................................................................... MU-10
[1-1-2] Init. BkupRAM> .................................................................. MU-11
[1-1-3] Set Params>....................................................................... MU-12
[1-1-4] Check Files> ................................................................... MU-17.2
[1-1-5] Check Version .................................................................... MU-18
[1-2] FD> .................................................................................... MU-19
[1-2-1] Indiv.Data> ......................................................................... MU-19
[1-2-2] Save/Load File> ................................................................. MU-20
[1-2-3] Format FD> ........................................................................ MU-21
[1-3] Err. Log Data> .................................................................... MU-22
[1-3-1] Error Log #1 ....................................................................... MU-22
[1-3-2] Clear>................................................................................. MU-22
[1-4] Set Panel> .......................................................................... MU-23
[1-4-1] Alarm> ................................................................................ MU-23
[2] Set Network>...................................................................... MU-24
[2-1] Configuration> .................................................................... MU-24
[2-1-1] AE-title>.............................................................................. MU-24
[2-1-2] IP Address>........................................................................ MU-24
[2-1-3] Sub Net mask>................................................................... MU-24
[2-1-4] Host name> ........................................................................ MU-24
[2-1-5] Gateways.> ........................................................................ MU-25
[2-1-6] Net Tool> ............................................................................ MU-25
[2-2] Config. Files> ..................................................................... MU-26
[2-2-1] Check Files......................................................................... MU-26
[2-2-2] Save to FD> ....................................................................... MU-26
[2-2-3] Load from FD> ................................................................... MU-26

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.8
 0.9

[2-3] Save Log File ..................................................................... MU-27

[2-4] N-Soft V-UPG> ................................................................... MU-27
[3] Set DICOM> ....................................................................... MU-28
[3-1] Timeout> ............................................................................ MU-28
[3-2] Log Mode> ......................................................................... MU-28
[3-3] Polling Timer> .................................................................... MU-28
[3-4] Printer Sub.> ...................................................................... MU-29
[3-5] Film Sub.> .......................................................................... MU-29
[3-6] Printer Timer> .................................................................... MU-29
[4] Set Printer> ........................................................................ MU-30
[4-1] Printer #1> ......................................................................... MU-30
[4-1-1] PrinterAEname> ................................................................. MU-30
[4-1-2] IP Address>........................................................................ MU-30
[4-1-3] Port No.> ............................................................................ MU-31
[4-1-4] Film Size> .......................................................................... MU-31
[4-1-5] Image Type> ....................................................................... MU-33
[4-1-6] Alias Name> ....................................................................... MU-34
[4-2] Printer #2> ......................................................................... MU-35
[4-3] Printer #3> ......................................................................... MU-35
[4-4] Printer #4> ......................................................................... MU-35
[4-5] Printer #5> ......................................................................... MU-35
[4-6] Printer #6> ......................................................................... MU-35
[4-7] Printer #7> ......................................................................... MU-35
[4-8] Printer #8> ......................................................................... MU-35
[4-9] Printer #9> ......................................................................... MU-35
[4-10] Printer #10> ....................................................................... MU-35
[5] Test Print> .......................................................................... MU-36
[5-1] Pattern 1 (SMPTE Pattern Output)..................................... MU-36
[5-2] Pattern 2 (Gradation Pattern Output) ................................. MU-36
[6] Diagnosis> ......................................................................... MU-37
[6-1] I.M. R/W Test> .................................................................... MU-37
[6-1-1] Partial ................................................................................. MU-37
[6-1-2] All ....................................................................................... MU-37
[7] Set Station>..................................................................... MU-37.1
[7-1] Station Name> ................................................................ MU-37.1
[7-2] IP Address>..................................................................... MU-37.1
[7-3] Port No.> ......................................................................... MU-37.1
[7-4] Response tmr> ................................................................ MU-37.1
[7-5] Reset Timer> ................................................................... MU-37.2

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.9
 0.10

3.4 Detailed Supplementary Explanation for M-Utility ................. MU-37.5

3.4.1 Description of Printer Substitution ................................... MU-37.5
4. REMOTE PANEL SERVICE MODE ........................................................... MU-38
4.1 Service Mode Overview ............................................................... MU-38
4.2 Maintenance Mode ....................................................................... MU-40
4.2.1 Common Information for Maintenance Mode ..................... MU-40
4.2.2 Command Tree Diagram for Maintenance Mode ................ MU-46
4.2.3 Installation (Installation) ..................................................... MU-47
[1] Initialization (Initialization) .................................................. MU-47
[2] Setting Up System Connection (Connection) ..................... MU-48
[3] Setting Up Default Value (Default value) ............................ MU-51
[4] Setting Up Software Processing Functions
(Action switch) .................................................................... MU-55
[5] Setting Up Film Output (Film parameter) ........................... MU-59
[6] Creating Video Parameters (Video parameter) .................. MU-62
[7] ........................................................................................... MU-64
[8] Saving, Loading, and Initializing File (Save/Load) ............. MU-65
4.2.4 Utility (Utility) ...................................................................... MU-67
4.2.5 Detailed Supplementary Explanation for Maintenance
Mode .................................................................................. MU-68
4.3 Service Option .............................................................................. MU-86
4.3.1 Common Information for Service Option ............................ MU-86
4.3.2 Service Option Screen Transition Diagram ........................ MU-89
4.3.3 VIDEO ADJUST ................................................................. MU-90
4.3.4 IMAGE TRANSFER............................................................ MU-94
4.3.5 TEST PRINT ...................................................................... MU-96
4.4 How to Handle Magnetic Card During ID Information Entry... MU-100
4.4.1 Creating Hospital-Specific Card Format Definition File .... MU-101
4.4.2 Installing Hospital-Specific Card Format Definition File ... MU-104
4.4.3 Example of Creating Card Format Definition File ............. MU-104
4.4.4 Readable Hospital Card Types ......................................... MU-106
4.4.5 Symbol/Character Code Table for Magnetic Card
Recording Information ...................................................... MU-108
4.5 Specifications of Files Related to DRYPIX Station (Image
Manager Function) Connection................................................. MU-110

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.10
 0.11

REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS,
AND ADJUSTMENTS ......................................................................................... MC-2
CONTENTS ......................................................................................................... MC-4
1 EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY ........................................................................... MC-6
1.1 Front Cover ..................................................................................... MC-6
1.2 Right Cover ..................................................................................... MC-7
1.2.1 Standard Model ................................................................. MC-7.1
1.2.2 Electromagnetic Radiation Disturbance Immune Model ... MC-7.2
1.3 Left Cover ........................................................................................ MC-8
1.4 FDD ................................................................................................ MC-10
1.5 Power Supply Unit ........................................................................ MC-12
1.6 LAN90C Board .............................................................................. MC-14
1.7 CPU90K Board .............................................................................. MC-18
2. INSTALLING SOFTWARE AND UPGRADING VERSION ........................ MC-22
2.1 Installing and Upgrading Version of the Main Unit Software ... MC-22
2.2 Installing and Upgrading the Version of the DICOM
Software ........................................................................................ MC-24
2.3 Installing the Remote Panel Software ........................................ MC-26
2.4 List of Software Files ................................................................... MC-30
3. BOARD, FDD, REMOTE PANEL SETTINGS AND LED LIGHTING
INFORMATION........................................................................................... MC-36
3.1 IMG15C Board ............................................................................... MC-36
3.2 FIX90A Board ................................................................................ MC-37
3.3 CPU90K Board .............................................................................. MC-38
3.4 HAV90A Board .............................................................................. MC-40
3.5 HAV90B Board .............................................................................. MC-42
3.6 DVI90A Board ................................................................................ MC-48
3.7 DPI90A/DPI90B Board .................................................................. MC-52
3.8 LAN90C Board .............................................................................. MC-54
3.9 MTH15B Board .............................................................................. MC-55
3.10 Power Supply Unit ........................................................................ MC-56
3.11 FDD ................................................................................................ MC-57
3.12 Remote Panel ................................................................................ MC-58
3.13 HAV90E Board .............................................................................. MC-60

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.11
 0.12

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS........................................................ PM-2
1.1 Preventive Maintenance Items ...................................................... PM-2
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle .................................................... PM-3
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW ........................................................ PM-4
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................................... PM-6
3.1 Checking Error Log ........................................................................ PM-6
3.2 Checking Film Output and Image ................................................. PM-7
3.3 Checking the Power Supply Voltage ............................................ PM-8
3.4 Checking the Fan Operations...................................................... PM-10
3.5 Cleaning/Replacing the Louver ................................................... PM-11
3.6 Cleaning Inside the Equipment ................................................... PM-12
3.7 Reinstalling and Cleaning Covers .............................................. PM-13
3.8 Checking Final Operations/Images............................................. PM-14
3.9 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding ........................... PM-16
3.10 Maintenance Report After Completion ....................................... PM-17

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.12
 0.13

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

HOW TO USE THE SERVICE PARTS LIST........................................................ SP-2
INDEX ................................................................................................................... SP-4
01A EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 1 ............................................................. SP-6
01B EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 2 ............................................................. SP-8
02A OPTION 1 ........................................................................................ SP-10
02B OPTION 2 ........................................................................................ SP-12
03 CABLE ............................................................................................ SP-14
04 CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................. SP-15
05 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ..................................................... SP-18
06 TABLE OF SCREWS/WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS .......... SP-20
07 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS ............................................... SP-21

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.13
 0.14

INSTALLATION (IN)
1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS................................................................ IN-2
1.1 Equipment Dimensions, Weight and Center of Gravity ................ IN-2
1.2 Environmental Requirements.......................................................... IN-3
1.3 Electrical Requirements................................................................... IN-4
1.4 Other Specifications......................................................................... IN-5
1.5 Equipment Installation Space ......................................................... IN-6
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW .......................................................... IN-8
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION ............................................................ IN-11.3
3.1 Precautions on Installation......................................................... IN-11.3
3.2 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves ........................................ IN-11.5
3.2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................... IN-11.5
4. TEMPORARY PLACEMENT........................................................................ IN-14
4.1 Transportation ................................................................................ IN-14
4.2 Unpacking ....................................................................................... IN-15
4.3 Checking Installation Package Contents ..................................... IN-17
4.4 Preparations.................................................................................... IN-18
4.5 Temporary Placement .................................................................... IN-19
5. INSTALLATION............................................................................................ IN-20
5.1 Removing External Fixtures .......................................................... IN-20
5.2 Installing Separately Packaged Items .......................................... IN-21
5.2.1 Pasting the Connector Cover Caution Label ........................ IN-21
5.2.2 Installing the Image Memory Board ..................................... IN-22
5.2.3 Installing the Image Interface Board ..................................... IN-26
5.3 Connecting the Interface Cable..................................................... IN-30
5.3.1 AD-I/F Connection ................................................................ IN-30
5.3.2 E-I/F Connection .................................................................. IN-33
5.4 Connecting the Network Cable ..................................................... IN-34
6. CHECKING SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT , AND PRINTER
CONNECTION .............................................................................................. IN-36
6.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility ............................................. IN-36
6.1.1 Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable ...................... IN-36
6.1.2 Power ON ............................................................................. IN-37
6.1.3 Starting the M-Utility ............................................................. IN-37

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.14
 0.15

6.2 Common Settings of E-I/F Connection and AD-I/F

Connection ...................................................................................... IN-38
6.2.1 Setting the Date and Time .................................................... IN-38
6.2.2 Setting the Sorter ................................................................. IN-40
6.2.3 Setting Network Information ................................................. IN-42
6.2.4 Setting the DICOM Protocol ................................................. IN-44
6.2.5 Setting Printer Information ................................................... IN-46
6.3 Settings for E-I/F Connection ........................................................ IN-48
6.3.1 Setting the Printer Start Standby Timer ............................... IN-48
6.3.2 Setting Film Information ....................................................... IN-48
6.3.3 Setting the Default Film Size ................................................ IN-50
6.3.4 Setting Printer Substitution ................................................... IN-51
6.3.5 Setting Printer Switching Notification ................................ IN-51.1
6.3.6 Setting Printer Switching Notification Time ....................... IN-51.2
6.3.7 Setting Printer Automatic Recovery .................................. IN-51.3
6.3.8 Ending System Settings .................................................... IN-51.4
6.4 Settings for AD-I/F Connection ..................................................... IN-52
6.4.1 Setting for DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function)
Connection ........................................................................... IN-52
6.4.2 Ending the M-Utility .............................................................. IN-54
6.4.3 Starting the Remote Panel Maintenance Mode ................... IN-55
6.4.4 Setting the Remote Panel Maintenance Mode .................. IN-55.1
6.4.5 Language Display of Remote Panel .................................. IN-55.2
6.5 Checking Connection Between This Equipment and Printer ..... IN-56
6.5.1 Checks for E-I/F Connection ................................................ IN-56
6.5.2 Checks for AD-I/F Connection .............................................. IN-57
7. CHECKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE IMAGE INPUT DEVICE
AND IMAGE I/O............................................................................................ IN-58
7.1 E-I/F Connection ............................................................................. IN-58
7.1.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment by Remote
Operations ............................................................................ IN-58
7.1.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected
Device .................................................................................. IN-58
7.1.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment by Remote
Operations ............................................................................ IN-58

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.15
 0.16

7.2AD-I/F Connection .......................................................................... IN-59

7.2.1 Adjusting the Image Interface Board .................................... IN-59
7.2.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected
Device .................................................................................. IN-59
7.2.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment by Remote
Operations ............................................................................ IN-59
8. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT .................................................................. IN-60
8.1 Backing Up Individual Data ........................................................... IN-60
8.2 Checking and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at
Installation....................................................................................... IN-61
8.2.1 Checking the Error Log ........................................................ IN-61
8.2.2 Deleting Error Logs .............................................................. IN-61
8.3 Terminating the Equipment ........................................................... IN-62
8.4 Reinstalling Covers ........................................................................ IN-63
8.5 Installing the Equipment ................................................................ IN-64
8.6 Cleaning the Equipment ................................................................ IN-65
APPENDIX 1 SETTING, CONNECTING, ADJUSTING THE IMAGE
I/F BOARD................................................................................... IN-66
A1.1 DPI90A/B Board .............................................................................. IN-66
A1.1.1 Setting and Installing DPI90A/B Board ................................ IN-66
A1.1.2 Connecting to DPI90A/B Board ............................................ IN-67
A1.2 DVI90A Board.................................................................................. IN-68
A1.2.1 Setting and Installing DVI90A Board .................................... IN-68
A1.2.2 Connecting to DVI90A Board ............................................... IN-69
A1.2.3 Adjusting DVI90A Board ....................................................... IN-70
A1.3 HAV90A Board ................................................................................ IN-76
A1.3.1 Setting and Installing HAV90A Board ................................... IN-76
A1.3.2 Connecting to HAV90A Board .............................................. IN-77
A1.3.3 Adjusting HAV90A Board ..................................................... IN-79
A1.4 HAV90B Board ................................................................................ IN-88
A1.4.1 Setting and Installing HAV90B Board ................................... IN-88
A1.4.2 Connecting to HAV90B Board .............................................. IN-89
A1.4.3 Adjusting HAV90B Board ..................................................... IN-91
A1.5 HAV90E Board .............................................................................. IN-100
A1.5.1 Setting and Installing HAV90E Board ................................. IN-100
A1.5.2 Connecting to HAV90E Board ............................................ IN-101
A1.5.3 Adjusting HAV90E Board ................................................... IN-103
A1.6 Adjusting Image Format .............................................................. IN-116
APPENDIX 2 ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING ............................. IN-118

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.16
 0.17

APPENDIX 3 SETTING EXAMPLES OF CONNECTION WITH OTHER

DEVICES ................................................................................... IN-122

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.17
 0.18

PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX Link - Checklist ........................................... PC-2

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.18
 0.19

BLANK PAGE

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual 0.19
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

SAFETY PRECAUTION
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3360) All pages

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -1
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -2

1. SAFETY PRECAUTION
To avoid accidents, observe the following precautions.

1.1 General Precautions

■ Power Supply
• Be sure to turn OFF the power before starting operation. Starting operations with the
power ON may result in electric shock, fire hazards, or machine malfunction. Some
parts are not fully discharged and other parts remain heated immediately after power
OFF. Be careful not to touch such parts.
When performing steps (e.g. voltage measurement) that cannot be completed with
the power OFF, observe the instructions set forth in this manual and exercise due
care to avoid electric shock and other hazards.
• When restarting the machine, turn OFF the power, wait for more than 5 seconds, and
then turn it ON. If the interval from power OFF to ON is too short, the machine may
not be properly started.

■ Safety Devices
Ensure that the accident prevention functions of fuses, covers, and other safety
devices are always operative. Also refrain from introducing such modifications which
may impair the safety device functions.

■ Other General Precautions

• When servicing the board for maintenance, be sure to wear a wrist band to ground
yourself.
Failure to do so may result in damage of electronic components on the board due to
static electricity from your body.
• Care should be used not to stain or peel off the product nameplate, label of safety
standards, or product No. indications attached on the machine, and do not attach
other labels over them.
• After completion of operation, return the protective enclosure, fixing screws, or cover
earth and other removed components to the original positions and fix fully.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -2
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -3

2. DISPOSING THE EQUIPMENT

When disposing the equipment, remove the CPU board first. Be sure to return the
removed CPU board to the Service Parts Center.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -3
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -4

3. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC 60950 for data processing
equipment and IEC 60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the system standard IEC 60601-1-1. Everybody who connects
additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configures a medical
system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of
IEC 60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local
representative.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -4
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -5

4. CLASSIFICATION
1) According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
2) According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
NO APPLIED PART
3) Protection against harmful ingress of water
IPX0
4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable
anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5) According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -5
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -6

5. SAFETY LABELS

5.1 Labels
■ Location of Labels

Connector cover caution label

Rating indication label
Manufacturer label FP8I0101.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -6
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -7

■ List of Labels

● Rating Indication Labels

FP8I0103.EPS

● Manufacturer Label

FP5I0113.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -7
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -8

● Connector Cover Caution Label

FP8I0105.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -8
 SAFETY PRECAUTION -9

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION -9
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

SPECIFICATIONS
 SPECIFICATIONS -1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3360) All pages
10/25/2002 01 Revised (FM3576) 1, 3, 9
01/20/2003 02 Revised (FM3671) 1, 8, 9
05/15/2003 03 Revised (FM4011) 1, 4, 9
11/30/2004 05 Revised (FM4508) 1, 2

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -1
 SPECIFICATIONS -2

1. SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 Part Names

Product code Contents Parts No.
Domestic specifications main unit 000Y5397
DRYPIX Link #
• AC power cable (for domestic 100V): 1 136N0367
• Image memory board (MEM15B): 1 113Y1662
• Main unit software FD: 4 114Y5397002
• DICOM software FD: 2 114Y5397031
Overseas specifications main unit 000Y5397
DRYPIX Link E
• Image memory board (MEM15B): 1 113Y1662
• Main unit software FD: 4 114Y5397002
• DICOM software FD: 2 114Y5397031
Overseas specifications main unit 000Y5397
DRYPIX Link ED2 E
• Image memory board (MEM15B): 1 113Y1662
• Main unit software FD: 4 114Y5397002
• DICOM software FD: 2 114Y5397031
TP8I0201.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -2
 SPECIFICATIONS -3

1.2 List of Optional Parts

Check the components against the PACKING LIST contained in the carton box. Note
that the interface is hereafter sometimes referred to as I/F and the diagnostics units as
HOST or image generator.
Lists of components are described below.
Product codes ending in # are for domestic use in Japan while those ending in E are for
overseas use.
<NOTE>
The following List of Components enumerate items required for each configuration, so they do
not correspond to units (quantities) of orders or packages.
Use the product codes (Product Code) indicated only as a reference for unpacking and follow
the order lists provided separately when placing orders.

● Expanded Image Memory

Product Code Product Qty. Remarks
DPX BASE FBM 128MB #/E Expanded image memory 1 E-I/F input: One additionally required for
(MEM15B, 64MW) 20 pix/mm recording.
AD-I/F input: One additionally required
according to input image
size and maximum number
of frames.
TP8I0212.EPS

● List of Image Interface (E-I/F) Kit Components

Product Code Product Qty. Remarks
MF IF CR #/E FIX90A board 1
IR-LP2 IF CABLE **M #/E CR connection cable
(** indicate the cable length) (15,30,45,60,100,150m) 1
Select based on the type of device
MF-300-LP CABLE **M #/E MF connection cable 1 connected to.
(** indicate the cable length) (15,30,50,60,100,150m)

ODF/PS IF CABLE **M # PS connection cable

(** indicate the cable length) (5,15,30,45,60,100,150m) 1

TP8I0202.EPS

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -3
 SPECIFICATIONS -4

● List of Image Interface (Video) Kit Components

Product Code Product Qty. Remarks

HAV90A board (Analog video)

MF IF A #/E 1 ·Selected based on the video signal used for
(Pixel clock ranging from 7 to 79 MHz)
each order (The HAV90A/HAV90B boards were
manufactured until October 2002, the HAV90E
HAV90B board (High speed analog board was manufactured since November
MF IF A-HS #/E video) 1
2002.)
(Pixel clock ranging from 79 to 159 MHz) ·For digital video signals where the total
number of pixels per line is odd or digital
HAV90E board (Analog video (new)) video signals that are interlaced and whose
MF IF A N #/E 1
(Pixel clock ranging from 7 to 159 MHz) blank interval is at white level, the DVI90A
board should be in a version G or later
MF IF DV #/E DVI90A board (Digital video) 1
MF-300-V/HOST CABLE **M N #/E
Analog video cable The type and quantity of cable(s) should
(** indicates the cable length) 1~3
(3, 5, 10, 15, 20m) be selected based on a video signal used
(N not shown for use in Japan (#))
for each order (When the pixel clock of
MF/DP T DV/HOST CABLE P 3M #/E analog video is 79 to 130 MHz, 3m and 5m
Digital video cable (3m)
or cables can be used. When over 130 MHz,
(Host side connector male (P), 1
MF/DP T DV/HOST CABLE S 3M #/E only 3 m cable can be used.)
or female (S))
(T not shown for use overseas (E))
(Refer to HOST auto-filming connection HOST auto-filming connection cable Selected based on each order only
1
cable list) (RS-232C or RS-422) when performing auto-filming
Remote panel 1
MF/DP PNL A** #/E
(** Indicates software version) Operation manual 1
Cable for remote panel
1
(5, 10, 15, 20, 50, 100m)
MF-300-PNL CABLE **M N #/E
1 Provided for remote panel cables 20 m or
(** indicates the cable length) Remote panel AC adapter
longer
(N not shown for use in Japan (#))
Power cable for remote panel AC Provided for remote panel cables 20 m or
1
adapter (For 100/120V) longer (Use in Japan only)
Power cable for remote panel AC
MF-300 AC CORD 120V E 1
adapter (For 100/120V)
Selected based on each order only for
Power cable for remote panel AC overseas use with remote panel cables
MF-300 AC CORD 220V E 1
adapter (For 220/230V) 20 m or longer
Power cable for remote panel AC
MF-300 AC CORD 240V E adapter (For 240V) 1
TP8I0203.EPS

● List of Image Interface (Digital) Kit Components

Product Code Product Qty. Remarks

MF/DP IF DN #/E DPI90A board 1 Selected based on each order (If an O/E
converter is used for Siemens auto-filming,
select the DPI90B board; otherwise,
MF/DP IF SDN #/E DPI90B board 1 select the DPI90A board).
MF-300-D/HOST CABLE P **M #/E Digital cable
or (5, 10, 15, 20, 50, 100m) 1
MF-300-D/HOST CABLE S **M #/E (Host side connector male (P),
(** indicates the cable length) or female (S))
(Refer to HOST auto-filming connection HOST auto-filming connection cable Selected based on each order only when
1
cable list) (RS-232C or RS-422) performing auto-filming

Remote panel 1
MF/DP PNL A** #/E
(** Indicates software version) Operation manual 1
Cable for remote panel
1
(5, 10, 15, 20, 50, 100m)
MF-300-PNL CABLE **M N #/E
(** indicates the cable length) 1 Provided for remote panel cables 20 m or
Remote panel AC adapter
(N not shown for use in Japan (#)) longer
Power cable for remote panel AC Provided for remote panel cables 20 m or
1
adapter (For 100/120V) longer (Use in Japan only)
Power cable for remote panel AC
MF-300 AC CORD 120V E 1
adapter (For 100/120V)
Selected based on each order only for
Power cable for remote panel AC overseas use with remote panel cables
MF-300 AC CORD 220V E 1
adapter (For 200/230V) 20 m or longer
Power cable for remote panel AC
MF-300 AC CORD 240V E 1
adapter (For 240V)
TP8I0204.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -4
 SPECIFICATIONS -5

● Remote Panel Additional Switch

Product Code Product Qty. Remarks
MF-300 HAND SWITCH #/E Hand switch 1
Selected based on each order.
MF-300 FOOT SWITCH #/E Foot switch 1
TP8I0205.EPS

● Main Unit AC Power Supply Cable

Product Code Product Qty. Remarks
DPX AC CORD A E Power cable (for U.S. 100/120V) 1
DPX AC CORD B E Power cable (for U.K. 240V) 1 Selected based on each order for overseas
use
DPX AC CORD C E Power cable (for EU 230V) 1
TP8I0206.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -5
 SPECIFICATIONS -6

● List of HOST Auto-Filming Connection Cables

Product Code Product Qty. Remarks
HOST auto-filming connection cable
MF R-CBL 232 25P-25P TO **M #/E RS-232C • TX-RX reverse
Host side connector 25-pin male 1
(** indicates the cable length)
(5, 15m)
HOST auto-filming connection cable
MF R-CBL 232 25P-25S TO **M #/E RS-232C • TX-RX reverse
Host side connector 25-pin female 1
(** indicates the cable length)
(5, 15m)
HOST auto-filming connection cable
RS-232C • TX-RX reverse control
MF R-CBL 232 25P-25P CRS **M #/E signal return 1
(** indicates the cable length) Host side connector 25-pin male
(5, 15m)
HOST auto-filming connection cable
RS-232C • TX-RX reverse control
MF R-CBL 232 25P-25S CRS **M #/E signal return 1
(** indicates the cable length) Host side connector 25-pin male
(5, 15m)
HOST auto-filming connection cable
MF R-CBL 232 25P-25P ST **M #/E RS-232C straight
Host side connector 25-pin male 1
(** indicates the cable length)
(5, 15m)
HOST auto-filming connection cable
RS-232C Picker Shimadzu PRISM
MF R-CBL 232 25P-9S CRS **M #/E
Host side connector 9-pin female 1
(** indicates the cable length)
(5, 15m)
HOST auto-filming connection cable
RS-422 straight
MF-300 R-CBL 422 25P-37P **M #/E Host side connector 37-pin male
1
(** indicates the cable length) (5, 15, 20, 30, 50, 100m)
(15, 30m not available for use in
Japan (#))
HOST auto-filming connection cable
MF-300 R-CBL 422 25P-37S **M #/E RS-422 straight
Host side connector 37-pin female 1
(** indicates the cable length)
(5, 20, 50, 100m)
HOST auto-filming connection cable
MF-300 R-CBL 422 25P-15S **M #/E RS-422 Picker Shimadzu PRISM
Host side connector 15-pin female 1
(** indicates the cable length)
(20, 50, 100m)
HOST auto-filming connection relay
cable
MF-300 R-CBL AF-S2 1M N #/E 1 For DPI board
Use only for Siemens auto-filming
(0.3m)
HOST auto-filming connection relay
cable
MF R-CBL 25P-25S PK/MR 1.5M #/E 1 For DPI board
Use only for Picker MR auto-filming
(1.5m)
HOST auto-filming connection cable
MF R-CBL 232 25P-9S DSUB **M #/E RS-232C Picker Shimadzu DAR3000
Host side connector 9-pin female 1 For DPI board
(** indicates the cable length)
(5, 10, 15m)
Toshiba ADR1000A connection store
MF STORE-CBL TO/ADR 1M #/E 1
cable (1m) Connect the three cables in the set of store
Siemens POLYTRON TOP cables by HOST and extension store cables
MF STORE-CBL SMS/PT 1M #/E 1 (remote panel connection cable and extension
connection store cable (1m)
cable) between the EXT.SW connectors of
Remote panel connection cable the HOST and remote panel, and perform
MF STORE-CBL SET **M #/E 1
(1.9m) store control.
(** indicates the extension cable length)
Extension cable (15,30,50,100m) 1
TP8I0208.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -6
 SPECIFICATIONS -7

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -7
 SPECIFICATIONS -8

1.3 General Specifications

■ Features of this Equipment

● When DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) is not Connected

• Performs DICOM conversion of print data from non-DICOM modalities (medical
imaging devices input by E-I/F or AD-I/F) and outputs the data to the DICOM printer
for printing.
• DICOM protocols supported are:
• Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class (SCU)

● When DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) is Connected

• When DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) is connected by AD-I/F input,
image data from non-DICOM modalities such as CT/MRI, etc. will be sent to it.
• A special protocol based on FTP (File Transfer Protocol) is used for communication
between this equipment and DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function).
• DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) performs DICOM conversion of image
data, outputs the data to the DICOM printer for printing, or outputs the data to the
DICOM image server/viewer for storage.
<NOTE>
If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function), the main unit software version of
this equipment must be A03 or later. For details of specifications of DRYPIX Station (Image
Manager Function), refer to its service manual, etc.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -8
 SPECIFICATIONS -9

■ General

Item Specifications
Max. input/output E-I/F input : 7200 x 5080 pix
image size AD-I/F input : 4096 x 8190 pix
No. of input image bits 8/10 bits
Select any one from below (1 input)
E-I/F input : FIX90A board
Input interface
AD-I/F input : HAV90A/B/E board (analog video), DPI90A/B board (digital),
DVI90A board (digital video)
Output interface DICOM (Special protocol for connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function))
E-I/F input : No image processing performed
AD-I/F input : Specification of LUT number and enlargement/reduction processing type
Image processing only. No tone correction and enlargement/reduction processing performed.
(Tone correction (BAR/SAR) and enlargement/reduction processing
(SSM/A-VR) are performed at the printer)
E-I/F input : The same formatting as the CR-LP is performed according
to instructions from the image input device.
Recording format
AD-I/F input : The printer side performs formatting according to instructions from this
equipment.
E-I/F input : 64MWx1 for 10 pix/mm and 300 dpi recording, and 64MWx2 for 20 pix/mm
Image memory
recording
capacity
AD-I/F input : Maximum 64MWx2 (Depends on input image size and maximum number
(Standard 64MWx1)
of frames)
Image spool function None
Backup function when
Can be switched amongst pre-registered output destinations (Max. 10 units)
printer malfunctions
Test pattern output SMPTE/Gradation patterns
Provided (Sorting is carried out at the printer side with sorter based on information from
Sorting function
this equipment)
Basic functions can be used from the operation panel mounted inside this equipment and
remote panel (AD-I/F input).
Serviceability When using the sorting function, a service PC is required for setting sorting conditions.
When DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) is connected, a service PC is required
for editing connection related files.
Select the Patient ID, Accession No., or Reception # search key on the remote panel, and
Acquisition of patient/
enter the search information. The patient/study information corresponding to the search
study information
information entered will be acquired from DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function).
(When DRYPIX
(Search methods such as search by modality information, etc. (SEARCH) or search for
Station(Image
emergency situations (EMRGNCY) are also available)
Manager Function) is
When the main unit software version A04 or later, in addition to the above, the patient/
connected)
study information can directly be entered from the remote panel.
TP8I0209.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -9
 SPECIFICATIONS -10

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -10
 SPECIFICATIONS -11

1.4 Equipment Dimensions, Weight and Center of Gravity

■ Dimensions

● DRYPIX Link
160 mm x 433 mm x 323 mm (W x D x H)
(Excluding protrusions like louvers and screws)

323

433

160
FP8I0204.EPS

● Remote Panel
185 mm x 190 mm x 130 mm (W x D x H)

■ Weight

● DRYPIX Link
Maximum approximately 10 kg (differs according to specifications of optional parts)

● Remote Panel
Approximately 1.2 kg

■ Center of Gravity

● DRYPIX Link
Height : 233 mm
From right side : 85 mm
From front side : 205 mm

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -11
 SPECIFICATIONS -12

1.5 Environmental Requirements

■ Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure

❍ Operating
Temperature/Relative humidity : 15°C (40 to 70%RH) to 30°C (15 to 70%RH)
(No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa

• Operating temperature and relative humidity range:

[%RH]

70
Relative humidity

60
50
40
30
20
15
10

5 10 15 20 25 30 [°C]

Temperature FP8I0201.EPS

❍ Non-operating
Temperature : 0 to 45 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa

❍ Transit or Storage
Temperature : -10 to 50 °C
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa

■ Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement

Frequency: 10 to 55 Hz
Amplitude: Below 0.015 mm

■ Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less for both front and rear and right and left

■ Floor Flatness
Below 10 mm

■ Variable Magnetic Field

Below DC 100 Gauss

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -12
 SPECIFICATIONS -13

1.6 Electrical Requirements

■ Frequency
50 to 60 Hz ±3% (Single-phase)

■ Line Voltage

● DRYPIX Link
100 to 240 VAC ±10%

● Remote Panel
15 VDC (Supplied from the equipment main body or AC adapter)

■ Capacity
200 VA

■ Power Cable
3m

■ Rated Current

● DRYPIX Link
100 to 240 V : 2 to 1 A

● Remote Panel
1 A (15 VDC)

■ Grounding Resistance
100 ohm or less

■ Overload Protection
3.15A

■ Power Consumption

● DRYPIX Link
80 W

● Remote Panel
15 W

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -13
 SPECIFICATIONS -14

1.7 Other Specifications

■ Maximum Heat Generation
Standby/Operation : 60 kcal/hr

■ Noise Level
Standby/Operation : Below 45 dB
(Measuring conditions: Distance of 1m from the equipment main body, and height of
1.5m)

■ Start up Time
Within 2 minutes

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -14
 SPECIFICATIONS -15

1.8 Equipment Installation Space

■ Minimum Installation Space
50

Rear

20 50

Front

Unit: mm
20 FP8I0202.EPS

■ Space Required for Maintenance Work

600

Rear

600 600

Front

Unit: mm
600 FP8I0203.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS -15
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

 MD-1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3360) All pages
10/25/2002 01 Revised (FM3576) 1, 16, 18, 24~26
01/20/2003 02 Revised (FM3671) 1, 3, 14, 19, 26~29
05/15/2003 03 Revised (FM4011) 1, 3, 7, 10, 24, 26

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-1
 MD-2

1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT

1.1 System Configuration Example

■ System Configuration Example 1 (E-I/F • CR)
Hospital network

DRYPIX Link 10Base-T/

E-I/F 100Base-TX
FCR FIX90A

DRYPIX 1000

FP8D0101.EPS

■ System Configuration Example 2 (E-I/F • PS)

Hospital network Hospital network

FCR
(FINP) DRYPIX 3000

CT
(DICOM)

MRI
(TOSHIBA)
DRYPIX Link 10Base-T/
E-I/F 100Base-TX
FN-PS551 FIX90A

FP8D0102.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-2
 MD-3

■ System Configuration Example 3 (AD-I/F • Various diagnostic devices such as CT/

MRI, etc.)

Remote Hospital network

Panel
DRYPIX Link
10Base-T/
CT/MRI, etc. HAV90A/HAV90B/ 100Base-TX
(Analog video/ HAV90E/DVI90A/
Digital video/ DPI90A/DPI90B
AD-I/F
Digital)

DRYPIX 3000

FP8D0104.EPS

■ System Configuration Example 4 (AD-I/F • DRYPIX Station (Image Manager

Function) Connection)

Remote Hospital network

Panel
DRYPIX Link
HAV90A/HAV90B/ 10Base-T/
CT/MRI, etc. 100Base-TX
(Analog video/ HAV90E/DVI90A/
Digital video/ DPI90A/DPI90B
AD-I/F
Digital)

Special protocol
based on FTP

DRYPIX Station
(Image Manager
Function) 10Base-T/
100Base-TX

DICOM print

DRYPIX 7000

DICOM storage

Synapse

FP8D0105.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-3
 MD-4

2. OVERALL CONFIGURATION AND NAME OF PARTS

2.1 External View

Status display LED

Orange Green
(ERROR) (READY)

Green
(POWER)

POWER switch

Front cover Right cover

Louver (Intake)

Remote panel (AD-I/F only)

FP8D0202.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-4
 MD-5

AC inlet

Additional protective
grounding terminal

Fan (Exhaust)

Left cover

FP8D0203.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-5
 MD-6

2.2 Internal Configuration

3

9
8
5
7
6 FP8D0204.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-6
 MD-7

No. Name No. Name

1 PNL15C (Opration panel board) 7 CPU90K (CPU board)

2 FDD (Floppy disk drive) 8 LAN90C (Network interface board)

3 Power supply unit 9 HAV90A/B/E (Analog video interface board)

4 MTH15B (Mother board) DVI90A (Digital video interface board)

5 MEM15B (Image memory board) DPI90A/B (Digital interface board)

6 IMG15C (Image processing board) FIX90A (E-I/F board)

TP8D0202.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-7
 MD-8

2.3 Operation Panel

3 2 1 10

LED1 LED3
LED2 PWR RDY
ERR
SW5

4
R/L

VR1

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

5 6 7 8 9

FP8D0201.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-8
 MD-9

No. Name Function

1 READY display • When lit: Online status (Routine mode)

(Green) • When OFF: Offline status
• When blinking: Ttransitioning to M-Utility

2 POWER display • When lit: AC power is supplied

(Green) • When OFF: AC power is not supplied

3 ERROR display • When lit: Indicates that level 0 error has occurred.
(Orange) • When OFF: Normal
• When blinking: Indicates transitioning to level 0 error state

4 SW5 • Remote: Power is turned ON/OFF by power remote control from the image input
(REMOTE/LOCAL switch) device or remote panel.
• Local: Allows the equipment to be turned ON/OFF individually using the
POWER switch on the equipment.

5 SW1 Pressing in the M-Utility mode displays an upper menu of the menu tree.
(UP arrow key)

6 SW2 Pressing in the M-Utility mode displays a lower menu of the menu tree.
(DOWN arrow key)

7 SW3 Pressing during the M-Utility mode, the menu displayed determines, and displays
(ENTER key) to the lower items in the menu tree, or executes the menu command.

8 SW4 • Pressing together with the UP arrow key during a routine mode changes to the
(CANCEL key) M-Utility mode.
• Pressing while a M-Utility mode menu is selected or while the
execution results are being displayed shows the upper items in the tree.

9 VR1 If the LCD visibility is poor due to the location of this equipment (installed at high
(LCD deflection angle places, etc.), adjust with the LCD deflection angle control.
control)

10 Message display 16 characters x 2 lines liquid crystal display (LCD)

TP8D0201.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-9
 MD-10

3. INPUT IMAGE I/F SPECIFICATION

Analog video High speed Analog video Digital video
Image Type analog video (new) Digital

Image I/F board HAV90A board HAV90B board HAV90E board DVI90A board DPI90A/B board

Signal type B/W composite video or B/W component video Digital video Digital

Scanning method Interlace or non-interlace -

Sync signal polarity Negative polarity -
Video signal 0.7Vp-p±10%
Amplitude ECL level RS-422 level
Sync signal 0.3Vp-p±10%

Input image size 4096 x 8190 max.

(Horizontal pixel x However, depends
2048 x 2048 max. on image memory
vertical line)
size

Pixel clock frequency 7~79MHz 79~159MHz 7~159MHz 20~79MHz Maximum

transmission
Horizontal sync speed
15.5~70kHz 15.5~80kHz 27.5~70kHz
frequency 1MW/S

Serrated pulse The interval from a falling edge to a falling edge of the sync signal and
serrated pulse must be constant -

34p flat cable Dsub 37p

Input connector BNC connector connector
connector
Input impedance 75Ω - -
TP8D0301.EPS

Image Type E-I/F

Image I/F board FIX90A board

Signal type Digital

Scanning method -
Sync signal polarity -

Amplitude RS-422 level

8192 x 8192 max.

Input image size However, depends
(Horizontal pixel x on specifications
vertical line) of equipment
used
Pixel clock frequency Maximum
transmission
Horizontal sync speed
frequency 1MW/S

Serrated pulse -

50p square
Input connector connector
Input impedance -
TP8D0302.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-10
 MD-11

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-11
 MD-12

4. MESSAGE DISPLAY
The following describes the transition of messages displayed when the equipment is
started, their meanings, and some examples of messages displayed in the routine
mode.
<REMARKS>
The following shows an example of the operation panel LED display described in this chapter.
Operation Panel LED Display

: OFF
ERROR POWER READY : Lit
FP8D0408.EPS

■ Transition of Messages When Equipment is Started

● At Start-up
About 15 seconds after the equipment is turned ON, the start-up display appears.
Operation Panel LED Display

FU J I PHOTO F I LM
Co . , L t d . ERROR POWER READY

FP8D0401.EPS

● When Initial Program Load (IPL)

After the equipment starts up, the IPL processing step will be displayed. (About 40
seconds)
Operation Panel LED Display
FU J I PHOTO F I LM
Co . , L t d . IL-0 ERROR POWER READY

Operation Panel LED Display

FU J I PHOTO F I LM
Co . , L t d . IL-7 ERROR POWER READY

Step Processing
IL-0 Self-diagnosis of board
IL-1 Initialization of LAN90C board
(Reception of notification of completion of initialization)
IL-2 No processing (Step display only)
IL-3 Setting of IPL table
IL-4 Verification of board mounting state
IL-5 • FD mounting
• Reading of FILE.TBL from FD
IL-6 • Memory card mounting
• Reading of FILE.TBL from memory card

IL-7 • Reading of operation panel application

• Jumps to OS
FP8D0402.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-12
 MD-13

● INITIALIZING Message
INITIALIZING will be displayed for about 15 seconds after IPL completes.
Operation Panel LED Display
I N I T I A L I Z I NG • • •
ERROR POWER READY

FP8D0403.EPS

● Version Message
After INITIALIZING is displayed, the version will be displayed from about 15 seconds.
Operation Panel LED Display
1 1 4Y5 3 9 7 0 0 2 A0 1
ERROR POWER READY

FP8D0404.EPS

● Self-diagnosis in Initialization
During self-diagnosis, the progress of initialization (each step) is displayed.
Step
Operation Panel LED Display
0005
– ERROR POWER READY

Estimate time

Operation Panel LED Display

0001
ERROR POWER READY

Time elapsed

Message displayed during idling

Step Processing

0005 FMT initialization

0004 No processing (Step display only)

0003 No processing (Step display only)

0002 No processing (Step display only)

0001 No processing (Step display only)

FP8D0405.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-13
 MD-14

■ Messages Displayed in Routime Mode

● During Idling
❍ When no input device is connected
(E-I/F connection: E-I/F line not established, AD-I/F connection: Remote panel
power OFF)
Operation Panel LED Display
READY
ERROR POWER READY

❍ When input device is connected

(E-I/F connection: E-I/F line established, AD-I/F connection: Remote panel
power ON)
Operation Panel LED Display

CONN E C TED
ERROR POWER READY

FP8D0406.EPS

<REMARKS>
The “CONNECTED” displayed when an input device is connected can be changed to any
character using the M-Utility.

● During Printing
Operation Panel LED Display
CONNECTED
AE - T I T L E ERROR POWER READY

Name of printer output to FP8D0407.EPS

<REMARKS>
• The AE Title of the printer set using the M-Utility will be displayed for the name of the printer
output to.
• When DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) is connected, the host name of DRYPIX
Station set using the M-Utility will be displayed instead of the name of printer output to.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-14
 MD-15

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-15
 MD-16

5. ELECTRICAL CONTROL

5.1 System Block Diagram

PNL15C
+5V/ signal

MTH15B

MEM15B
SLOT4 IMG15C (Image memory)

MEM15B
(Image memory)

signal
SLOT3 CPU90K FDD

Image output (Network)

SLOT2 LAN90C

Image I/F Image input (E-I/F, AD-I/F)

SLOT1
board
+5V/-5.2V/
+15V/-15V

+5V
signal

(+12V)

AC input Power supply unit Fan

FP8D0501.EPS

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-16
 MD-17

5.2 Function of Each Board

5.2.1 MTH15B Board

■ Outline
The MTH15B board is a mother board inserted with the control boards of this
equipment.
It has control functions of its buzzer and I/Os (LED/LCD displays, key inputs) on the
operation panel board (PNL15C board).

5.2.2 CPU90K Board

■ Outline
The CPU90K board is a CPU board controlling overall operations of this equipment. It
is composed of the following main parts.
• Main CPU : Motorola MC68020 (25 MHz)
• Main memory : SDRAM (32MB)
• Backup RAM : SRAM (128KB) (Data preserved by lithium battery)
• Boot ROM : EPROM (128KB)
• Flash memory : Kanji ROM (1 MB)
• Memory card control : 2 slot (One ATA card used for storing the main unit
software of this equipment)
• Interrupt controller
• Timer controller
• Real time clock
• FD controller
• Serial communication controller

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-17
 MD-18

5.2.3 IMG15C Board

■ Outline
The IMG15C board is composed of a CBC unit (common memory bus controller) to
transfer high speed image data.
• CBC x 1
• Image memory slot x 3 (Maximum 64MW x 2 for this equipment)
• Serial I/O x 2 (For remote maintenance and debugging)
• Control register (System power OFF, high speed clearing and starting)
• Status register (Image memory status, remote maintenance DCD)

5.2.4 PNL15C Board

■ Outline
The PNL15C board is the operation panel board used for displaying the status of the
equipment and for maintenance. It is composed of the following parts.
The I/O control of the PNL15C board is carried out by the MTH15B board based on
control signals from the CPU90K board.
• LED x 3 (POWER/ERROR/READY equipment status displays)
• Slide switch x 1 (Remote/Local switching of the built-in power supply of the
equipment)
• Tact switch x 4 (UP arrow key/DOWN arrow key/ENTER key/CANCEL key)
• LCD : 16 characters x 2 lines character module
: With backlight
: Custom character generation function

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-18
 MD-19

5.2.5 LAN90C Board

RS232C
for debugging For JTAG ICE
D-Sub 9pin (M) hard debugging

Board reset SW DIPSW LED x 4

4bit
232C
TX/RX 10/100M
10/100M Physical Ethernet/
SH3 Main SDRAM Ethernet layer chip status LED
7709A 128MB controller (NS)
with VxWOrks (SMC)

68k bus
interface

Remote power
supply control
IPL & FT APPL contact signal
Bus control image data
flush flush
input/output interface
ROM(1MB) ROM(4MB)

FP5D0404.EPS

■ Outline
• The LAN90C board is an image interface board which performs DICOM conversion
of image data and outputs data to the network.
• When DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) is connected, use special protocol
(no DICOM conversion) based on FTP.

■ Main Functions

● External Interface
• 10Base-T/100Base-TX
• Power supply link contact signal

● Internal Interface
• JTAG-ICE signal for hardware debugging
• Serial for software debugging

● Transfer Function
• More than 1 MB/second (TCP/IP)

● Program Storage
• Onboard flash memory

● Software Version Upgrade

• Download from FD or using PC tool

● Interface with CPU90K Board

• Exchange of data with status, command register, and 2-port memory by two-way
interruption
• Has unique reset port with software control function
006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-19
 MD-20

5.2.6 Power Supply Unit

■ DC Power Supply Specifications

● Input Voltage
AC100 to 240 V ±10%

● Input Frequency
50 to 60 Hz ±3 Hz

● Input Capacity
Below 2 A

● Current Leakage
Normal operations: Below 0.3 mA

■ Output Specifications

● DC Output
• DC+5V
• DC+5VS
• DC-5.2V
• DC+15V
• DC-15V

■ Remote Control
All outputs can be remote controlled (except DC+5VS)

■ Safety Standards
UL2601-1, EN60601-1, CSAC22.2 No. 601.1

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-20
 MD-21

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-21
 MD-22

6. IMAGE DATA PROCESSING

6.1 Image Data Flow

6.1.1 E-I/F Connection

(MEM15B)
Image memory
board (MEM15B) In-hospital network
Input Output
buffer buffer
CPU board Mother board
(CPU90K) (MTH15B)
Memory (2) (3) Printer

(1) Image processing board

(IMG15C)

E-I/F image E-I/F image input

device board (FIX90A) Network I/F board
(LAN90C)
(4) (5)

LAN buffer

FP8D0602.EPS

(1) Various print information (film size, format, frame image print position
coordinates, image rotation, reversal information, etc.) is input from the E-I/F
image input board, and transferred to the memory on the CPU board.
(2) Image processed frame image data (CR image processing, or enlargement/
reduction processing, tone processing, etc.) is input from the E-I/F image input
board, and transferred to the input buffer of the image memory board on the
image processing board.
This data input and transfer are repeated for all frames.
(3) The unit of printing is determined at the point print instructions are received, and
based on the print information stored in the memory of the CPU board, print image
data is compiled, and stored in the output buffer of the image memory board.
<REMARKS>
This equipment does not perform enlargement/reduction processing, tone processing, etc.

(4) Print image data is transferred to the LAN buffer on the network I/F board from the
output buffer of the image memory board.
The various print information such as film size, etc. stored on the memory of the
CPU board are also transferred to the LAN buffer.
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-22
 MD-23

(5) The print image data in the LAN buffer and various print information are converted
to DICOM data, and transferred sequentially by requesting for printing to the
specified printer via the network.
The printer prints the print image data sent from this equipment. No image
processing is carried out.
<REMARKS>
• If there is print request (reprint) before the next image input, steps (3) to (5) above are
performed based on image data just before stored in the input buffer of the image memory
board.
• The image memory board at E-I/F image input is a buffer for only one printing job. Each time
new image data is input, the data is overwritten.
The data volume of the LAN buffer is equivalent to the memory capacity (90MB), and output
data is overwritten by new data from the oldest one in order.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-23
 MD-24

6.1.2 AD-I/F Connection

(MEM15B)
Image memory
board (MEM15B) In-hospital network
Input buffer
CPU board Mother board
(CPU90K) (MTH15B)
Memory (2) Printer

(1) Image processing board

(IMG15C)

Remote
panel
Image input board
(HAV90A/HAV90B/
Diagnostic
HAV90E/DVI90A/ Network I/F board
devices (LAN90C)
DPI90A/DPI90B)
(3) (4)

LAN buffer

FP8D0601.EPS

(1) Various print information (film size, format, LUT number, enlargement/reduction
processing type, etc.) is input and transferred to the memory on the CPU board.
• In auto-filming connection, data is input by host control exchange with
diagnostic devices.
• In manual exposure connection, data is input from the remote panel connected
to the image input board.
(2) Frame image data is input from the image input board from diagnostic devices,
and transferred to the image memory board on the image processing board.
This data input and transfer are repeated for all frames.
• In auto-filming connection, frame image data is input by host control exchange
with diagnostic devices, and the print unit is determined at the point print
commands are received.
• In manual exposure connection, frame image data is input by operating the
Store key on the remote panel, and the print unit is determined at the point the
Print key is pressed.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-24
 MD-25

(3) The unit of printing is determined at the point print instructions are received, and
frame image data in this unit of printing is transferred to the LAN buffer on the
network I/F board from the image memory board. Various print information such
as film size stored in the memory of the CPU board is also transferred to the LAN
buffer.
<REMARKS>
This equipment does not perform enlargement/reduction processing, tone processing, etc.

(4) Frame image data in the unit of printing of the LAN buffer and various print
information are converted to DICOM data, and transferred sequentially by
requesting for printing to the specified printer via the network.
The printer performs formatting, enlargement /reduction processing, tone
processing and prints according to the print information sent from this equipment.
<REMARKS>
• If there is print request (reprint) before the next image input, steps (3) and (4) above are
performed based on image data just before storage in the image memory board.
• The image memory board in AD-I/F image input functions as an input buffer; the buffer does
not differ for input and output as in the case of E-I/F image input.
It stores data equivalent to the image memory capacity (max. 64MWx2), and data
transferred to the LAN buffer are overwritten by new data in order.
• The data volume of the LAN buffer is equivalent to the memory capacity (90MB), and output
data is overwritten by new data from the oldest one in order.

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-25
 MD-26

6.1.3 When Connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) by AD-I/F

In-hospital network

(MEM15B) Image
Image Memory server/
viewer
board (MEM15B)
Input buffer
(7)
CPU board Mother board
(CPU90K) (MTH15B) Printer

Memory
(3)
(6)
(2) Image processing board DRYPIX
(IMG15C) Station
(1) (7) (Image
Remote Manager
Function)
panel Image input board
(HAV90A/HAV90B/ Network I/F board
Diagnostic HAV90E/DVI90A/ (LAN90C)
devices DPI90A/DPI90B)

(4) (5)

LAN buffer
FP8D0603.EPS

(1) Select the Patient ID, Accession No., or Reception # search key on the remote
panel, and enter the search information. The patient/study information
corresponding to the search information entered will be acquired from DRYPIX
Station (Image Manager Function).
Identify patient/study information acquired and implement the procedure for
starting studies (identified patient/study information are stored in the memory of
the CPU board), and start one series of studies.
<REMARKS>
When the main unit software version A04 or later, in addition to the above, the patient/study
information can directly be entered and starting studies as well from the remote panel.

(2) Various print information (film size, format, LUT number, enlargement/reduction
processing type, etc.) is input and transferred to the memory on the CPU board.
• In auto-filming connection, data is input by host control exchange with
diagnostic devices.
• In manual exposure connection, data is input from the remote panel connected
to the image input board.
(3) Frame image data is input from the image input board from diagnostic devices,
and transferred to the image memory board on the image processing board.
This data input and transfer are repeated for all frames.
• In auto-filming connection, frame image data is input by host control exchange
with diagnostic devices, and the print unit is determined at the point print
commands are received.
• In manual exposure connection, frame image data is input by operating the
Store key on the remote panel, and the print unit is determined at the point the
Print key is pressed.
006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-26
 MD-27

(4) The unit of printing is determined at the point print instructions are received, and
frame image data in this unit of printing is transferred to the LAN buffer on the
network I/F board from the image memory board.
The various print information and patient/study information stored in the memory
of the CPU board are also transferred to the LAN buffer.
<REMARKS>
This equipment does not perform enlargement/reduction processing, tone processing, etc.

(5) Frame image data in the unit of printing of the LAN buffer, various print
information, and patient/study information are transferred to DRYPIX Station
(Image Manager Function) sequentially using special protocol (no conversion to
DICOM data).
<REMARKS>
• If there is print request (reprint) before the next image input, steps (4) and (5) above are
performed based on image data just before storage in the image memory board.
• The image memory board in AD-I/F image input functions as an input buffer; the buffer does
not differ for input and output as in the case of E-I/F image input.
It stores data equivalent to the image memory capacity (max. 64MWx2), and data
transferred to the LAN buffer are overwritten by new data in order.
• The data volume of the LAN buffer is equivalent to the memory capacity (90MB), and output
data is overwritten by new data from the oldest one in order.

(6) DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) converts image data sent from this
equipment to DICOM data, and outputs the data to the specified DICOM printer
for printing.
The printer then carries out formatting, enlargement/reduction processing, tone
processing, and prints according to the print information sent from DRYPIX
Station (Image Manager Function).
If performing several printing jobs in the one series of studies, steps (2) to (6) are
repeated.
(7) Perform the procedure for ending studies on the remote panel when the one
series of studies has completed. Completion of the one series of studies is
notified to DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function).
At this point, DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) outputs the image data
of the one series of studies to the specified DICOM image server/viewer for
storage.
<REMARKS>
• For details of the operations of DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function), refer to its
service manual, etc.
• If DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) has been disabled on the remote panel, the
operations described in “6.1.2 AD-I/F Connection” are performed.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-27
 MD-28

6.2 Relation Between Image Memory and Storable Images

■ Image Memory Capacity

● AD-I/F Connection

Memory capacity Image Added image Total image Input image size
provided as standard buffer memory buffer memory buffer memory 512x512 1024x1024
Approx. 60
200 images images or
64MW Approx. 61MW * – Approx. 61MW
or 50 prints 50 prints

200 images Approx. 120

* Of the 64 MW memory provided as 64MW Approx. 125MW images or
or 50 prints
standard, approx. 61MW of the image 50 prints
buffer memory can be used.
Number of images : Max. 200 images
Number of prints : Max. 50 prints
TP8D0601.EPS

● E-I/F Connection
In E-I/F connection, the buffer functions for one printing job only. Therefore in 10 pix/
mm and 300 dpi recording, use the 64MW memory equipped as standard. In 20 pix/mm
recording, there is a need to add another 64 MW memory as the image buffer memory
is insufficient.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-28
 MD-29

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MD-29
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
 MT-1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3360) All pages
01/20/2003 02 Revised (FM3671) 1, 19, 22, 23, 33, 35~37
05/15/2003 03 Revised (FM4011) 1, 5, 10, 21~25, 44~53, 64
11/10/2003 04 Revised (FM4153) 1, 21~25, 31~36, 59

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-1
 MT-2

1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
When malfunctions occur in the equipment, analyze them from error codes, abnormal
operation and perform the required corrections.

■ Troubleshooting Methods
The following two troubleshooting methods are available.

● Troubleshooting from Error Codes

When an error code is displayed on the message display, analyze the malfunction from
that error code.
When no error codes are displayed, the malfunction can be analyzed from the error log.
When analyzing malfunctions from error codes, refer to “2. ERROR CODE”.

● Troubleshooting from Abnormal Operations

When analyzing malfunctions from abnormal operations, refer to “3. ABNORMAL
OPERATIONS”.

When checking the equipment in troubleshooting, refer also to “4.

TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE”, “5. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS”.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-2
 MT-3

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-3
 MT-4

2. ERROR CODE

2.1 Checking Error Codes

■ Reading Error Codes
P: Printer error
F: Formatter error
N: Network error
Error code

ERROR : P : 0 3 0 0
3011
Detailed information FP8T0201.EPS

■ Checking Error Logs

The following describes how to check error logs.
(1) Start the M-Utility.
(2) [1. System>]→<ENTER>→<DOWN arrow key>→<DOWN arrow key>→[1.3
Err.Log Data>]→<ENTER>→[1-3-1. Error Log #1]→<ENTER>
→ The following error log 1 display appears.

1-3-1- M
YY : X AAAA BBBB

Pressing the <ENTER> key repeatedly displays

the error code, and date and time of the error.

1-3-1- M
CC - CC - CC DD : DD

Contents of display
YY : Index
X : Error source differentiation (P: Printer, F: Formatter, N: Network)
AAAA : Error code (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
BBBB : Detailed error information (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
CCCCCC : Date error occurred
DDDD : Time error occurred FP8T0202.EPS

(3) For details on error codes, refer to “2.3 Error Code Tables” for the meaning of the
error which has occurred, suspected cause, and remedy.
When analyzing an error code, also refer to the detailed code provided.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-4
 MT-5

■ Error Codes of Printer

The format of error codes of the printer is as follows.

Error Code P: A B C D

A: 0: Stop error (System down)

1: Warning error (Recoverable by user intervention)
2: Log error (Process resumable)
3: Internal error (Design analysis)

B: Printer subsystem number

3: Data setting/system related (MFC)
6: Utility related (UTL)
7: Panel related (PNL)
B: Memory card related
C: FD related
A: Others
D: Others
F: Others

C, D: Consecutive numbers FP8T0203.EPS

■ Error Codes of Formatter

The format of error codes of the formatter is as follows.

Error Code F: A B C D

A: 0: Stop error (System down)

1: Warning error (Recoverable by user intervention)
2: Log error (Process resumable)

B: 0: Error when system is started/ended

1: Input channel number
2: Others
7: Others
A: Others
B: Others
E: Others

C, D: Consecutive numbers
FP8T0204.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-5
 MT-6

2.2 Format of Detailed Information

Perform this check only for analyzing error codes.
In the usual troubleshooting, find the corresponding error code from the error code
tables, and refer to the suspected causes and remedy methods indicated to resolve the
problem.
However if the problem persists, or to investigate the problem in further detail, check
the following detailed information to analyze the problem.

■ Checking Detailed Information of Error Codes

(1) Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at the error
message display, or at [1-3-1. Error Log #1] of the M-Utility.
(2) Check the detailed information format number at “2.3 Error Code Tables” and
refer to the corresponding format.
(3) Find the format information from the 4-digit detailed information, and analyze the
problem.

1-3-1- M
01 : P 0300 3011

(1)

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
The configuration file on the memory card is
Configuration file Failed in open/load the configuration damaged. Or malfunction of the memory card.
0300 load error file. (The file did not exist, etc.)
3-B
1. Re-install in the full install mode.
2. Replace the CPU board.

(2)

3-B (File I/O Error)

(3)
3 0 1 1
Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal)
3 X X X

File number Cause FP8T0205.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-6
 MT-7

■ Checking Detailed Information of Network Error Codes

(1) Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at the error
message display, or at [1-3-1. Error Log #1] of the M-Utility.
(2) If there are several of the same error codes, determine the error from “Detailed
information”.

1-3-1- M
0 1 : N 0 0 1 0 0 0 0A

(1)

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information
Incorrect installation of the network information files, or
malfunction of the LAN/MTH board.
Network information Error occurred during network 1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH
0010 analysis error information analysis. board correctly. 000A
2. Install the required files.
3. Replace the LAN board.
4. Replace the MTH board.

(2)

FP8T0219.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-7
 MT-8

2.2.1 MFC Related Detailed Error Information

<REMARKS>
The information provided in this section is intended for design analysis.

■ 3-A

Detailed error code

(4-digit hexadecimal)
A B C D
FP5T0207.EPS

Details of Code
A to B (Error generation matrix number)
1: MFC-ROOT
2: XSTARTUP
3: XINITIAL
4: XROUTINE
5: XMAINTE
6: XMPRMAIN
7: XMPRTRX
8: XMPRPTN
9: XMPRIMG
A: XMPRPIC
B: XMPRSCN
C: XMPRREC
D: XUSERIF
E: XMFCUSYN
F: XMFCERR
FF: XMFCERR

B to D
XXX: Status value of above matrix

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-8
 MT-9

■ 3-B (File I/O Error)

Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the number of
the file causing the error and the causes.

Detailed error code

(4-digit hexadecimal)
3 X X X

File number Cause FP5T0212.EPS

Details of code
File number
301: System parameter file
302: Default value file by CH
303: File setting file
304: Version No. file
305: Other files
306: Other files
307: Other files
308: Other files
309: Other files

Causes
1: Open error
2: Read error
3: Write error
4: Conversion error
5: Line specification error
6: Column specification error
7: Size specification error
8: External file data error
A: Data range error (Detected by application)

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-9
 MT-10

2.3 Error Code Tables

Names abbreviated in error code tables are as follows.

Abbreviated Name Format Name

CPU board CPU90K board

MTH board MTH15B board

IMG board IMG15C board

PNL board PNL15C board

FIX board FIX90A board

HAV board HAV90A board

HAV90B board
HAV90E board

DPI board DPI90A board

DPI90B board

DVI board DVI90A board

LAN board LAN90C board

FDD Floppy disk drive

TP8T0201.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-10
 MT-11

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-11
 MT-12

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-12
 MT-13

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-13
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00
■ Operation Panel Error Code

● Error Code (Printer)

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

The configuration file on the memory card is damaged. Or

Configuration file load Failed to open/load the configuration malfunction of the memory card.
0300 error file. (The file did not exist, etc.) 1. Re-install in the full install mode.
3-B
2. Replace the CPU board.

The contents of the backup RAM are damaged, or cleared to

The contents of the backup RAM were 0.
0301 Backup RAM data error abnormal when the equipment was 1. Clear the backup RAM (default setting), and check again. 3-A
started. (Load individual data if necessary)
2. Replace the CPU board.

Incorrect software installation, malfunction

of the memory card, or defects in the vicinity of the CPU on the
0330- CPU board.
Failed to start the task of the printer 1. Re-install the software, and read the individual data FD.
Task start error 3-A
0334 subsystem. 2. Replace with the correct memory card, and re-install the
software.
3. Replace the CPU board.

Panel driver
0701 initialization error
Panel driver error Replace the panel unit or board *1

FD was loaded when the equipment

1701 FD load error
was started.
Press the required keys or remove the FD. *1

The corresponding file does not exist in the FD during READ.

Failed in writing the following data in the During WRITE, the FD is write-protected, unformatted, or
FD access error (During FD. damaged.
1A21 write) 1. Backup RAM data 1. Replace with a proper FD. Release the protect when writing.
None
2. Error code 2. Replace the FDD.
3. Replace the CPU board.

A file exists in the FD but cannot be read during READ.

The file or FD is damaged.
FD access error (During Failed in loading the FD in the backup
1A22 read) RAM.
1. Replace with a proper FD. None
2. Replace the FDD.
MT-14

MT-14
3. Replace the CPU board.

*1: 0001; Parameter error, 0002; LCD time out, 0003; LCD data write error, 0004; Sensor driver error, FFFF; Other errors
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
Incorrect installation of the software, or defect of the LAN
Occurs when the response for the board.
1A49 Test print store error image data transfer request issued by 1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board None
the LANM task is negative. correctly.
2. Check that the LAN cable is connected properly.
3. If the problem persists, re-install the LAN side software, and
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

Occurs when the print response or film

after starting the equipment, load the equipment individual
1A4A Test print print error output completion notification issued by
data in the FD.
None
the LANM task is negative.
4. Replace the LAN board.
Memory card mounting
1B01 error
Failed in mounting the memory card.
The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or
None
defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
Memory card control
1B02 error
Failed in control of the memory card. 1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. None
2. Replace the memory card.
Memory card control 3. Replace the CPU board.
1B03 error
Failed in control of the memory card. None

Memory card file The file system of the memory card has The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or
1B08 system error malfunctioned. defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board. None
1. Set the formatted memory card correctly to the CPU board.
Memory card 2. Replace the memory card, then format the card.
1B09 unformatted
The memory card is unformatted. 3. Replace the CPU board. None

Memory card control The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or
1B0A error
Failed in control of the memory card. defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board. None
1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board.
Memory card control 2. Replace the memory card.
1B0B error
Failed in control of the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.
None

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. Check
1B0C Memory card write error Failed in writing of the memory card. that the write-protection has been released. None
2. Replace the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.

Memory card control The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or
1B0D error
Failed in control of the memory card. defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board. None
1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board.
Memory card file read Failed in reading file from the memory 2. Replace the memory card.
MT-15

1B10

MT-15
3. Replace the CPU board. None
error card.
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
Memory card file write 1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. Check
1B11 error
Failed in writing file to the memory card. that the write-protection has been released. None
2. Replace the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
Memory card control
1B13 error
Failed in control of the memory card. 1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. None
2. Replace the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
Failed in opening file of the memory 1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. Check
1B16 Memory card open error
card. that the write-protection has been released. None
2. Replace the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
1B17 Memory card read error Failed in reading memory card contents. 1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. None
2. Replace the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
Memory card file Exceeded the allowable file number of 1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board.
1B18 number exceeded error the memory card. Delete unused files. None
2. Replace the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

1B19 Memory card open error Failed in opening the memory card file. defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board. None
1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. Check
that the write-protection has been released.
2. Replace the memory card.
1B20 Memory card open error Failed in opening the memory card file.
3. Replace the CPU board.
None
MT-16

MT-16
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
Failed in reading the memory card
1B22 Memory card read error
contents
1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. None
2. Replace the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or

defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. Check
1B23 Memory card write error Failed in writing file to the memory card. that the write-protection has been released. None
2. Replace the memory card.
3. Replace the CPU board.

Memory card control

1B24 error
Failed in control of the memory card.
The memory card is not set correctly to the CPU board, or
None
defect of the memory card, defect of the CPU board.
Memory card control
1B25 error
Failed in control of the memory card. 1. Set the memory card correctly to the CPU board. None
2. Replace the memory card.
Memory card control 3. Replace the CPU board.
1B26 error
Failed in control of the memory card. None

Format error of a file in the memory card.

Memory card file format Failed in various controls of the memory
1BFF error card.
1. Return the file format to the correct format. None
2. Load the saved file from the FD.

The FD is damaged.
1. Replace with an appropriate FD. check that the write-
1C00 FD mounting error Failed in mounting FD file. protection has been released. None
2. Replace the FDD.
3. Replace the CPU board.
The applicable file does not exist in the FD during READ.
The FD is write-protected during WRITE or is unformatted.
Or the FD is damaged.
1C01 FD file open error Failed in opening FD file. 1. Replace with an appropriate FD. Release the protect if None
writing data.
2. Replace the FDD.
3. Replace the CPU board.
The applicable file exists in the FD during READ but cannot be
read. The file is faulty, or the FD is damaged.
1C02 FD file read error Failed in reading FD file. 1. Replace with an appropriate FD. None
MT-17

MT-17
2. Replace the FDD.
3. Replace the CPU board.
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format

The file in the FD can be opened but not written during WRITE.
The file is faulty, or the FD is damaged.
1C03 FD file write error Failed in writing FD file. 1. Replace with an appropriate FD. None
2. Replace the FDD.
3. Replace the CPU board.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

No FD is set in the FDD, or is set but cannot be acknowledged,

or the FD is damaged.
1C04 FD unmounted Failed in acknowledging FD. 1. Replace with an appropriate FD. None
2. Replace the FDD.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Data transfer between FD and main
FD data transfer time-
1C90 out
body was not performed within the None
specified time.

1CC0 FD NOT-READY The FDD is not ready. None

The FDD received an invalid command

1CC8 FD command invalid
and cannot execute.
None

The FDD performed retry but failed after

1CD0 FD retry-over
the specified number of retries.
None

1. Replace with an appropriate FD.

1CD1 FD-SEEK error The FDD failed in SEEK operations. 2. Replace the FDD. None
3. Replace the CPU board.

The FDD attempted to READ/WRITE

1CE0 FD sector error
exceeding the final sector.
None

1CE2 FD data CRC error Detected a CRC error None

1CE3 FD disk ID error An ID error generated in the FD data. None

MT-18

MT-18
1CE4 FD write-protect Detected a write protect signal. None
01.20.2003 FM3671
006-260-02

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format

1CE5 FD write-protect Detected a write protect signal. None

The sector ID and specified IDR

1CE6 FD sector ID error contents did not match in the READ- None
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

DIAG results. 1. Replace with an appropriate FD.

2. Replace the FDD.
3. Replace the CPU board.
1CE7 FD IDAM detection error Cannot find the Data Address Mark. None

Detected an FD error other than the

1CEF FD error
above.
None

For READ, the required file was not found in the FD.
For WRITE, the FD was write-protected.
Unformatted, FD is damaged or not inserted.
1D00 FD related error Failed in FD reading/writing.
1. Replace with the correct FD. Release the protect if writing.
*2
2. Replace the FDD.
3. Replace the CPU board.

Failed in IM (image momory) Malfunction of the MTH board.

1D01 IM file related error
reading/writing. 1. Replace the MTH board with a normal one.
*3

Error has occurred in data exchange

1D02 LANM error
between the equipment and LAN board.
Software error (this error essentially does not occur) *4

Software error (this error essentially does not occur), or software

The LAN board software has detected
1D03 LAN error
an error.
installation error (versions of main unit software and DICOM *4
software do not match).

Internal communication timing error. No correction required if

1D04 Sequence error Message timeout
no abnormal symptoms are seen.
*4

*2: FD00; FD unloaded error, FD01; FD open error, FD02; FD read error, FD03; FD write error, FD04; Date size acquisition error
*3: E000; FTBL uninitialized, E001; FTBL is currently used, E0002; IM read error, E0003; IM write error, E004; IM full, E005; No IM files
MT-19

MT-19
*4: C000; No response from LAN, C001; No response from LANM
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format

1F06 1. Replace with an appropriate FD.

FD error
- (File system)
Detected a FD file system error. 2. Replace the FDD. None
3. Replace the CPU board.
1F7F
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

Format error of a file in the memory card.

Memory card file format Failed in various controls of the memory
1FFF error card.
1. Return the file format to the correct format. None
2. Load the saved file from the FD.

2600 M-UTL message file

Error in the message file format Problems in the development stage, file damage. *5
2601 format NG

As the system data was abnormal, it was rewritten to the

2610 System date error System date error
default.
None

Wrong internal communication timing. No remedy required if

26F0 Internal I/F error Internal I/F error
not abnormal phenomenon.
None

Setting information file

2701 read error
Failed in reading from the memory card. None

Different language
2702 message file read error
Failed in reading from the memory card. Incorrect
Incorrect software
software installation,
installation, memory
memory card
card damage.
damage. None

Foreign character
2703 registration pattern file Failed in reading from the memory card. None
fead error
Foreign character
2704 registration error
Failed in registering foreign character. Operation panel LCD error. *6

Setting information file

2705 description error
Description of the file read is incorrect. The file on the memory card is damaged. *7

27FF Unit LCD error The LCD of the operation panel is faulty. Operation panel LCD error *6

Wrong internal communication timing. No remedy required if

36FF Internal I/F error Internal I/F error
not abnormal phenomenon.
None

*5: Error location

*6: 0001; Parameter error, 0002; LCD time out, 0003; LCD data write error, 0004; Sensor driver error, FFFF; Other errors
MT-20

MT-20
*7: 7000; Digit number error, 7100; File size display type setting error, 7200; Alarm type setting error, 7300; Language type error
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● Error Code (Formatter)

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format

LAN board initialization Generated if no response while waiting Malfunction of the LAN board or MTH board.
0700 complete response for the initialization completed response 1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board None
timeout error of the LAN board.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

correctly.
2. Replace the LAN board.
LAN related initialization Verify check error during DPM
0702 sequence error communication tests.
3. If the problem persists, replace the MTH board. None

Incorrect installation of the software, or defect of the LAN

board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
correctly.
DICOM state monitoring No status response to the status
0703 error requests issued by the LANM task.
2. Check that the LAN cable is connected properly. None
3. If the problem persists, re-install the LAN side software, and
after starting the equipment, load the equipment individual
data in the FD.
4. Replace the LAN board.

1. Replace the I/F board.

0B00 System down Defect of the I/F board or IMG board.
2. Replace the IMG board.
None

Malfunction of the MTH board ,or IMG board.

Image transfer error An error occurred while transferring the
0B01 (Bus controller error) frame image to the print buffer.
1. Replace the MTH board. None
2. Replace the IMG board.
The width of the image memory is outside the specification. Or
Exceeded the IM
Exceeded the IM reservation range X malfunction of the MTH board, IMG board.
0EEA reservation range X
size. 1. Replace the MTH board.
None
size
2. Replace the IMG board.

Insufficient the image memory.

(For E-I/F connection, check that [Image Type>] of [1-1-3-3.
Film Info. #1>] and [1-1-3-4. Film Info. #2>] of the M-Utility are
set correctly)
1. Check if the image memory is sufficient.
0EEB Unmatching IM capacity Unmatching IM capacity.
2. If insufficient, expand the image memory. If sufficient, reset
None
the image memory of the IMG board again.
3. Re-start.
4. Replace the image memory.
5. Replace the IMG board.
MT-21

MT-21
Malfunction of the image memory, or the image memory is for
0EEC Image memory error IM data bit length error. other models. None
1. Replace the image memory.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
Although set to "DRYPIX Station
System environment setting error.
connected" at the main unit, the version
1106 DRYPIX Station
of the remote panel software does not
1. Change the version of the remote panel software to A04 or
None
(*1) configuration error later. Or change the setting to "DRYPIX Station not
support connection of the DRYPIX
connected".
Station.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

Although set to "enable OCR function"

System environment setting error.
1107 OCR function at the main unit, the version of the
1. Change the version of the remote panel software to A06 or None
(*2) configuration error remote panel software does not support
later. Or change the setting to "disable OCR function".
the OCR function.

Input signal error, I/F board adjustment and setting error, or

Image input to the I/F board ended in malfunction of the I/F board.
1110 Image input time-out
failure. 1. Adjust the input signal and I/F board.
None
2. Replace the I/F board with a normal one.

Malfunction of the input board, MTH board, or DPI board if

there is input signal error.
1. Check that the signal to the input board is normal.
Failed in transferring images from the I/F 2. Check that the settings of the input board are normal.
1111 Image transfer time-out
board to the image memory.
None
3. Check that the image memory board is normal.
4. Replace the input board with a normal one.
5. Replace the MTH board with a normal one.

Input signal error, or malfunction of the I/F board.

I/F board error at end of Image input to the I/F board ended in 1. Check that the signal to the I/F board is normal.
1112 image input failure. 2. Check that the I/F board settings are correct.
None
3. Replace the I/F board with a normal product.

Malfunction of the input board, or malfunction of the IMG

board.
I/F board error at end of 1. Check that the signal to the input board is normal.
1113 image transfer
Ended abnormally. 2. Check that the input board settings are correct. None
3. Replace the input board with a normal product.
4. Replace the IMG board with a normal product.

(*1): Compatible with main unit software version A03 or later.

(*2): Compatible with main unit software version A05 or later, however the OCR function is currently not available.
MT-22

MT-22
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format

Malfunction of the input board, malfunction of the IMG board,

abnormal input signal to the DPI board.
Succeeded in transferring from the I/F 1. Check that the signal to the input board is normal.
IMG board error at end
1114 of image transfer
board to the image memory, but the 2. Check that the input board settings are correct. None
IMG board state is abnormal. 3. Check that the image memory is normal.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

4. Replace the input board with a normal product.

5. Replace the IMG board with a normal product.

I/F board error at start Start of image input to the I/F board
1115 of image input ended abnormally. Input signal error, or malfunction of the I/F board. None
1. Check that the signal to the I/F board is normal.
Start of image transfer from the I/F 2. Check that the I/F board settings are correct.
I/F board error at start
1116 of image transfer
board to the image memory ended 3. Replace the I/F board with a normal product. None
abnormally.
IMG board start error at Start of image transfer from the I/F
Malfunction of the IMG board.
1117 the start of image board to the image memory ended
1. Replace the IMG board with a normal product.
None
transfer abnormal.

Video parameter setting error, input board setting error, or

malfunction of the input board.
Board error during Failed in image input in the analog I/F 1. Check that the signal to the input board is normal.
1131 analog I/F board setting board. 2. Check that the video parameters and input board settings None
are correct.
3. Replace the input board with a normal product.

Memory card/FD file Failed in opening the memory card or

1140 open error FD file.
None

Memory card/FD file Failed in writing in the memory card or

1141 write error FD file.
None

Memory card/FD file Failed in reading the memory card or FD Malfunction of the memory card, FD, or FDD.
1142 read error file. 1. Replace the FD and execute again. None
2. If the problem occurs again, replace the FDD.
Memory card/FD file Failed in closing the memory card or FD 3. If using the memory card, replace the memory card.
1143 close error file. 4. Replace the CPU board.
None

Memory card/FD file Failed in opening the memory card or

1146 open error FD file.
None

Memory card/FD file Failed in reading the memory card or FD

1147
MT-23

None

MT-23
read error file.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
Malfunction of the memory card, FD, or FDD.
1. Replace the FD and execute again.
Memory card/FD file Failed in closing the memory card or FD
1148 close error file.
2. If the problem occurs again, replace the FDD. None
3. If using the memory card, replace the memory card.
4. Replace the CPU board.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

Incorrect installation of the software, or defect of the LAN

Occurs when the response for the board.
1A49 Test print store error image data transfer request issued by 1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board None
the LANM task is negative. correctly.
2. Check that the LAN cable is connected properly.
3. If the problem persists, re-install the LAN side software, and
Occurs when the print response or film
after starting the equipment, load the equipment individual
1A4A Test print print error output completion notification issued by
data in the FD.
None
the LANM task is negative.
4. Replace the LAN board.

Image line test

Defect of the interface cable, FIX board.
verification error pixel The image line was faulty in E-I/F
2110 line number connection.
1. Replace the interface cable. None
2. Replace the FIX board.
unmatching error
No image specified
Logic conflict occurred once with the
212A during request for print
host.
None
registration
Print information table
registration error during Logic conflict occurred once with the
212B request for print host.
None
registration

No print ID for Logic conflict occurred once with the

212C cancellation host.
None

Print ID specified for Operations can be continued.

Logic conflict occurred once with the
212D cancellation already
host.
None
output
Logic conflict occurred once with the
212E No images for clearing
host.
None

Images specified for Logic conflict occurred once with the

212F clearing already output host.
None
MT-24

MT-24
No image for changing Logic conflict occurred once with the
213A image information host.
None
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
Film for changing
Logic conflict occurred once with the
213B already output (Image
host.
None
information change)
No print ID for changing Logic conflict occurred once with the
213C print information host. Operations can be continued.
None
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

Film for changing

already output Logic conflict occurred once with the
213D (Print information host.
None
change)
Cannot set as board Operations can be continued. Correct settings after resuming
213E not for setting
Incorrect system setting.
operations.
None

No final storage image

2150 after load mode ON
Incorrect operation. None

Image copy error during

2151 storage when load Insufficient memory. Operations can be continued. None
mode ON
No load mode ON
2152 image during storage Incorrect operation. None
when load mode ON
Abnormal exchange occurred in host No problems unless it occurs frequently. If it occurs frequently,
21F0 SIO2 reception error
controller. replace the I/F board.
None

Image line test

Defect of the interface cable, FIX board.
verification error pixel The image line was faulty in E-I/F
2210 line number connection.
1. Replace the interface cable. None
2. Replace the FIX board.
unmatching error
Abnormal exchange occurred in host No problems unless it occurs frequently. If it occurs frequently,
22F0 SIO2 reception error
controller. replace the I/F board.
None

Reception of Printer issued an unexpected

2700 unexpected command command.
Operations can be continued. None

2BFD
Status parameter No problems unless it occurs frequently.
2BFE sequence error
CPU board control defect.
If it occurs frequently, replace the CPU board.
None
MT-25

2BFF

MT-25
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00
● Error Code (Initial Program Loader)

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
DRAM marching test The DRAM check results at start-up Malfunction of the DRAM or CPU board.
0002 error were abnormal. 1. Replace the CPU board.
None

The BACKUP_RAM has not been initialized or has

DRYPIX Link Service Manual

malfunctioned.
1. Incorrect DIPSW settings of the CPU board. Check the S3
setting.
The BACKUP_RAM check results at 2. If the equipment was started for the first time, start again
BACKUP_RAM READ
0004 test error
start-up were abnormal or the Backup and clear the BACKUP_RAM (Whole Area) from the None
RAM data was damaged. operation panel.
3. If not the first start, clear the BACKUP_RAM (Whole Area)
from the operation panel.
4. Replace the CPU board.

The system timer of the CPU board is damaged, or DIPSW

The system timer does not operate settings of the CPU board are incorrect.
0007 System timer error
normally. 1. Replace the CPU board.
None
2. Check the DIPSW S1 and S2 settings.
The hardware interrupt check results at Malfunction of the CPU board.
0008 INTERRUPT test error
start-up were abnormal. 1. Replace thethe
CPU board.
None
Malfunction of CPU board.
1. Replace the CPU board.
Character generator The character generator check results at Malfunction of the CPU board.
000A READ test error start-up were abnormal. 1. Replace the CPU board.
None

Software installation error, memory card malfunction, or defect

around the CPU of the CPU board.
Access error of file in 1. Re-install, and load from the individual data FD after start-
000B memory card
No external file required by IPL.
up.
None
2. Replace the memory card, and perform step 1.
3. Replace the CPU board.
The DIPSW1-7 of the CPU board is ON, or malfunction of the
image memory of the IMG board or malfunction of the IMG
board.
1. Check that DIPSW1-7 of the CPU board is OFF.
2. Check that SLOT1 is MEM15B.
Image memory Memory check results at start-up were
3. Remove the image memory in the order of SLOT3, 2, and
0015 marching test error abnormal.
check if error occurs.
None
(Image memory error) (Cannot read or write image memory)
If removal corrects the problem, that image memory is
defective.
MT-26

MT-26
4. If the problem persists even after removing the slots,
replace SLOT1 with a normal one.
5. If the problem still persists, replace the IMG board.
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
The bus controller check results of the Malfunction of the bus-controller of the MTH board.
Bus controller test error MTH board at start-up were abnormal. None
1. Replace the MTH board.
0018 (Bus controller register
error) The bus controller check results of the Malfunction of the bus-controller of the IMG board.
None
IMG board at start-up were abnormal. 1. Replace the IMG board.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

FIX board INTERRUPT The FIX board diagnosis check results

002A test error at start-up were abnormal.
None

FIX board EIF010

The FIX board diagnosis check results
002B REGISTER R/W test
at start-up were abnormal.
None
error
FIX board LINE The FIX board diagnosis check results Malfunction of the FIX board.
002C BUFFER R/W test error at start-up were abnormal. 1. Replace the FIX board. None

003E
The board hardware is not functioning Malfunction of the board.
- FIX board error
normally. 1. Replace the board.
None
0040
The board hardware is not functioning Malfunction of the DPI board.
board.
0048 DPI board error
normally. 1. Replace the DPI board.
board.
None

0052
The board hardware is not functioning Malfunction of the VBM board, HAV board or DVI board.
- VBM board error
normally. 1. Replace the HAV board or DVI board.
None
0055
Duplicate rotary switch settings.
1000 Board setting error The rotary switch setting is incorrect.
1. Change the rotary switch settings.
None

1001 HAV board setting error The rotary switch setting is incorrect. None

1002 DVI board setting error The rotary switch setting is incorrect.
Not set to ch1.
None
1. Set to ch1.
1010 DPI board setting error The rotary switch setting is incorrect. None

1070 FIX board setting error The rotary switch setting is incorrect. None
MT-27

MT-27
Duplicate rotary switch settings.
10FF Board setting error The rotary switch setting is incorrect.
1. Change the rotary switch settings.
None
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
HAV board mounting Not operating normally in the current
1101 error slot.
None

DVI board mounting Not operating normally in the current

1102 error slot.
None
The board is not mounted to slot 1.
1. Mount to slot 1.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

DPI board mounting Not operating normally in the current

1110 error slot.
None

FIX board mounting Not operating normally in the current

1170 error slot.
None

Not installed properly, The memory card is damaged.

1. Re-install.
20nn File system error Failed to download file. 2. After replacing the memory card, re-install the software. None
If nn is 0, it means reading error of the file table.
Other values indicate the nnth file of the file table.
MT-28

MT-28
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00
● Error Code (Installer)

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
Memory card mount The memory card is not inserted properly.
0001 error
The memory card cannot be identified.
1. Re-insert the memory card.
None
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

The FD is not inserted properly, or the connector between the

FD drive and CPU board is disconnected.
0002 FD mount error The FD cannot be identified.
1. Re-insert the FD.
None
2. Re-connect the connector.
The FD is not inserted properly, no installation information file,
or the installation information and actual file size do not match.
The installation information is
0003 Install FD error
inappropriate.
1. After re-inserting the FD, install again. None
2. Replace the FD.
3. If the error still occurs after re-installing, replace the FD.

0004 The FD is not inserted properly, or the FD is damaged.

FD media error The FD cannot be accessed normally. 1. After re-inserting the FD, install again. None
0005 2. If the error still occurs after re-installing, replace the FD.
The memory card is not inserted properly, write-protected, or
damaged.
Memory card media The memory card cannot be accessed 1. After re-inserting the memory card, install again.
0006 error normally. 2. Release the write-protect.
None
3. If the error still occurs after re-installing, replace the memory
card.

0007
Memory card file The memory card file system is not Unrequired files are exist.
- system error appropriate. 1. Perform full installation.
None
000A
The memory card is not inserted properly, write-protected, or
damaged.
Memory card media The memory card cannot be accessed 1. After re-inserting the memory card, install again.
000B error normally. 2. Release the write-protect.
None
3. If the error still occurs after re-installing, replace the memory
card.

The FD is not inserted properly, no installation information file,

000C or the installation information and actual file size do not match.
MT-29

MT-29
The installation information is 1. After re-inserting the FD, install again.
Install FD error None
000D inappropriate. 2. Replace the FD.
3. If the error still occurs after re-installing, replace the FD.
07.10.2002 FM3360
006-260-00

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format

The memory card is not inserted properly, write-protected, or

damaged.
Memory card media The memory card cannot be accessed 1. After re-inserting the memory card, install again.
000E error normally. 2. Release the write-protect.
None
3. If the error still occurs after re-installing, replace the memory
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

card.

The FD is not inserted properly, no installation information file,

or the installation information and actual file size do not match.
The installation information is
000F Install FD error
inappropriate.
1. After re-inserting the FD, install again. None
2. Replace the FD.
3. If the error still occurs after re-installing, replace the FD.

The memory card is not inserted properly.

004F Memory card copy error The memory card cannot be copied.
1. Re-insert the memory card. (Two cards)
None

Command argument
1001 error
The command argument is incorrect. None

The buffer has overflowed inside the

1003 Buffer overflow
program.
None

The store command has been

1004 Store cancel
canceled.
None
The installation FD setting may be inappropriate.
1005 File access denied File access has been denied. None

Reached the upper limit for the number

1006 File store upper limit
of file stored.
None

The restore command has been

1007 Restore cancel
canceled.
None

Occurs when individual data is added during version upgrading,

etc.
Memory card/FD file
This warning is also displayed when the individual data in the
open error Failed in file open of the memory card or
3002 (The file did not exist, FD.
memory card is damaged. None
(When more than one warnings, check the message displayed
etc.)
at the top of the panel, and perform the check corresponding
to the error code.)

Error with unknown An error which cannot be corrected by

MT-30

FFFF None None

MT-30
cause the installer has occurred.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● Error Code (Network)

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information

Error occurred during transmission/

Malfunction of the LAN board or MTH board.
reception of commands (DPM
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
DPM transmission/ communication test request/response,
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

0000 reception error date and time information setting

correctly. 0001
2. Replace the LAN board.
notification, or asynchronous command)
3. Replace the MTH board.
with the MAIN board.

Reception of Received an unexpected command Command No. is

0000 unexpected command from the MAIN board.
Software error (this error essentially does not occur)
displayed.

Incorrect installation of the OCR information files, or

malfunction of the LAN board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
0001 No OCR information Error occurred when acquiring OCR correctly. 0010
(*2) error information. 2. Install the required files (linkpc2.cfg, ocrimg.prm).
3. Replace the LAN board.
4. Replace the MTH board.

Received a command (ONLine

notification) which cannot be processed
0010 State error
other than in the online state from the
Software error (this error essentially does not occur) 0006
MAIN board. Software error (this error essentially does not occur)

0010 Insufficient memory Insufficient memory. Software error (this error essentially does not occur) 0004

Incorrect installation of the DICOM common file, or malfunction

of the LAN board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
Error occurred when referencing the
0010 FLASH ROM error
FLASH ROM.
correctly. 0009
2. Install the required file.
3. Replace the LAN board.
4. Replace the MTH board.

(*2): Compatible with DICOM software version A04 or later, however the OCR function is currently not available.
MT-31

MT-31
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information

Incorrect installation of the network information files, or

malfunction of the LAN board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
Network information Error occurred during network
0010 analysis error information analysis.
correctly. 000A
2. Install the required files.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

3. Replace the LAN board.

4. Replace the MTH board.

Incorrect installation of the DICOM environment setting files, or

malfunction of the LAN board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
DICOM environment Error occurred during DICOM
0010 setting analysis error environment setting analysis.
correctly. 000F
2. Install the required files.
3. Replace the LAN board.
4. Replace the MTH board.

Received a command (OFFLine

request) which cannot be processed
0050 Status error
other than in the online state from the
Software error (this error essentially does not occur) 0006
MAIN board.
Error occurred when sending the
0050 DPM transmission error command (OFFLine response) to the 0001
MAIN board.
Error occurred during transmission/
DPM transmission/ reception of commands (status Malfunction of the LAN board or MTH board.
0060 reception error confirmation request/response) with the 1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board 0001
MAIN board. correctly.
2. Replace the LAN board.
3. Replace the MTH board.
Error occurred when sending the
command (PNLUTY information
0080 DPM transmission error
acquisition response) to the MAIN
0001
board.

Received a command (PNLUTY

information acquisition response) which
0080 Status error
cannot be processed other than in the
Software error (this error essentially does not occur) 0006
offline state from the MAIN board.
MT-32

MT-32
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information

Malfunction of the LAN board or MTH board.

Error occurred when sending a 1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
0090 DPM transmission error command (PNLUTY information setting correctly. 0001
response) to the MAIN board. 2. Replace the LAN board.
3. Replace the MTH board.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

Received a command (PNLUTY

information setting request) which
0090 Status error
cannot be processed other than in the
0006
offline state from the MAIN board.

00A0 Insufficient memory Insufficient memory. 0004

Error occurred during transmission/ Software error (this error essentially does not occur)
DPM
reception of commands (utility message
00A0 transmission/reception
notification, file transfer notification) with
0001
error
the MAIN board.
Received a command (utility message
notification) which cannot be processed
00A0 Status error
other than in the offline state from the
0006
MAIN board.

Error occurred during transmission/

DPM Software error (this error essentially does not occur), or software
reception of commands with the MAIN
00F0 transmission/reception
board.
installation error (versions of main unit software and DICOM 0001
error software do not match).
(Command unknown)

Incorrect setting of the maximum input image size of the DPI

The image size to be processed by the
00F1 OCR image size error OCR function is larger than the image
board (digital input).
0011
(*2) 1. Check the value set in the remote panel maintenance
size set.
mode.

0100 Insufficient memory Insufficient memory. Software error (this error essentially does not occur) 0004

Error occurred during

transmission/reception of commands
(image data transfer request, image Malfunction of the LAN board or MTH board.
DPM data transfer standby notification, image 1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
0100 transmission/reception data transfer completion notification, correctly. 0001
error image data transfer response, print 2. Replace the LAN board.
MT-33

request/response, or asynchronous 3. Replace the MTH board.

MT-33
command) with the MAIN board.

(*2): Compatible with DICOM software version A04 or later, however the OCR function is currently not available.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information
Timeout error occurred during
transmission/reception of commands
(image data transfer request, image
DPM data transfer standby notification, image
0100 transmission/reception data transfer completion notification, Software error (this error essentially does not occur) 0003
timeout error image data transfer response, print Software error (this error essentially does not occur)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

request/response, or asynchronous
command) with the MAIN board.
The error information at start-up is
0F00 Illegal return code
illegal.
0F00

Incorrect installation of common constant, or malfunction of the

LAN board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
Common constant load
0F00 error
Failed in loading the common function. correctly. 0F01
2. Install the required files.
3. Replace the LAN board.
4. Replace the MTH board.

0F00 Driver load error Failed in loading the driver.

Incorrect installation of the driver, or malfunction of the LAN
0F02
board/MTH board.
No DMA initialization The DMA driver initialization function 1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
0F00 function error does not exist. correctly.
0F03
2. Install the required files.
3. Replace the LAN board.
No DPM initialization The DPM driver initialization function
0F00 function error does not exist.
4. Replace the MTH board. 0F04

0F00 APL load error Failed in loading the APL. Incorrect installation of the APL, or malfunction of the LAN 0F05
board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
0F00 APL checksum error The APL checksum does not match.
correctly.
0F06
2. Install the required files.
No APL initialization The APL initialization function does not 3. Replace the LAN board.
0F00 function error exist. 4. Replace the MTH board.
0F07
MT-34

MT-34
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information

Incorrect installation of the DICOM common files, or

malfunction of the LAN board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
Error occurred while referencing the
2080 FLASH ROM error
FLASH ROM.
correctly. 1007
2. Install the required files.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

3. Replace the LAN board.

4. Replace the MTH board.

Incorrect installation of the network information files, or

malfunction of the LAN board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
Network information Error occurred during network
2080 analysis error information analysis.
correctly. 1008
2. Install the required files.
3. Replace the LAN board.
4. Replace the MTH board.

Received a command (PNLUTY

Reception of information acquisition request) which If the error occurred at start-up, do not acquire the network
2080 unexpected command cannot be processed by rescue from the information.
1101
MAIN board.

Incorrect installation of the network information files, or

Error occurred while referencing or
2090 FLASH ROM error
writing in the FLASH ROM.
malfunction of the LAN board/MTH board. 1007
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
correctly.
2. Install the required files.
Network information Error occurred during network
2090 analysis error information analysis.
3. Replace the LAN board. 1008
4. Replace the MTH board.

Received a command (PNLUTY

Reception of
information setting request) which If the error occurred at start-up, do not set the network
2090 unexpected command
cannot be processed by rescue from the information.
1102
(rescue)
MAIN board.

Incorrect installation of the DICOM common files (specified

uninstalled files when saving, or size of files to be loaded was
0), or malfunction of the LAN board/MTH board.
Received an unexpected request or 1. Check the procedure for saving/loading files and the size of
Reception of filename when receiving a command
20A0 unexpected request (utility message notification) from the
the file used. 1006
2. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
MAIN board. correctly.
MT-35

MT-35
3. Replace the LAN board.
4. Replace the MTH board.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information

Incorrect installation of the DICOM common files, or

malfunction of the LAN board/MTH board.
1. Check that the LAN board is connected to the MTH board
Error occurred while referencing or
20A0 FLASH ROM error
writing in the FLASH ROM.
correctly. 1007
2. Install the required files.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

3. Replace the LAN board.

4. Replace the MTH board.

Received an unexpected command

Reception of
20A0 unexpected command
(other than file transfer notification) from Software error (this error essentially does not occur) 100B
the MAIN board.
Received a request (SAVE) which
Reception of
cannot be processed by rescue when
20A0 unexpected request
receiving a command (utility message
If the error occurred at start-up, do not save the file. 1103
(rescue)
notification) from the MAIN board.
Received a command which does not
Command No. is
20F0 Illegal command exist while receiving commands from the Software error (this error essentially does not occur)
displayed.
MAIN board.
Processing results were negative for
Reception of NG
2130 response from DRYPIX
reception of study start response, film
Software error (this error essentially does not occur)
Command No. is
(*1) information response, or study end Software error (this error essentially does not occur) displayed.
Station
response from the DRYPIX Station.

Received a message which does not Command No. is

21F0 Illegal message
exist from the DPC/DPX. displayed.
Error occurred when the DICOM/DPM
2200 Log file OPEN error
communication log file was opened.
100C

(*1): Compatible with DICOM software version A02 or later.

MT-36

MT-36
01.20.2003 FM3671
006-260-02
■ Remote Panel Error Code
The following error codes are displayed on the remote panel, but are not recorded as error logs.

● Error Code (Remote Panel)

Detailed
Error code Error name Significance Probable cause and remedy
information format
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

If while installing the main unit software, stop the alarm and
continue. Do not turn off the power supply.
If performing operations other than installation, the remote
Exchange error with the
The equipment and remote panel could panel, cable connecting the equipment, I/F board, or CPU may
0001 equipment during start
not communicate at start up. be faulty. None
up 1. Replace the cable.
2. Replace in the order of I/F board, CPU board, and remote
panel.

The setting of the timer value for

storage time-out was incorrect. Set the correct storage time-out timer value.
Command time-out
Faulty input board. Replace the corresponding input board.
0101 error with the
Faulty CPU board. Replace the CPU board.
None
equipment
Faulty remote panel. Replace the remote panel.
Faulty software.
MT-37

MT-37
 MT-38

3. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS

3.1 How to Read the Troubleshooting Flow

■ Display Example
In the Troubleshooting Flow, problems are corrected while analyzing the causes. For
some states, parts may need to be disassembled, replaced, or adjusted.
The following describes how to read the Troubleshooting Flow.
Suspected cause
Check the state of the equipment according to the description given.
If “YES”, proceed according to the arrow and perform the check in the next step.
If “No”, implement the correction below.

MT-41

■ Troubleshooting Flow

Is LCD deflection angle adjusting volume (VR1) on operation panel (PNL15C board) adjusted
appropriately?
(when place of installation of equipment (height) is changed, etc.)
Yes No
Re-adjust so that LCD displays appropriately.

Replace operation panel (PNL15C board) with a normal one, and check. Does problem persist?
Yes No
Are CN51 connector of MTH15B board and connector of operation panel (PNL15C board)
connected properly?
Are connector pins damaged?
Yes No
Reconnect or repair.

Turn ON the power supply of the equipment.

Is +5V (VCC) output normally from power supply unit?
Refer to “4.3 Checking the DC Voltage”.
+5V: +5V±2%/TP4 (+5V) - TP7 (GND) (MTH15B board)
Yes No
Is CN90 connector of MTH15B board connected properly?
Are connector pins damaged?
Yes No
Reconnect or repair.

Replace power supply unit.

Replace MTH15B board.

Replace operation panel (PNL15C board). FP8T0304.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-43

Output voltage check (Voltage value)

To check the specified voltage value,
measure the output voltage using the tester.
FP8T0305.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-38
 MT-39

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-39
 MT-40

3.2 POWER LED is Lit, but Nothing is Displayed on Message

Display
The following shows the troubleshooting for when POWER display LED on the
operation panel (PNL15C board) is lit, but nothing is displayed on the Message Display
(LCD).

■ Suspected Cause
• LCD deflection angle is inappropriate
• Malfunction of operation panel (PNL15C board)
• +5V output has stopped
• Malfunction of MTH15B board
• Malfunction of power supply unit

■ Error Related I/O Layout

Power supply unit

Operation panel (PNL15C board)

VR1

MTH15B board FP8T0302.EPS

■ Error Related System Block Diagram

Power supply unit MTH15B board

CN91 CN51
5 +5VS 21

Operation panel (PNL15C board)

LED1 LED3
LED2 PWR RDY
CN90 TP4 ERR

1~3 +5V 1,2

SW5

Operation panel control signal

R/L

VR1

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

FP8T0303.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-40
 MT-41

■ Troubleshooting Flow
Is LCD deflection angle adjusting volume (VR1) on operation panel (PNL15C board) adjusted
appropriately?
(when place of installation of equipment (height) is changed, etc.)
Yes No
Re-adjust so that LCD displays appropriately.

Replace operation panel (PNL15C board) with a normal one, and check. Does problem persist?
Yes No
Are CN51 connector of MTH15B board and connector of operation panel (PNL15C board)
connected properly?
Are connector pins damaged?
Yes No
Reconnect or repair.

Turn ON the power supply of the equipment.

Is +5V (VCC) output normally from power supply unit?
Refer to “4.3 Checking the DC Voltage”.
+5V: +5V±2%/TP4 (+5V) - TP7 (GND) (MTH15B board)
Yes No
Is CN90 connector of MTH15B board connected properly?
Are connector pins damaged?
Yes No
Reconnect or repair.

Replace power supply unit.

Replace MTH15B board.

Replace operation panel (PNL15C board). FP8T0304.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-41
 MT-42

3.3 DC Output has Stopped

The power supply unit of this equipment is incorporated with the following protection
circuits. When a fault is detected, the specified DC output is stopped to prevent
malfunction of the power supply unit.
• Overvoltage protection
• Overcurrent protection
<NOTE>
To turn ON the power supply again after the DC output was stopped due to the detection of a
fault by the power supply unit, wait more than 30 seconds first.

■ Suspected Cause
• The overvoltage/overcurrent protection circuit operated.
• The power supply unit was not adjusted properly or has malfunctioned.

■ Troubleshooting Flow

CAUTION
In the event of short-circuiting, disconnect the power plug, repair the cause of short-
circuiting at the affected part, and turn on the power again. Repeatedly turning ON the
power without repairing the cause of the short-circuiting will damage the power supply
unit.

Has short-circuit occurred in the power supply block whose output has been stopped?
Yes No
Repair short-circuited part.

Is voltage adjusting volume of power supply unit set appropriately? (Immediately after adjustment, etc.)
Yes No
Re-adjust voltage adjusting volume as follows.

1. Turn OFF power supply of the equipment.

2. Rotate all adjusting volumes of power supply unit in counterclockwise direction (direction
in which DC output becomes small) completely.
3. Turn ON power supply of the equipment.
4. Rotate each voltage adjusting volume in clockwise direction, and adjust DC voltage.

Replace power supply unit. FP8T0301.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-42
 MT-43

■ DC Output Stopped by Protection Circuit Operations by Block and Recovery

Method

● Overvoltage Protection
●: Output stopped
Fault Stopped Output
Detection Recovery Method
Output +5VS +5V -5.2V +15V -15V
+5VS ● ● ● ● ● Power ON again

+5V ● ● ● ● Power ON again

-5.2V ● ● ● ● Power ON again

+15V ● ● ● ● Power ON again

-15V ● ● ● ● Power ON again

TP8T0301.EPS

● Overcurrent Protection
●: Output stopped
Fault Stopped Output
Detection Recovery Method
Output +5VS +5V -5.2V +15V -15V
Automatic recovery after overcurrent state
+5VS ● ● ● ● ● (short-circuited state) is cleared
Automatic recovery after overcurrent state
+5V ● (short-circuited state) is cleared
Automatic recovery after overcurrent state
-5.2V ● (short-circuited state) is cleared
Power ON again after clearing overcurrent state
+15V ● ● ● ● (short-circuited state)
Automatic recovery after overcurrent state
-15V ● (short-circuited state) is cleared
TP8T0302.EPS

<REMARKS>
If +5VS does not turn ON when the power of the equipment is turned ON, all DC outputs will be
stopped regardless of whether overvoltage or overcurrent has occurred. All DC outputs are
ON when +5VS is ON.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-43
 MT-44

4. TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE

4.1 Latout of Fuse

4.1.1 HAV90A Board

F1

CN1 CN2

No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use

F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to
remote panel
FP8T0410.EPS

4.1.2 HAV90B Board

F1

CN1 CN2

No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use

F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to
remote panel
FP8T0411.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-44
 MT-45

4.1.3 DVI90A Board

F1

CN1 CN2

No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use

F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to
remote panel
FP8T0412.EPS

4.1.4 DPI90A/DPI90B Board

F3 F4

F1 F2

CN1 CN2

No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use

F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of external output +5V supply cable (For auto-filming
special specification destination) (DPI90A only)

F2 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to remote panel

(Both DPI90A/DPI90B)

F3 0.5A/250V Overcurrent protection of external output +12V supply cable (DPI90B only)

F4 0.5A/250V Overcurrent protection of external output -12V supply cable (DPI90B only)
FP8T0413.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-45
 MT-46

4.1.5 HAV90E Board

F1

CN1 CN2

No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use

F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to
remote panel
FP8T0418.EPS

■ Determining Fuse Meltdown

<NOTE>
Before measurement, measure the resistance of the probe (resistance when the probe is
short-circuited), and correct the measured value of the fuse.

<REMARKS>
When a board is mounted, accurate detection of fuse meltdown will not be possible. However,
meltdown may be suspected if the resistance of both ends of the fuse lead is above 1 Ω.
In this case, remove the board from the equipment if the fuse is directly connected, and
measure the meltdown of the fuse of the board alone.

(1) Remove the board from the equipment, and measure the resistance at both ends
of the fuse using a tester.
At this time, resistances above 100 Ω indicate meltdown.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-46
 MT-47

4.2 LED Lighting Information

4.2.1 CPU90K Board

D15 D14~D9 D8~D1

LED Information
D1~D8(0~7) Repeatedly turns on and off while CPU90K is operating.
D9(CARD0) Lights up when the program memory card is accessed (card slot A)
D10(CARD1) Lights up when the install memory card is accessed (card slot B)
D11(BERR) Lights up when BERR generates
D12(TOUT) Lights up when timeout generates
D13(INT) Lights up when interrupt generates
D14(RST) Lights up when the reset switch is operated or when the software reset command is issued
D15(PWR) Lights up when +5V power is supplied

<Lighting State of D1 to D8 at Start Up>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power supply on Lit OFF
Hardware initialization
Mounting environment check
Indicates the self-diagnosis test number
Self-diagnosis

Program load

OS start

TCD research end

OS initialization end

Memory partition compilation end

Rtscope start end

Ul task generation end

While the CPU is operating, each
LED goes off one by one
repeatedly.
(The LEDs light up and go off
repeatedly starting from LED1.)
FP8T0417.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-47
 MT-48

4.2.2 FIX90A Board

D1~D7

LED Information
D1(CBSY) Lights up when CBSY bit in CHANNEL BSY, TRANSFER CONTROL reg (TCR) turns ON.
D2(FIXINT) Lights up when the interrupt request from FIX90A is active.
D3(PGSNC) Lights up during active period of the PGSYNC signal on the interface
D4(LNCK) Lights up during active period of the LNCLK signal on the interface
D5(TDR) Lights up when corresponding bit in the TRANSFER DIRECTION (TCR) turns ON
D6(REQ) Lights up during active period of the DMA transfer request signal of the EIF010 gate array
D7(ACK) Lights up during active period of the transfer response signal to the EIF010 gate array
FP8T0416.EPS

4.2.3 HAV90A Board

D2 D1

D8

D1 (FRAM) D2 (BSY) HAV90A Board State

OFF OFF Standby
OFF Lit During bus control transfer
Lit Lit During image input

LED Information
D8 Lit: When PLL is locked
OFF: 1n12/1n10 error occurs during store
FP5T0423.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-48
 MT-49

4.2.4 HAV90B Board

D2 D1

D8

D1 (FRAM) D2 (BSY) HAV90B Board State

OFF OFF Standby
OFF Lit During bus control transfer
Lit Lit During image input

LED Information
D8 Lit: When PLL is locked
OFF: 1n12/1n10 error occurs during store

FP5T0424.EPS

4.2.5 DVI90A Board

D2 D1

D1 (FRAM) D2 (BSY) DVI90A Board State

OFF OFF Standby
OFF Lit During bus control transfer
Lit Lit During image input
FP5T0425.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-49
 MT-50

4.2.6 DPI90A/DPI90B Board

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6

LED Information
D1 Lights up during DPI board operations (during image data reading, transfer, etc.)
D2 Lights up when the DPI board ends abnormally (when control is ended due to line count
number error generated during DPI board operations)
D3 Monitor of MODE signal from image diagnosis device (Valid only during DPI board operations)
Lights up when the MODE signal is "H"
Goes off when the MODE signal is "L"
D4 Monitor of CLK signal from image diagnosis device (Valid only during DPI board operations)
Lights up when the CLK signal is "H"
Goes off when the CLK signal is "L"

D5 Monitor of DAREQ signal to image diagnosis device (Valid only during DPI board operations)
Lights up when the DAREQ signal is "H"
Goes off when the DAREQ signal is "L"
D6 Monitor of REP signal to image diagnosis device (Valid only during DPI board operations)
Lights up when the REP signal is "H"
Goes off when the REP signal is "L"
FP8T0414.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-50
 MT-51

4.2.7 Remote Panel

Memory card slot

O
1 2 3 4 N

LED5 SW1 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW4

<LED1 to LED4 Lighting and OFF State>

4 3 2 1
When power is turned ON (Power ON) Lit OFF

When hardware is initialized

When hardware is checked

When file (program) is loaded

When processing ends
(Control transferred to FRM)
When error occurs in IPL Lights up and goes off repeatedly

While the CPU is operating, each LED

goes off one by one repeatedly.
(The LEDs light up and go off
repeatedly starting from LED1.)

<LED5 Lighting and OFF State>

Lit when accessing memory card

FP8T0415.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-51
 MT-52

4.2.8 HAV90E Board

D2 D1

D11 D7

D1 (FRAM) D2 (BSY) HAV90E Board State

OFF OFF Standby
OFF Lit During bus control transfer
Lit Lit During image input

LED Information
D7 Lit: When PLL is locked
OFF: 1n12/1n10 error occurs during store
D11 Lit: When adjustment mode switch (S6) is ON
OFF: When adjustment mode switch (S6) is OFF
FP8T0419.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-52
 MT-53

4.2.9 LAN90C Board

COL
LINK
D6~D9
D11
D12
D13
D10

<D6 to D9 Lighting and OFF State> Lit OFF

No. Contents 6 7 8 9 No. Contents 6 7 8 9

1 When power is turned ON (Power ON) 8 End of cache enable setting

2 Memory check (All LEDs are lit randomly) 9 End of memory controller initialization of OS
3 End of CPU register settings 10 End of system clock setting

4 End of expansion of OS to the memory 11 End of debug terminal setting

5 Start of interrupt vector address initialization 12 End of initialization of library used

6 End of interrupt vector address initialization 13 Application program loading

7 End of interrupt vector table initialization (All LEDs go off during operations hereafter)

LED Information
D10(100) Lights up when connected at 100Mbps, and goes off when connected at 10Mbps.
(100/10Mbps depends on the network environment, while this information is effective when LINK
LED is light.)
D11(FDPOL) Lights up when connected by full duplex, and goes off when connected by half duplex.
(Full duplex/half duplex communication depends on the network environment, while this information
is effective when LINK LED is light.)
D12(RX) Lights up when data is received (actually blinking because data is received in units of packet).
D13(TX) Lights up when data is transmitted (actually blinking because data is transmitted in units of packet).
LINK(CN7 internal
Lights up when network physical layer link is established (communicatable state).
green LED)
COL(CN7 internal Lights up when collision occurs (communication collision by simultaneous data transmission from
yellow LED) multiple devices). (This usually occurs, but frequency may be higher according to the network
environment, resulting in delayed data transfer.)
FP8T0420.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-53
 MT-54

4.3 Checking the DC Voltage

CAUTION
Observe the following to prevent electric hazards.
• Do not touch the voltage terminals.
• To prevent short-circuit, be sure to use the tester lead.

(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

(2) Remove the front cover.
(3) Remove the right cover.
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
(5) Measure the voltage of the following points.
If the voltage differs from the specified values, adjust using the voltage adjustment
volume on the right side of the power supply unit.

■ Measured Voltage/Adjusting Volume

<REMARKS>
+5VS is supplied only for lighting the POWER display LED on the operation panel.

● MTH15B Board
Voltage Measured Point Specified Range Adjustment Volume

+5V (VCC) TP4 (+5V) – TP7 (GND) +5V ±2% (+4.90 to +5.10V) +5V

+5V (+5VS) TP5 (+5VS) – TP7 (GND) +5V ±2% (+4.90 to +5.10V) +5VS

-5.2V TP1 (-5.2V) – TP2 (GND) -5.2V ±2% (-5.096 to -5.304V) -5.2V

+15V TP6 (+15V) – TP7 (GND) +15V ±2% (+14.70 to +15.30V) +15V

-15V TP3 (-15V) – TP2 (GND) -15V ±2% (-14.70 to -15.30V) -15V
TP8M0301.EPS

■ Measuring Point

● MTH15B Board

TP1 TP3 TP2 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7

FP8M0304.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-54
 MT-55

■ Measuring Method

Tester lead

FP8M0305.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-55
 MT-56

4.4 HOST Auto-Filming Connection I/F Cable Connection

Diagram
The following shows the connection diagram of the HOST auto filming connection I/F
cable (RS232C/RS422).
The signal name is defined by DRYPIX Link.
Product codes shown ending with # are for domestic use in Japan while those ending
with E are for overseas use. ** indicates the cable length.

● Cable Connection Diagram (RS232C TX-RX Reverse)

HOST Side(Male/Female Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
14 14
2 2
3 3 1: GND(FG)
2: TXD
3: RXD
5 5 5: CTS
7: GND(SG)
20: DTR
7 7
20 20

PRODUCT CODE

MF R-CBL 232 25P-25P TO ∗∗M #/E

25 25 (HOST Side Male Connector)
13 13
MF R-CBL 232 25P-25S TO ∗∗M #/E
(HOST Side Female Connector)
FP8T0401.EPS

● Cable Connection Diagram (RS232C TX-RX Reverse Control Signal Return)

HOST Side(Male/Female Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
14 14
2 2
3 3 1: GND(FG)
2: TXD
4 4
3: RXD
5 5 4: RTS
6 6 5: CTS
6: DSR
7 7 7: GND(SG)
20 20
8 8 8: DCD
20: DTR

PRODUCT CODE

MF R-CBL 232 25P-25P CRS ∗∗M #/E

25 25 (HOST Side Male Connector)
13 13
MF R-CBL 232 25P-25S CRS ∗∗M #/E
(HOST Side Female Connector)
FP8T0402.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-56
 MT-57

● Cable Connection Diagram (RS232C Picker/Shimadzu PRISM Auto-filming)

HOST Side(Female Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
6 14
2 2
7
3 3 1: GND(FG)
2: TXD
4 3: RXD
9
5 5 4: RTS
6 5: CTS
6: DSR
7 7: GND(SG)
20
8 8: DCD
20: DTR

25 PRODUCT CODE
13
MF R-CBL 232 25P-9S CRS ∗∗M #/E
(HOST Side Female Connector)
FP8T0403.EPS

● Cable Connection Diagram (RS232C Straight)

HOST Side(Male Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
14 14
2 2
3 3 1: GND(FG)
2: TXD
4 4
3: RXD
5 5 4: RTS
6 6 5: CTS
6: DSR
7 7 7: GND(SG)
20 20
8 8 8: DCD
20: DTR

25 25 PRODUCT CODE
13 13
MF R-CBL 25P-25P ST ∗∗M #/E
(HOST Side Male Connector)
FP8T0404.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-57
 MT-58

● Cable Connection Diagram (RS422 Straight)

HOST Side(Male/Female Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
20 14
2 2
21
3 3 2: TXD
22 3: RXD
4 4
23 4: RTS
5 5 5: CTS
7: GND
9: TXD
7 7 10: RXD
26
8 11: RTS
27 12: CTS
9 9
10
PRODUCT CODE
11
12 MF-300 R-CBL 422 25P-37P ∗∗M #/E
25 (HOST Side Male Connector)
13
MF-300 R-CBL 422 25P-37S ∗∗M #/E
(HOST Side Female Connector)
FP8T0405.EPS

37
19

● Cable Connection Diagram (RS422 Picker/Shimadzu PRISM Auto-filming)

HOST Side(Female Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
9 14
2 2
10
3 3 2: TXD
3: RXD
4
4: RTS
5 5: CTS
7: GND
9: TXD
7 7 10: RXD
15
8 11: RTS
12: CTS
9
10
11
12
25 PRODUCT CODE
13
MF-300 R-CBL 422 25P-15S ∗∗M #/E
(HOST Side Female Connector)
FP8T0406.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-58
 MT-59

● Cable Connection Diagram (Picker MR Adapter Cable)

HOST Side(Female Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
14 14
2 2
3 3 2: TXD
3: RXD
4
4: RTS
5 5: CTS
6 6: DSR
7: GND
7 7 8: DCD
20
8 20: DTR

25 25 PRODUCT CODE
13 13
MF R-CBL 25P-25S PK/MR 1.5M #/E
(HOST Side Female Connector)
FP8T0407.EPS

● Cable Connection Diagram (RS232C Shimadzu DAR3000 Auto-filming)

HOST Side(Female Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
6 14
2 2
3 3 2: TXD
3: RXD
4
9 4: RTS
5 5 5: CTS
7: GND
7

25 PRODUCT CODE
13
MF R-CBL 232 25P-9S DSUB ∗∗M #/E
(HOST Side Female Connector)
FP8T0408.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-59
 MT-60

● Cable Connection Diagram (Siemens Auto-filming)

HOST Side(Male Connector) DRYPIX Link Side(Male Connector)

1 1
14 14
2 2
15 15
3 3
16 16
4 4 Boards used at DRYPIX Link side
17 17
5 5 DPI90A DPI90B
18 18
6 6 2: TXD 2: TXD
19 19 3: RXD 3: RXD
7 7
20 20 4: RTS 7: GND
8 8 5: CTS 18: +12V
21 21
9 9 6: DSR 25: –12V
22 22 7: GND Others: N.C.
10 10
23 23 20: DTR
11 11 Others: N.C.
24 24
12 12
25 25 PRODUCT CODE
13 13
MF-300 R-CBL AF-S2 1M N #/E
(HOST Side Male Connector)
FP8T0409.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-60
 MT-61

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-61
 MT-62
5. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-62
 MT-63
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-63
 MT-64
006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MT-64
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MODE (MU)

 MU-1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3360) All pages
10/25/2002 01 Revised (FM3576) 1, 4, 12, 13, 13.1~13.4, 16, 20, 28, 29,
36, 52, 53, 68
01/20/2003 02 Revised (FM3761) 1, 4~7, 20, 25, 26, 29, 30, 33, 37.1~37.4,
46, 48, 49, 50.1, 50.2, 90, 96, 97,
110~117
05/15/2003 03 Revised (FM4011) 1, 4~7, 17, 17.1~17.4, 19~21, 26, 30~37,
37.1, 50, 50.1, 50.2, 84, 85, 85.1~85.4,
92, 110, 112, 113, 115
11/10/2003 04 Revised (FM4153) 1, 7, 13.4, 14, 16, 20, 26, 37.5~37.14,
46, 50.1~50.4, 58~61, 72, 100~104, 106,
107, 109, 110

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-1
 MU-2

1. SERVICE MODE OF OPERATION PANEL

1.1 Transition of Modes

The service mode using the operation panel provides functions required for
troubleshooting and maintenance.

● M-Utility (Maintenance-Utility) Mode

Mode for performing troubleshooting and maintenance operations of this equipment.

Other than M-Utility, the following four modes are also provided.

● Initial Processing Mode

Mode in which initialization and self-diagnosis are performed when the power is turned
on.

● Routine Mode
The usual ready state.

● Abnormal Indication Mode

Indicates errors which have occurred.

● Shutdown Processing Mode

OFF state of the equipment.

1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode

If the power is turned OFF while writing in the FD and memory card, the data, FD, or
memory card itself may malfunction.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-2
 MU-3

1.3 Common Operations of Service Mode

Each menu has a tree structure classified by function. Selecting a menu item at a
certain menu displays the menu below.

■ Common Operations

● <ENTER>
For executing the menu displayed, and confirming values entered. If a lower menu
exists, shifts to the next menu.

● <CANCEL>
Pressing while selecting a menu or while displaying executed results, shifts to the
higher menu (previous menu) on the tree.

● <UP arrow>/<DOWN arrow>

When there are several items in one menu, pressing the UP arrow or DOWN arrow key
displays the corresponding item. When entering values, displays alphabets, numbers,
and symbols in the ascending or descending order.

● [ ← ] (Termination symbol)
Symbol used when entering characters within the M-Utility command. If the number of
characters set is less than the maximum number which can be entered, enter this
symbol to indicate end of character string.
<REMARKS>
The following lists alphabets, numbers, and symbols.
“SP” means space (blank).

SP A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Symbols Alphabets/Numbers

N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + - . / :
< = > ? @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } ←
TP8U0101.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-3
 MU-4

2. M-UTILITY COMMAND TREE

M-Utility
[ 0 ] RETURN>
[ 1 ] System>
[ 1-1 ] Configuration>
[ 1-1-1 ] Set Date>
[ 1-1-1-1 ] Check Date
[ 1-1-1-2 ] YYYY>
[ 1-1-1-3 ] MM>
[ 1-1-1-4 ] DD>
[ 1-1-1-5 ] hh>
[ 1-1-1-6 ] mm>
[ 1-1-2 ] Init. BkupRAM>
[ 1-1-2-1 ] Whole Area>
[ 1-1-2-2 ] Printer Area>
[ 1-1-2-3 ] Format. Area>
[ 1-1-3 ] Set Params>
[ 1-1-3-1 ] Ext. Name>
∗ The following functions are displayed on the operation panel and
available for use only in E-I/F connection.
[ 1-1-3-2 ] CR Image> (*1)
[ 1-1-3-2 ] WakeupSub.tmr> (*2)
[ 1-1-3-3 ] Film Info. #1>
[ 1-1-3-3-1 ] Film Size>
[ 1-1-3-3-2 ] Image Type>
[ 1-1-3-4 ] Film Info. #2>
[ 1-1-3-4-1 ] Film Size>
[ 1-1-3-4-2 ] Image Type>
[ 1-1-3-5 ] Set Sorter>
[ 1-1-3-5-1 ] Connection>
[ 1-1-3-5-2 ] Save to FD
[ 1-1-3-5-3 ] Load from FD
∗ The following functions are displayed on the operation panel and
available for use only in E-I/F connection.
[ 1-1-3-6 ] Film Size>
[ 1-1-3-7 ] Printer Sub.> (*2)
[ 1-1-3-8 ] Report PrtChg> (*3)
[ 1-1-3-9 ] Notice Timer> (*3)
[ 1-1-3-10 ] Prt. Restore> (*3)
(*1): Compatible with main unit software version A00 only.
(*2): Compatible with main unit software version A01 or later.
A1 B1 C1 (*3): Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later. FP8U0201.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-4
 MU-5

A1 B1 C1

[ 1-1-4 ] Check Files>

[ 1-1-4-1 ] Check All
[ 1-1-4-2 ] Check Indiv.
[ 1-1-5 ] Check Version
[ 1-2 ] FD>
[ 1-2-1 ] Indiv. Data>
[ 1-2-1-1 ] Save to FD
[ 1-2-1-2 ] Load from FD>
[ 1-2-1-3 ] Save Log File
[ 1-2-2 ] Save/Load File>
[ 1-2-2-1 ] Check Files
[ 1-2-2-2 ] Save to FD>
[ 1-2-2-3 ] Load from FD>
[ 1-2-3 ] Format FD>
[ 1-3 ] Err. Log Data>
[ 1-3-1 ] Error Log #1
[ 1-3-2 ] Clear>
[ 1-4 ] Set Panel>
[ 1-4-1 ] Alarm>
[ 2 ] Set Network>
[ 2-1 ] Configuration>
[ 2-1-1 ] AE-title>
[ 2-1-2 ] IP Address>
[ 2-1-3 ] Sub Net mask>
[ 2-1-4 ] Host name>
[ 2-1-5 ] Gateways.>
[ 2-1-6 ] FTP Server> (*1)
[ 2-1-6 ] Net Tool> (*2)
[ 2-2 ] Config. Files>
[ 2-2-1 ] Check Files
[ 2-2-2 ] Save to FD>
[ 2-2-3 ] Load from FD>
[ 2-3 ] Save Log File
[ 2-4 ] N-Soft V-UPG>

(*1): Compatible with up to main unit software version A02.

A2 (*2): Compatible with main unit software version A03 or later. FP8U0202.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-5
 MU-6

A2

[ 3 ] Set DICOM>
[ 3-1 ] Timeout>
[ 3-2 ] Log Mode>
[ 3-3 ] Polling Timer>
[ 3-4 ] Printer Sub.>
[ 3-5 ] Film Sub.>
[ 3-6 ] Printer Timer> (*2)
[ 4 ] Set Printer>
[ 4-1 ] Printer #1>
[ 4-1-1 ] Printer Name> (*1)
[ 4-1-1 ] PrinterAEname> (*2)
[ 4-1-2 ] IP Address>
[ 4-1-3 ] Port No.>
[ 4-1-4 ] Film Size>
[ 4-1-4-1 ] Film Size #1>
[ 4-1-4-2 ] Film Size #2>
[ 4-1-4-3 ] Film Size #3>
[ 4-1-4-4 ] Film Size #4>
[ 4-1-5 ] Image Type>
[ 4-1-6 ] Alias Name> (*2)
∗ The following settings are the same as [4-1] Printer #1>.
[ 4-2 ] Printer #2>
[ 4-3 ] Printer #3>
[ 4-4 ] Printer #4>
[ 4-5 ] Printer #5>
[ 4-6 ] Printer #6>
[ 4-7 ] Printer #7>
[ 4-8 ] Printer #8>
[ 4-9 ] Printer #9>
[ 4-10 ] Printer #10>
∗ The following functions are displayed on the operation panel and available for use
only in E-I/F connection.
[ 5 ] Test Print>
[ 5-1 ] Pattern 1 (SMPTE pattern output)
[ 5-2 ] Pattern 2 (Gradation pattern output)

(*1): Compatible with up to main unit software version A02.

A3
(*2): Compatible with main unit software version A03 or later. FP8U0203.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-6
 MU-7

A3

[ 6 ] Diagnosis>
[ 6-1 ] I.M. R/W Test>
[ 6-1-1 ] Partial
[ 6-1-2 ] All
[ 6-2 ] PCB-Fan Ope.> (This menu is currently not available.)

∗ The following functions are displayed on the operation panel and available for use
only in AD-I/F connection.
[ 7 ] Set Station> (*1)
[ 7-1 ] Station Name> (*1)
[ 7-2 ] IP Address> (*1)
[ 7-3 ] Port No.> (*1)
[ 7-4 ] Response tmr> (*1)
[ 7-5 ] Reset Timer> (*1)
[ 7-6 ] Set OCR> (*2)
[ 7-6-1 ] Port No.> (*2)
[ 7-6-2 ] Timeout> (*2)

(*1): Compatible with main unit software version A03 or later.

(*2): Compatible with main unit software version A05 or later.
However as this setting is currently not available, do not change it.
FP8U0204.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-7
 MU-8

3. M-UTILITY
The M-Utility functions are intended only for the service engineer.
<NOTE>
Items which are followed by a “>” on the M-Utility menu indicate they have lower menu items.

3.1 Starting and Ending the M-Utility

■ Starting the M-Utility
Press the SW4 (<CANCEL> key) while pressing the SW1 (<UP arrow> key) during the
routine mode or while the error message is displayed.
LED1 LED3
LED2 PWR RDY
ERR
SW5
R/L

VR1

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

SW1 (<UP arrow> key) SW4 (<CANCEL> key) FP8U0301.EPS

■ Ending the M-Utility

At the M-Utility main menu, select [0. RETURN>] and press <ENTER>.
After the message “Are your sure?” is displayed, press <ENTER> to end M-Utility. The
equipment will be initialized.
<NOTE>
If the M-Utility is started during the routine mode, the equipment will be initialized after the M-
Utility ends and returned to the routine mode again. If the M-Utility was started from the
abnormal indication mode, it will not end unless the equipment is rebooted by turning the
power OFF and then ON again.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-8
 MU-9

3.2 Details of Operation Panel Display

Details of the operation panel display during the M-Utility mode are shown below.

■ Example of Displays

Indicates that the M-Utility is

currently being executed.

1-1- M
3 . S e t P a r ams >
Indicates the command [1-1-3] Set Params>

Indicates that the command is

currently being executed.

1 - 1 - 3 -Wa i t . . M
1 . E x t . Name >

Indicates that the execution of the

command has been completed.

Comp l e t e d . M
1 . E x t . Name >
FP8U0302.EPS

<NOTE>
“Wait” and “Completed” may not be displayed for some commands.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-9
 MU-10

3.3 M-Utility Commands

[1] System>

[1-1] Configuration>

[1-1-1] Set Date>

Command for setting the system date and time.
<REMARKS>
The changes made will be effective immediately.

[1-1-1-1] Check Date

Command for checking the date.

[1-1-1-2] YYYY>
Command for setting the year. (Input range 2000 to 2039)

[1-1-1-3] MM>
Command for setting the month. (Input range 01 to 12)

[1-1-1-4] DD>
Command for setting the day. (Input range 01 to 31)

[1-1-1-5] hh>
Command for setting the hour. (Input range 00 to 23)

[1-1-1-6] mm>
Command for setting the minute. (Input range 00 to 59)

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-10
 MU-11

[1-1-2] Init. BkupRAM>

Command for initializing the BACKUP RAM. Initializes some data other than BACKUP-
RAM and sets default values.
<NOTE>
The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.

[1-1-2-1] Whole Area>

Command for clearing the whole BACKUP-RAM area to zero, and setting the memory
card data to BACKUP-RAM.

[1-1-2-2] Printer Area>

Command for clearing the BACKUP-RAM printer area to zero, and setting the memory
card data to BACKUP-RAM.

[1-1-2-3] Format. Area>

Command for clearing the BACKUP-RAM formatter area to zero, and setting the
memory card data to BACKUP-RAM.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-11
 MU-12

[1-1-3] Set Params>

Command for setting various parameters of the system.

[1-1-3-1] Ext. Name>

Command for setting the name of the image input device displayed on the operation
panel during the routine mode.
<NOTE>
The operations of the equipment are not effected even if this setting is not performed (when
leaving at the default value “CONNECTED”). The name of the device inputting images cannot
be checked by the user in normal operations. Consequently, no settings are required normally.
Perform this setting only when there is a need to change from the default value.

<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be used for setting the name of the device connected.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

[1-1-3-2] CR Image>
Command for setting whether to input CR images or not.
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• Although this setting is provided only in main unit software version A00, as it is not available
for use, do not change its default “1.Enable”.

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-12
 MU-13

[1-1-3-2] WakeupSub.tmr>
Command for setting the standby time (seconds) for the first printer registered to start.
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• This setting is compatible with main unit software version A01 or later.

<REMARKS>
• When this equipment is started, it waits for the standby time set for the first printer to start. If
the first printer does not start within the standby time, the equipment substitutes it with the
second printer onwards registered.
• The default is “0”. In this case, this equipment will continue waiting for the first printer to start
without substituting the printer.
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 6000 seconds (100 minutes)
• As it normally takes less than 5 minutes for the printer to set into the image data receivable
state (this equipment determines whether the printer has started or not by checking this
state) after power ON, set the standby time for this equipment to wait, if it has determined to
substitute the first printer with another printer after checking whether the first printer has
started, to more than 5 minutes. [Recommended value: 600 seconds (10 minutes)]
However, the time taken for the printer to set into the printable state varies by printer model.
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-13
 MU-13.1

BLANK PAGE

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-13.1
 MU-13.2

BLANK PAGE

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-13.2
 MU-13.3

BLANK PAGE

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-13.3
 MU-13.4

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1>

Command for setting the film size, film base color, and printer recording method
notified to the image input device when returning information on equipment
configuration.
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• For E-I/F connection, be sure to set this setting because connection with the printer is
confirmed based on the information of this setting.
• If two film sizes are available, set [1-1-3-4. Film Info. #2>] as well.

<REMARKS>
Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size>

Command for setting the film size, and film base color.
[1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
<NOTE>
Do not select [2. 35x35>].

<REMARKS>
Default: “35x43 (Blue)”

[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type>

Command for setting the printer recording method.
[1. Standard Scan] : Select for 10 pix/mm only.
[2. Enable Fine S.] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 20 pix/mm.
[3. Enable 300dpi] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 300 dpi.
<REMARKS>
Default: “1. Standard Scan”

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-13.4
 MU-14

[1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2>

Like “[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1”, command for setting the film size, film base color, and
printer recording method notified to the image input device when returning information
on equipment configuration.
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• For E-I/F connection, be sure to set this setting because connection with the printer is
confirmed based on the information of this setting.
• If only one film size is available, set the film size of this setting to “Disable”.

<REMARKS>
Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

[1-1-3-4-1] Film Size>

Command for setting the film size, and film base color.
[1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[5. Disable] : Disables the film size setting.
<NOTE>
Do not select [2. 35x35>].

<REMARKS>
Default: “5. Disable”

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type>

Command for setting the printer recording method.
[1. Standard Scan] : Select for 10 pix/mm only.
[2. Enable Fine S.] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 20 pix/mm.
[3. Enable 300dpi] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 300 dpi.
<NOTE>
Default: “1. Standard Scan”

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-14
 MU-15

[1-1-3-5] Set Sorter>

Command for setting whether a sorter is connected, and save or load sorter related
files.
<NOTE>
• Perform this setting only when connecting a printer equipped with a sorter and using the
sorting function.
• Set sorting conditions using a PC for servicing.

<REMARKS>
• Name of saved/loaded file: SORT_CH.DAT, EX_SORT.DAT, SORTDEF.DAT.
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again

[1-1-3-5-1] Connection>
Command for setting whether a sorter is connected.
[1. Enable] : Set when a sorter is connected.
[2. Disable] : Set when no sorter is connected.
<REMARKS>
Default: “2. Disable”

[1-1-3-5-2] Save to FD
Command for saving sorter related files.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the FD for saving (formatted) into the FD drive.
(2) [1-1-3-5-2. Save to FD] → <ENTER>
→ Data saving starts.
(3) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

[1-1-3-5-3] Load from FD

Command for loading sorter related files.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the FD containing files related to sorter into the FD drive.
(2) [1-1-3-5-3 Load from FD] → <ENTER>
→ Data loading starts.
(3) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure had ended normally.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-15
 MU-16

[1-1-3-6] Film Size>

Command for setting the film size and film base color used by the image input device.
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• Perform this setting only when inputting images from the E-I/F connected FCR7000/AC-2
series image reader.

[1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.

Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
<NOTE>
Do not select [2. 35x35>].

<REMARKS>
• Default: “35x43 (Blue)”
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

[1-1-3-7] Printer Sub.>

Command for setting whether to use the substitute printer during operations.
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• This setting is compatible with main unit software version A01 or later. Set the same value
as that of [3-4. Printer Sub.>].

[1. Enable] : Enables the substitute printer.

[2. Disable] : Disables the substitute printer.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “1. Enable”
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-16
 MU-17

[1-1-3-8] Report PrtChg>

Command for setting whether to notify the image input device when the printer is
switched (substituted and recovered).
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• This setting is compatible with main unit software version A04 or later.
• This setting is effective when values other than “0 (seconds)” is set at [1-1-3-2.
WakeupSub.tmr>], or when [1. Enable] (enables the substitute printer) is set at [1-1-3-7.
Printer Sub.>].

[1. Enable] : Enables notification.

[2. Disable] : Disables notification.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “2. Disable”
• When [1. Enable] (enables notification) is set, messages such as “Printer error” or “Standing
by for printer operations”, etc, (differs according to the type of input device) are displayed at
the image input device.
• When [1. Enable] (automatic recovery is enabled) is set at [1-1-3-10. Prt. Restore>], whether
printer switching notification is sent to the image input device depends on this setting.
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

[1-1-3-9] Notice Timer>

Command for setting the time (seconds) from notification of printer switching error to
notification that the error has been cleared.
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• This setting is compatible with main unit software version A04 or later.
• This setting is effective only when [1. Enable] (enables notification) is set at [1-1-3-8. Report
PrtChg>].

<REMARKS>
• Default: “20”
• Range which can be entered: 1 to 60 seconds
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-17
 MU-17.1

[1-1-3-10] Prt. Restore>

Command for setting whether to perform automatic recovery of the printer that was
being used before substitution when this former printer recovers after substitution.
<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.
• This setting is compatible with main unit software version A04 or later.
• This setting is effective only when [1. Enable] (enables the substitute printer) is set at [1-1-3-
7. Printer Sub.>].

[1. Enable] : Automatic recovery is enabled.

[2. Disable] : Automatic recovery is disabled (substitute printer is used).
<REMARKS>
• Default: “1. Enable”
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-17.1
 MU-17.2

[1-1-4] Check Files>

Command for displaying information of the system files (files in the memory card).

■ Example of Display
Pressing the <ENTER> key displays the file name
and date it was created repeatedly.

001 PSYSTEM.PRM 00-09-29 15:04

002 CH-DEFLT.PRM 02-01-09 20:27
003 FILMCONF.TXT 00-08-17 19:34
•
•
•
• FP8U0304.EPS

<REMARKS>
• Select the desired file using the <UP arrow> and <DOWN arrow> keys.
• At the file name displayed (list number+ file name), press the <ENTER> key to display the
file date.

[1-1-4-1] Check All

Displays all file information in the system file (files in the memory card).

[1-1-4-2] Check Indiv.

Displays only the individual data files information in the system files (files in the memory
card).

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-17.2
 MU-17.3

BLANK PAGE

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-17.3
 MU-17.4

BLANK PAGE

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-17.4
 MU-18

[1-1-5] Check Version

Command for displaying the version of the main unit software, version of the DICOM
software, and versions of each board.

■ Example of Display

Pressing the <UP arrow key>/<DOWN arrow key> repeatedly displays

the following information.
• Version information of the main unit software
• Version information of the DICOM software
• FPGA version information of the IMG15C board
• Board/FPGA version of the LAN90C board

Pressing the <ENTER> key

repeatedly displays the version/ID.

MAIN Ver : AXX-XX ID : 114YXXXXXXX

NET Ver : AXX-XX ID : 114YXXXXXXX

IMG15C : [XX, XX]

LAN90C : XX [XX, XX] FP8U0305.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-18
 MU-19

[1-2] FD>
Command for saving or loading information on various settings.

[1-2-1] Indiv.Data>
Command for saving individual data (to FD) or loading backed up individual data (from
FD).

[1-2-1-1] Save to FD
Command for saving individual data and data for analysis.
<REMARKS>
Execution time: Approx. 6 minutes

■ Procedure
(1) Set the FD for saving (formatted) into the FD drive.
(2) [1-2-1-1. Save to FD] → <ENTER>
→ Data saving starts.
(3) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

[1-2-1-2] Load from FD>

Command for loading the individual data.
<REMARKS>
• Execution time: Approx. 2 minutes
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the backed up FD into the FD drive.
(2) [1-2-1-2. Load from FD>] → <ENTER> → [1-2-1-2-1. Execute>] → <ENTER>
→ Data loading starts.
(3) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

[1-2-1-3] Save Log File

Command for saving only error log file.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the FD for saving (formatted) into the FD drive.
(2) [1-2-1-3. Save Log File] → <ENTER>
→ Data saving starts.
(3) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-19
 MU-20

[1-2-2] Save/Load File>

Command for saving or loading main unit software files of this equipment.

[1-2-2-1] Check Files

Command for displaying main unit software files of this equipment which can be saved
or loaded.
<REMARKS>
• The following lists files which can be saved or loaded.
File No. File name File No. File name File No. File name
00 ALL 12 P831_3M.TXT 21 RMTSIO.PRM
01 CONFIG.PRM 13 M952H_3M.TXT 22 RMT.PRM
02 VIDEOIN.PRM 14 CDFORM.DAT 23 FILMINFO.PRM
03 VIDEOAJ.PRM 15 CHAUSER.PRM 24 SORT_CH.DAT
04 CONFIG2.PRM 16 EXAMENU.PRM (*2) 25 EX_SORT.DAT
05 FUJI_STD.TXT 16 MENULIST.TXT (*3) 26 SORTDEF.DAT
06 TOSHIBA.TXT 17 MODALITY.PRM (*2) 27 DICOMFMT.DAT
07 YOKOGAWA.TXT 17 MODALITY.TXT (*4) 28 PSTRTIME.DAT (*1)
08 HITACHI.TXT 17 PSUBSET.DAT (*5) 29 IDFMTSTD.PRM (*3)
09 SHIMADZU.TXT 18 CH_DEFLT.PRM 30 IDFMTUSR.PRM (*3)
10 SIEMENS.TXT 19 PNL_INFO.TXT 31 CDFORM2.DAT (*6)
11 M952_3M.TXT 20 RMTMODEM.PRM 63 SAVEFILE.LST
TP8U0301.EPS

• (*1): Compatible with main unit software version A01 or later.

• (*2): Compatible with up to main unit software version A02.
• (*3): Compatible with main unit software version A03 or later.
• (*4): Compatible with main unit software version A03 only.
• (*5): Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later.
• (*6): Compatible with main unit software version A05 or later.

[1-2-2-2] Save to FD>

Command for saving main unit software files of this equipment.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the FD for saving (formatted) into the FD drive.
(2) [1-2-2-2. Save to FD>] → <ENTER>
→ The file number input display appears.
(3) Enter the file number to be saved and press <ENTER>.
→ Data saving starts.
(4) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-20
 MU-21

[1-2-2-3] Load from FD>

Command for loading main unit software files of this equipment.
<REMARKS>
Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the backed up FD into the FD drive.
(2) [1-2-2-3. Load from FD>] → <ENTER>
→ The file number input display appears.
(3) Enter the file number to be loaded and press <ENTER>.
→ Data loading starts.
(4) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

[1-2-3] Format FD>

Command for formatting FD.
<REMARKS>
• Execution time: Approx. 1 minute
• The FD will be DOS formatted (1.44 MB).

■ Procedure
(1) Set the FD to be formatted into the FD drive.
(2) [1-2-3. Format FD>] → <ENTER>
(3) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-21
 MU-22

[1-3] Err. Log Data>

Command for displaying error logs generated in this equipment and clearing error logs.

[1-3-1] Error Log #1

Command for displaying error logs (including details).
<REMARKS>
• If no error log (0 error logs), "nothing" appears.
• The 50 latest error logs are preserved.

■ Example of Display
Pressing the <ENTER> key displays the error code/error date of both.

01 : N 0000 0001 02-04-19 13:12

YY : X AAAA BBBB CCCCCC DDDD FP8U0303.EPS

■ Displayed items
YY :Index
X :Error source differentiation (P: Printer, F: Formatter, N: Network)
AAAA :Error code (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
BBBB :Detailed error code (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
CCCCCC :Date error occurred
DDDD :Time error occurred

[1-3-2] Clear>
Command for clearing error log to zero.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-22
 MU-23

[1-4] Set Panel>

[1-4-1] Alarm>
Command for setting the alarm type of the operation panel.
<NOTE>
As the user is unable to stop the alarm, normally set at [2. PULSE] (default). Perform this
setting only to change the default value.

[1. OFF] : Sets the alarm to OFF.

[2. PULSE] : Sets single buzzer.
[3. ON] : Sets the continuous beep.
<REMARKS>
• With [PULSE], the alarm stops after about 3 seconds.
• With [ON], press the <CANCEL> key to stop the alarm.
• The changes will be effective from the time they were made.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-23
 MU-24

[2] Set Network>

Command for setting the network information required for DICOM connecting this
equipment.

[2-1] Configuration>

[2-1-1] AE-title>
Command for setting the name of this equipment to be DICOM-connected.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the AE Title.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “DRYPIXLINK”

[2-1-2] IP Address>
Command for setting the IP address used for the DICOM protocol.
<REMARKS>
Default IP address: “172.016.001.050”

[2-1-3] Sub Net mask>

Command for setting the subnet mask for using the DICOM protocol.
<REMARKS>
Default subnet mask: “255.255.000.000”

[2-1-4] Host name>

Command for setting the host name for using the DICOM protocol.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the host name.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “dplink”

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-24
 MU-25

[2-1-5] Gateways.>
Command for setting the gateway address for using the DICOM protocol.
<NOTE>
Perform this setting only if different networks are connected.

<REMARKS>
If no gateway address has been set (default), the operation panel will show “000.000.000.000”.

[2-1-6] Net Tool>

Command for setting the IP address (FTP server address) of the PC for servicing to
perform DICOM settings, printer settings, and LAN board settings using the service tool
software (Net Tool).
<NOTE>
• Perform this setting only when performing various settings from the PC for servicing.
• For main unit software version up to A02, this command will be displayed as [2-1-6. FTP
Server>]. Settings are the same.

<REMARKS>
• Default: “172.016.001.020” (Compatible with up to main unit software version A02)
• Default: “172.016.001.080” (Compatible with main unit software version A03 or later)

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-25
 MU-26

[2-2] Config. Files>

[2-2-1] Check Files

Command for displaying LAN configuration files which can be saved or loaded.
<REMARKS>
• The following shows files which can be saved or loaded.
File No. File name
00 ALL
01 NETINF.PRM
02 DICOM.CFG
03 LINKPC.CFG (*1)
04 PRINTER.CFG (*1)
05 LINKPC2.CFG (*2)
06 OCRIMG.PRM (*2)
TP8U0302.EPS

• (*1): Compatible with DICOM software version A02 or later.

• (*2): Compatible with DICOM software version A04 or later.

[2-2-2] Save to FD>

Command for saving LAN configuration files.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the FD for saving (formatted) into the FD drive.
(2) [2-2-2. Save to FD>] → <ENTER>
→ The file number input display appears.
(3) Enter the file number to be saved and press <ENTER>.
→ Data saving starts.
(4) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

[2-2-3] Load from FD>

Command for loading LAN configuration files.
<REMARKS>
Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the backed up FD into the FD drive.
(2) [2-2-3. Load from FD>] → <ENTER>
→ The file number input display appears.
(3) Enter the file number to be loaded and press <ENTER>.
→ Data loading starts.
(4) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-26
 MU-27

[2-3] Save Log File

Command for saving communication log files related to the network.
<NOTE>
Communication logs are erased when the power is turned OFF. To save communication logs,
do so before turning OFF the power.

<REMARKS>
File name saved: DICOM.LOG, DPM.LOG

■ Procedure
(1) Set the FD for saving (formatted) into the FD drive.
(2) [2-3. Save Log File] → <ENTER>
→ Data saving starts.
(3) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.

[2-4] N-Soft V-UPG>

Command for upgrading the DICOM software version.

■ Procedure
(1) Set the DICOM software FD (1/2) into the FD drive.
(2) [2-4. N-Soft V-UPG>] → <ENTER>
(3) [CONTINUE?] → <ENTER>
→ Upgrading of DICOM software version starts.
(4) “Completed.” appears, indicating that the procedure has ended normally.
<REMARKS>
• The DICOM software FD (2/2) is a configuration file.
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-27
 MU-28

[3] Set DICOM>

Command for setting the various detailed information related to the DICOM protocol for
the printer.

[3-1] Timeout>
Command for setting the timeout value (seconds) for each printer.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “180”
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 600 seconds

[3-2] Log Mode>

Command for setting the mode for acquiring logs of communication with the printer.
[1. Normal] : Normal
[2. Detail] : Detailed
[3. Disable] : No
<REMARKS>
Default: “2. Detail”

[3-3] Polling Timer>

Command for setting the printer status acquisition interval (seconds).
<REMARKS>
• Default: “060”
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 600 seconds

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-28
 MU-29

[3-4] Printer Sub.>

Command for setting whether to use the substitute printer in normal printing jobs.
<NOTE>
• Up to main unit software version A02, set the time waited to switch to substitution processing
(seconds) in this setting if set to [1.Enable>] (enables the substitute printer).
The time waited to switch to substitution processing is used together with the time specified
in [3-5. Film Sub.>]. Consequently, if executing film substitution processing in [3-5. Film
Sub.>] without using the substitute printer in this setting, set this setting to [1. Enable >] first,
then set the time waited to switch to substitution processing, and then set this setting to [2.
Disable].
• From main unit software version A03, set the time waited to switch to substitution processing
if set to [1.Enable>] (enables the substitute printer) at [3-6. Printer Timer>].

[1. Enable] : Enables the substitute printer.

[2. Disable] : Disables the substitute printer.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “1. Enable”
• Default, and range of time waited to switch to substitution processing which can be entered:
“0600”, 0 to 1200 seconds (Compatible with up to main unit software version A02).

[3-5] Film Sub.>

Command for setting whether to execute film substitution processing.
[1. Enable] : Enables substitution processing.
[2. Disable] : Disables substitution processing.
<REMARKS>
Default: “1. Enable ”

[3-6] Printer Timer>

If the substitute printer is enabled in [3-4. Printer Sub.>], or substitution processing is
enabled in [3-5. Film Sub.>], set the time waited to switch to substitution processing
(retry time of transmission to printer (seconds)).
<NOTE>
• The time waited to switch to substitution processing (retry time of transmission to printer) is
used together with the time to switching to the substitute printer and time to switching to film
substitution.
• This setting is compatible with main unit software version A03 or later.

<REMARKS>
• Default: “0600”
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 1200 seconds

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-29
 MU-30

[4] Set Printer>

Command for setting the information of the printer used for DICOM printing.
<NOTE>
Up to ten substitute printers can be set. The priority of these printers is in the order of [4-1.
Printer #1>], then #2 to #10.

[4-1] Printer #1>

Command for setting the information of the first printer.
<REMARKS>
• If connecting only one printer, set only [4-1. Printer #1>].
• If setting the information of several printers (up to ten), set [4-2. Printer #2>] to [4-10. Printer
#10>].

[4-1-1] PrinterAEname>
Command for setting the printer name (AE Title).
<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the AE Title.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “DRYPIX”
• The default for [4-2. Printer #2>] to [4-10. Printer #10>] is not set.
• For main unit software version up to A02, this command will be displayed as [4-1-1. Printer
Name>]. Settings are the same.

[4-1-2] IP Address>
Command for setting the printer IP address.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “172.016.001.030” (Compatible with up to main unit software version A03)
• Default: “172.016.001.040” (Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later)
• Default of [4-2. Printer #2>] to [4-10. Printer #10>]: “000.000.000.000”

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-30
 MU-31

[4-1-3] Port No.>

Command for setting the port number for DICOM input of the printer.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “0000017238” (Compatible with up to main unit software version A03)
• Default: “0000000104” (Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later)
• The first five digits or seven digits of the default port number are set at 0s. When entering the
port number, these 0s need not be entered.
Example
Port=17238←

[4-1-4] Film Size>

Command for setting the printable film size and film base color.

[4-1-4-1] Film Size #1>

Command for setting the film size and film base color of the printer used (film size 1).
[1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
<NOTE>
• Do not select [2. 35x35>].
• If the printer used only has one film size, set only [4-1-4-1. Film Size #1>], and set [4-1-4-2.
Film Size #2>] to [4-1-4-4. Film Size #4>] to [5. Disable].

<REMARKS>
Default: “1. 35x43 (Blue)”

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-31
 MU-32

[4-1-4-2] Film Size #2>

Command for setting the film size and film base color of the printer used (film size 2).
[1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[5. Disable] : Disables the film size setting.
<NOTE>
Do not select [2. 35x35>].

<REMARKS>
Default: “5. Disable”

[4-1-4-3] Film Size #3>

Command for setting the film size and film base color of the printer used (film size 3).
[1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[5. Disable] : Disables the film size setting.
<NOTE>
Do not select [2. 35x35>].

<REMARKS>
Default: “5. Disable”

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-32
 MU-33

[4-1-4-4] Film Size #4>

Command for setting the film size and film base color of the printer used (film size 4).
[1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
[5. Disable] : Disables the film size setting.
<NOTE>
Do not select [2. 35x35>].

<REMARKS>
Default: “5. Disable”

[4-1-5] Image Type>

Command for setting the printable recording method.
[1. Standard Scan] : Select for 10 pix/mm only.
[2. Enable Fine S.] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 20 pix/mm.
[3. Enable 300dpi] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 300 dpi.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “3. Enable 300dpi” (Compatible with up to main unit software version A03)
• Default: “1. Standard Scan” (Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later)

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-33
 MU-34

[4-1-6] Alias Name>

Command for setting the printer name for display.
<NOTE>
• When entering the printer name for display in this setting, do not use the same name as [4-
1-1. PrinterAEname>] (printer AE Title). Otherwise, this setting will be set to [2. Disable].
• This setting is compatible with main unit software version A03 or later.
However as this setting is valid only if connecting AD-I/F, it need not be set if connecting E-
I/F.

[1. Enable>] : The printer name for display is used.

[2. Disable] : The printer name for display is not used.
<REMARKS>
• The printer name for display can be set with a unique name different from that set at [4-1-1.
PrinterAEname>] (printer AE Title) to enable easy differentiation of printers connected on
the network.
The printer name for display set is used as the printer name displayed on the remote panel
if connecting AD-I/F.
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the printer name for display.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “2. Disable”

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-34
 MU-35

[4-2] Printer #2>

Command for setting the information of the second printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

[4-3] Printer #3>

Command for setting the information of the third printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

[4-4] Printer #4>

Command for setting the information of the fourth printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

[4-5] Printer #5>

Command for setting the information of the fifth printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

[4-6] Printer #6>

Command for setting the information of the sixth printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

[4-7] Printer #7>

Command for setting the information of the seventh printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

[4-8] Printer #8>

Command for setting the information of the eighth printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

[4-9] Printer #9>

Command for setting the information of the ninth printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

[4-10] Printer #10>

Command for setting the information of the tenth printer.
Settings are the same as [4-1. Printer #1>].

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-35
 MU-36

[5] Test Print>

Command for printing the various test print patterns.
<NOTE>
This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in E-I/F
connection.

[5-1] Pattern 1 (SMPTE Pattern Output)

Command for printing the test print pattern SMPTE 1 frame format.

■ Procedure
(1) [5-1. Pattern 1] → <ENTER>
→ Information on printers connected which are in the printable state and whose
information have been preset in this equipment will be displayed.
(2) Select the printer name (AE Title), and press <ENTER>.
→ The film size input display appears.
(3) Select the film size, and press <ENTER>.
→ The film base color input display appears.
(4) Select the film base color, and press <ENTER>.
→ The test print film (SMPTE pattern) is output to the selected printer.

[5-2] Pattern 2 (Gradation Pattern Output)

Command for printing the test print pattern gradation 1 frame format.

■ Procedure
(1) [5-2. Pattern 2] → <ENTER>
→ Information on printers connected which are in the printable state and whose
information have been preset in this equipment will be displayed.
(2) Select the printer name (AE Title), and press <ENTER>.
→ The film size input display appears.
(3) Select the film size, and press <ENTER>.
→ The film base color input display appears.
(4) Select the film base color, and press <ENTER>.
→ The test print film (gradation pattern) is output to the selected printer.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-36
 MU-37

[6] Diagnosis>

[6-1] I.M. R/W Test>

Command for writing the specified data in the image memory, and outputting it to a
different area in the image memory (bus controller return). The input data and output
data are compared and the results are displayed.

■ Data Path
A and B are compared and error is generated if they do not match.
Bus controller Memory

IMG board
A

FP3F0375.EPS

[6-1-1] Partial
Command for executing the above test on some parts of the first memory.
<NOTE>
Execution time: Approx. 20 seconds

[6-1-2] All
Execute the above test over the whole memory mounted.
<REMARKS>
Execution time
• Image memory x 1: Approx. 20 minutes
• Image memory x 2: Approx. 40 minutes

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37
 MU-37.1

[7] Set Station>

<NOTE>
• This function is displayed on the operation panel and is available for use only in AD-I/F
connection. Set it when DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) is connected.
• This setting is compatible with main unit software version A03 or later.

[7-1] Station Name>

Command for setting the host name of DRYPIX Station.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the host name of DRYPIX Station.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “DS”

[7-2] IP Address>
Command for setting the IP address of DRYPIX Station.
<REMARKS>
Default: “172.016.001.070”

[7-3] Port No.>

Command for setting the port number of DRYPIX Station.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “0000010101”
• The first five digits of the default port number are set at 0s. When entering the port number,
these 0s need not be entered.
Example
Port=10101←

[7-4] Response tmr>

Command for setting the response waiting time (seconds) from DRYPIX Station.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “60”
• Range which can be entered: 1 to 60 seconds

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.1
 MU-37.2

[7-5] Reset Timer>

Command for setting the timeout time (seconds) for detecting communication errors
with DRYPIX Station.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “0300”
• Range which can be entered: 1 to 1800 seconds

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.2
 MU-37.3

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.3
 MU-37.4

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.4
 MU-37.5

3.4 Detailed Supplementary Explanation for M-Utility

3.4.1 Description of Printer Substitution

■ Outline of Printer Backup Function
This equipment (DRYPIX Link) can connect several printers (up to ten) to construct
a printer backup system. The following outlines the printer backup function.

● State of substituted printer

When the printer normally used (hereafter referred to as main printer) is in the following
state, it will be switched to the backup printer.
• Power OFF
• System down
• M-Utility
• U-Utility (When the printer is FM-DP L, DRYPIX 1000/3000)
• Cannot communicate with this equipment (network cable is not connected, etc)

● Conditions for substitution of printer

All printers registered in this equipment can serve as prospective backup printers.
However to use them as a backup printer, the following conditions need to be satisfied.

❍ For E-I/F connection

(1) Conditions based on recording method of printer
• Printers are classified according to the following recording methods.
Standard Scan (10 pix/mm) printer : FM-DP L, DRYPIX 7000
Fine Scan (20 pix/mm) printer : FM-DP L, DRYPIX 7000
300 dpi printer : DRYPIX 1000/3000
• If a printer is indicated as “Yes” under “Substitutable” in the following table, it can
be used as a backup printer.

Main Printer Backup Printer Substitutable

Standard Scan Standard Scan Yes
Standard Scan 300 dpi Yes
Standard Scan Fine Scan No
300 dpi Standard Scan Yes
300 dpi 300 dpi Yes
300 dpi Fine Scan No
Fine Scan Standard Scan No
Fine Scan 300 dpi No
Fine Scan Fine Scan Yes
TP8U0303.EPS

(2) Conditions based on film base color

The film base color used by the main printer and that used by the backup printer
must be the same.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.5
 MU-37.6

(3) Conditions based on film size configuration

It is necessary to register printers in this equipment so that backup printers can
reproduce the film size configuration of the main printer.
• Example 1: If the following printers are connected, printer #1 can be used as the
main printer and printer #2 as the backup printer for this film size
configuration.

Film sizes
Printer #1
35x43 (Blue)
FM-DP L 26x36 (Blue)

DRYPIX
E-I/F device
Link

Film sizes
Printer #2
35x43 (Blue)
Film sizes FM-DP L 26x36 (Blue)
registered in Link
35x43 (Blue)
26x36 (Blue)
FP8U0306.EPS

• Example 2: If the following printers are connected, printer #1 can be used as the
main printer, and printers #2 and #3 can be used as backup printers
for this film size configuration.
As the main printer uses both film sizes 35x43 and 26x36, both
printers #2 and #3 must be enabled for use, otherwise they will not
function as backup printers.
However, when printing after this equipment has received image
data, the printer capable of printing these film sizes will function as the
backup printer if it is enabled for use.

Film sizes
Printer #1
35x43 (Blue)
FM-DP L 26x36 (Blue)

DRYPIX
E-I/F device
Link

Printer #2 Film size

Film sizes DRYPIX 1000 26x36 (Blue)
registered in Link
35x43 (Blue)
26x36 (Blue)

Printer #3 Film size

DRYPIX 3000 35x43 (Blue)

FP8U0307.EPS

❍ For AD-I/F connection

(1) Conditions based on film sizes which can be used by printer
The backup printer must be capable of printing the required film size.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.6
 MU-37.7

● Switching Procedure to the Backup Printer

❍ For E-I/F connection

No user operations are required. This equipment will search for a printer according to
the registered order, and switch to the usable backup printer.

❍ For AD-I/F connection

The user selects the available printer and switches to it at the printer selection screen of
the remote panel.
However, if the printer to which image is output cannot be used after print operations,
like E-I/F connection, this equipment will search for a printer according to the registered
order, and switch to the usable backup printer.

● When the main printer becomes enables for use while using the backup printer

❍ For E-I/F connection

One of the following operations is carried out according to the M-Utility setting.
• The backup printer is continued to be used.
• Switched to the main printer.

❍ For AD-I/F connection

The user is able to select the main printer at the printer selection screen of the remote
panel. The printer switches to the one selected by the user.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.7
 MU-37.8

■ List of M-Utility Settings Related to Printer Substitution and Substitution Timing

M-Utility Details of settings Remarks

[1-1-3-2. Set the standby time for the first printer registered to • Effective only for E-I/F
WakeupSub.tmr>] start. connection.
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 6000 (seconds) • Compatible with main unit
• Default: “0” software version A01 or
(*1): When “0”, printer substitution is not carried out later.
when the equipment is started (continues waiting
for the first printer to start).
[1-1-3-7. Set whether to use the substitute printer during • Effective only for E-I/F
Printer Sub.>] operations. connection.
• [1. Enable]: Enables the substitute printer (Default) • Compatible with main unit
• [2. Disable]: Disables the substitute printer software version A01 or
(*1): Set the same value as that of [3-4. Printer Sub.>]. later.
[1-1-3-8. Set whether to notify (printer error) the image input • Effective only for E-I/F
Report PrtChg>] device when the printer is switched during printer connection.
substitution. • Compatible with main unit
• [1. Enable]: Enables notification software version A04 or
• [2. Disable]: Disables notification (Default) later.
[1-1-3-9. Set the time from the [1-1-3-8. Report PrtChg>] error • Effective only for E-I/F
Notice Timer>] notification to notification that the error has been connection.
cleared. • Compatible with main unit
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 60 (seconds) software version A04 or
• Default: “20” later.
[1-1-3-10. Set whether to change back to the printer that was • Effective only for E-I/F
Prt. Restore>] being used before substitution when this former printer connection.
recovers after substitution. • Compatible with main unit
• [1. Enable]: Return to former printer (Default) software version A04 or
• [2. Disable]: Continue outputting images to substitute later.
printer
[3-3. Set the interval for issuing the N-GET command for
Polling Timer>] monitoring the printer status periodically.
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 600 (seconds)
• Default: “60”
[3-4. Set whether to use the substitute printer in printing Set the time waited to switch to
Printer Sub.>] jobs. substitution processing at this
• [1. Enable]: Enables the substitute printer (Default) menu for up to main unit
• [2. Disable]: Disables the substitute printer software version A02, or at [3-
(*1): For E-I/F connection, set the same value as that of 6. Printer Timer>] for main unit
[1-1-3-7. Printer sub.>]. software version A03 or later.
(*2): When set to [1. Enable], there is a need to set the
time waited to switch to substitution processing.
[3-5. Set whether to execute film substitution processing
Film Sub.>] during printing.
• [1. Enable]: Enables substitution processing (Default)
• [2. Disable]: Disables substitution processing
(*1): The time set to wait to switch to substitution
processing is used together with [3-4. Printer
Sub.>].
[3-6. If [3-4. Printer Sub.>] or [3-5. Film Sub.>] is set to [1. Compatible with main unit
Printer Timer>] Enable], set the time waited to switch to substitution software version A03 or later.
processing.
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 1200 (seconds)
• Default: “0600”
TP8U0304.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.8
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
■ Printer Substitution Timing Chart
The following shows an example of connecting two printers by E-I/F connection.
ON
DRYPIX Link power supply Wait for startup of main printer (Printer #1) until time set at [WakeupSub. tmr>] (range which can be entered:
OFF
0 to 6000 seconds) (Default: 0 seconds=continues waiting for startup of main printer)
Count starts after (In this example, the main printer starts within the specified time, and no substitution is carried out at startup)
main unit software
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

Printer start waiting time startup (about one

[1-1-3-2. WakeupSub.tmr>] minute later)

Monitoring starts after startup of DICOM Monitoring of status of all printers at the interval set
software (about 10 seconds later) at [Polling Timer>] (Default: 60 seconds)
Printer monitoring
[3-3. Polling Timer>]

Main printer starts Determined as disconnected with printer after 5 continuous NGs Printer recovery is determined
in one OK monitoring
within startup
Printer #1 state OK waiting time
(Main printer)
NG OK OK
Substitution processing
(backup printer check)
Processing when [1-1-3-7. Printer
Printer #2 state OK Sub.>] is set to “Enable” (default).
(Backup printer) No substitution processing is
NG
OK carried out when set to “Disable”.

#1 Connected switched to
Connected printer backup printer
Recovery of
#2 connection to
Connected to
main printer main printer
Image input before [3-6. Printer Timer>] setting time (Default: 600 seconds)
printer switching Processing when [3-4.
(This image is output Printer Sub.>] is set to
input to Printer #1) “Enable” (default). No
substitution processing
Image input/output 1 Processing when [1-1-3-10. Prt.
is carried out when set
Restore>] is set to “Enable” (default)
output to “Disable”.
(The substitute printer is used
Output is disabled due to NG state of continuously when set to “Disable”)
If output is not possible within the [Printer
output destination (Printer #1), and Timer>] time, output to backup printer
output is retried every five seconds (Printer #2) by substitution processing

Image input after printer substitution

(Image input is stopped once due to error Image input is resumed when error is cleared
input notification from the Link shown below)
Image input/output 2
output Output to backup printer (Printer #2)
Printer substitution notification (printer error) is sent to after substitution
the input device at the timing of the first image input

MU-37.9
MU-37.9

after printer substitution. The second image input Printer error recovery is sent to input device
Printer switching notification onwards by the same substitution is not notified. after [Notice Timer>] time has passed
[1-1-3-8. Report PrtChg>]
(Default: Disable. The example in [1-1-3-9. Notice Timer>] setting time
this chart is set to “Enable”.) (Default: 20 seconds)
FP8U0308.EPS
 MU-37.10

BLANK PAGE

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.10
 MU-37.11

■ Printer Substitution Processing Flow

<NOTE>
• Take note that the following flow outlines each process, and is not intended to show the
actual software processing flow.
• The following flow is based on the functions of main unit software version A04 or later, and
DICOM software version A03 or later. Take note that some functions may differ from old
software versions.

● Outline of Printer Substitution Processing Flow at Startup (E-I/F connection

only)

Printer substitution
at startup

Power ON

• Wait for Printer #1 to start for the duration set at [1-1-3-2.

WakeupSub. tmr>]
Has • When value set=0 (default), continues waiting for Printer #1 to
Has Printer No startup wait time No
#1 started? start (No printer substitution at startup)
passed?
(*1)
Yes Yes

Wait until substitutable printer starts (Including Printer #1)

Check registered substitutable printer

Has Printer No Has Printer No Has Printer No Has Printer No

#2 started? #3 started? #10 started? #1 started?
(*1) (*1) (*1) (*1)
Yes Yes Yes Yes

Use Printer #1 Use Printer #2 Use Printer #3 Use Printer #10

Connect to main
printer (*2) (*3) Connect to substitute printer (*2) (*3) FP8U0309.EPS

(*1): Startup of each printer is determined according to information of the status check (printer monitoring) of all
printers performed during the time set at [3-3. Polling Timer>] (default: 60 seconds).
(*2): When film size is set at both [1-1-3-3. Film Info. #1>] and [1-1-3-4. Film Info. #2>] (setting for using two film
sizes) under the following conditions, two printers may serve as the main printer or substitute printer.
• When all registered printers (Printer #1 to Printer #10) are set to one type of film size.
• When the main printer (Printer #1) is set to two types of film sizes, and all other printers (Printer #2 to
Printer #10) are set to one type of film size.
(*3): The priority order of printers is according to the registered order (Printer #1 → Printer #2... → Printer #10).
For example, if three printers (Printer #1 to Printer #3) with the same conditions are registered, and Printer
#1 is disabled for use while Printers #2 and #3 are enabled for use, Printer #2 will be used.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.11
 MU-37.12

● Outline of Printer Monitoring, Substitution, and Automatic Recovery

Processing Flow during Operations (E-I/F connection only)

Printer monitoring
Printer substitution
Printer automatic recovery

Has
No
Polling Timer time The states of all printers registered are checked
passed? at the interval set at [3-3. Polling Timer>] (default:
60 seconds) (Printer monitoring) (*1)
Yes

Check of all printers

One of the following processes is executed

If a printer with high If printer currently connected

priority order than that If printer currently
cannot be used (five continuous
currently connected connected can be used
NGs in above printer monitoring)
can be used

Is there
Connected to recovered No
Printer connection is a substitutable
to printer with high printer?
priority order (*3) continued

Yes

Connected to substitute No connected printer

printer (*2) (cannot be used)

FP8U0310.EPS

(*1): Likewise for AD-I/F, the states of all printers are checked, and the results are reflected in the printer status
display and list of printers displayed at the printer selection screen on the remote panel.
For AD-I/F connection, the printer connected is switched by user selection.
(*2): Substituted when [1-1-3-7. Printer Sub.>] is set to "Enable" (default), switched to a printer with high priority
order amongst substitutable printers.
Note that the number of printers switched to from one printer is not necessarily one. The number substituted
is as follows based on the usable film size and registered printer type.
• When two printers (each has one film size) are connected, and one of these printers is substituted.
• When one printer (has two film sizes) is connected, and this is substituted by two substitute printers (each
has one film size).
(*3): When both [1-1-3-7. Printer Sub.>] and [1-1-3-10. Prt. Restore>] are set to "Enable" (default), if a printer with
higher priority than the one currently used is available, connection is recovered to this printer.
The printer is switched to an available printer with the highest priority order at that point, even if this printer is
not the main printer (Printer #1).
When [1-1-3-10. Prt. Restore>] is set to "Disable", the printer currently used is continued.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.12
 MU-37.13

● Outline of Printer Substitution Processing Flow during Printing (Both E-I/F

connection and AD-I/F Connection)

Printer substitution
during printing

Image data input

Output to printer
currently connected
Printing is retried every 5 seconds during
the time set at [3-6. Printer Timer>]
(default: 600 seconds)
Has
Output OK?
No
Printer Timer time No
passed?

Yes Yes

One of the following processes is executed

When printer When printer When printer When printer

substitution and film substitution is enabled substitution is disabled substitution and film
substitution are and film substitution is and film substitution is substitution are
enabled (*1) disabled (*1) enabled (*1) disabled (*1)

Printing is
implemented in order
by the substitutable
printers (*2)

Only Printing is implemented in

No printer substitution No order by the film
Output OK? substitutable printers
enabled?
(*2) (*3)
Yes Yes

No
Output OK?

Yes

END
FP8U0311.EPS

(*1): The process implemented differs according to the setting of [3-4. Printer Sub.>] (default: Enable) and [3-5.
Film Sub.>] (default: Enable).
(*2): For printer substitution and film substitution, printing is implemented in order from the printer with the highest
priority order regardless of the priority order of the printer currently connected.
For example, when Printer #1 to Printer #5 are registered, and the printer currently connected is Printer #3:
• For printer substitution, printing is implemented in the order of Printer #1 → Printer #2 → Printer #4 →
Printer #5, excluding Printer #3.
• For film substitution, printing is implemented in the order of Printer #1 → Printer #2 → Printer #3 → Printer
#4 → Printer #5, including Printer #3.
If all printers registered as substitute printers cannot be used, attempts are made to return to the printer
currently connected again and these processes are repeated.
During substitution, output retry is repeated three times at intervals of five seconds. If output is not possible,
substitution of the next substitutable printer is attempted.
(*3): In film substitution, images are output in the specified film size format to the printer with a bigger film size
than the specified film size.
If film substitution is carried out without printer substitution, it is determined that film substitution is possible
only in the printer currently connected (images are not output to other substitute printers).
006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.13
 MU-37.14

BLANK PAGE

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-37.14
 MU-38

4. REMOTE PANEL SERVICE MODE

4.1 Service Mode Overview

• This section describes the procedure for using the DRYPIX Link remote panel
service mode.
• Many of the remote panel service mode functions are similar to the service mode
functions of the Fuji Medical Laser Imager and Fuji Medical Dry Imager.

<DRYPIX Link Remote Panel>

FP3F0380.EPS

The Service Mode offers the following functions to perform maintenance and servicing
of the equipment:
• Rewriting of various parameters;
• Various test processes, such as film output.
The Service Mode is composed of two types: Maintenance Mode and Service Option.
In the Maintenance Mode, rewritting of various parameters are executed.
In the Service Option, test processes in combination with routine functions, such as film
output, are executed.
The mode transition diagram of the equipment is illustrated below.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-38
 MU-39

Power ON or Reset

Initial Processing Mode

C D A B

E Routine H Abnormal
Maintenance Service Option User Service Processing Indication
Mode Mode Mode

I G I I

Shutdown Processing Mode

Transition by general user or

service engineer
Power OFF
Transition by service engineer

A Transition after normal end of Initial Processing F Transition from Routine Processing to Service Option
B Transition after abnormal end of Initial Processing G Transition after end of Service Option
C Transition from Initial Processing to Maintenance Mode H Transition from Routine Processing to Abnormal
D Transition from Initial Processing to User Service Indication Mode
E Transition after end of User Service I Transition after system power OFF
FP3F0308.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-39
 MU-40

4.2 Maintenance Mode

The Maintenance Mode offers the following functions.
• Initialization of various setup items
• Setup of each item in the configuration file
• Creation of video parameters
• File saving/loading
A transition to the Maintenance Mode is effected only from the Initial Processing mode.
The operation in the Maintenance Mode is performed on the remote panel.

4.2.1 Common Information for Maintenance Mode

■ Precautions for Maintenance Mode
<NOTE>
• For this equipment, select channel 1 as the input channel to be set.
• In the Maintenance Mode, routine operations such as storing and printing cannot be
performed.

■ Numerals and Characters Entered in Maintenance Mode

The numerals and characters that can be entered in the Maintenance Mode are as
follows.
0~9, A, B, C, D, E, F, SP (space), / (slash), : (colon), and . (period)
Those numerals and characters are assigned to the functions keys of the remote panel.

<Numerals and Characters That Can Be Entered in the Maintenance Mode, and
Function Key Assignment>

0 5 A F

1 6 B SP
2 7 C /

3 8 D :

4 9 E .

Switchable with
or key

FP3F0381.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-40
 MU-41

■ Role of Each Remote Panel Key

F0 F5
F1 F6
Function key F2 F7 Function key
F3 F8
F4 F9
key

Clear image key

Print key Store key

Clear page key

key key
key
FP8U0401.EPS

• , key
Used to switch the available numerals and characters assigned to the function
keys.
• Function key (F0~F9)
Used to enter a numeral or character.
• key
Used to delete the numeral or character entered. Press this key once to delete
one character.
• Store key
Used to confirm the numeral or character entered.
• Print key, Clear Image key, Clear page key, and key
Not used in the maintenance mode.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-41
 MU-42

■ How to Enter Maintenance Mode

(1) Power ON.
(2) As the startup screen disappears and a peep sounds, the Initial Processing
screen appears. Within two seconds of that screen appearance, press the
[F5] and [F9] keys at the same time.

<Startup Screen and Initial Processing Screen>

F5key
CPU HARDWARE START UP . . . . .
PROGRAM MEMORY TEST done.
VRAM TEST done.
CHARACTER GENERATOR TEST done.
BUS ERROR TEST done.
BUZZER TEST done.
IPL DIAGNOSTICS DONE
WAIT A MINUTE
Initia lization in progress. F9key
Wait a minute.

Startup screen Initial Progressing screen

FP3F0383.EPS

→ After entering the Maintenance Mode, the Main Menu appears.

The Main Menu is displayed about a minute after the numeric icons appear.

<Main Menu of the Maintenance Mode>

0 1.Installation 5
2.Utility
0.End
1 6
Select no.=_
2 7

3 8

4 9

FP3F0352.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-42
 MU-43

■ How to Quit Maintenance Mode

(1) With the main menu of the Maintenance Mode displayed, select “0. End”.
[0]␣ → [Store]
→ Then a message prompting to save the changes made in the maintenance mode in the
configuration file appears.

CONFIG file Saving

1. Yes
2. No
Select no. =_
(2) To save the changes made, select “1.Yes”.
[1]␣ → [Store]
→ A message appears.
<REMARKS>
To quit without saving the changes made, select “2.No” and proceed to step (4).

(3) Press the [Store] key.

→ The data is written into the configuration file.

CAUTION
Never power OFF during file saving. If the power is turned OFF during saving, the
memory card contents will be lost.

(4) After the quitting message appears as follows, power OFF.

Service mode finished.
Power off please.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-43
 MU-44

■ When to Input
Enter a numeral or character when prompted by “=_” on screen.

■ Selecting “0. End”

When “0. End” is selected, you can abort or terminate the execution of a command.

■ Common Procedures Necessary for Command Execution

A command system for the Maintenance Mode is schematically illustrated in “4.2.2
Command Tree Diagram for Maintenance Mode”.
For the functions and operating procedures for each command, see the tables in “4.2.3
Installation” and “4.2.4 Utility”.
The common procedures needed to execute each command described in the tables
are as set forth below.
(1) Enter the Maintenance Mode.
(2) Enter an Input No. set forth in the table.
The “Input No.”, which represents the number to be entered to execute each
command, is set forth in the left column of the table.
For example, to execute “Date”, enter the following sequence, since its Input No.
is 1-1-1.
[1] → [Store] → [1] → [Store] → [1] → [Store]
(3) While referring to the operating procedures in the table and screen description,
take necessary steps in sequence.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-44
 MU-45

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-45
 MU-46

4.2.2 Command Tree Diagram for Maintenance Mode

Service mode 1. Installation 1. Initialization 1. Date (Set up date/time)
(Maintenance Mode) (Installation) (Initialization) 2. CONFIG file (Initialize configuration file)
3. Hard disk (Initialize HD)
4. Queue (Clear print remaining in the queue)
5. Total film count (Clear total film count)
6. Backup RAM (Initialize backup RAM)
0. End
2. Connection 1. Input channel (Set up input channel)
(Set up system connection) 2. Host communication (Set up host communication protocol)
3.
4. Language to operation panel (Set up displayed language)
5.
6.
7. DRYPIX Station (Set up DRYPIX Station connection)
0. End
3. Default value 1. LUT (Set up default LUT)
(Set up default value) 2. LUT modification (Set up LUT content)
3. Interpolation (Set up default image quality processing type)
4. Format selection (Set up effective film format)
5. Pos/Neg (Set up output film positive/negative)
6. Maximum of copy count (Set up maximum film print count)
7. Default copy count (Set up default film print count)
8. Storing order (Set up default order of image storage)
9.
10. Trim density (Set up film margin density)
11. Trim width (Set up film trimming width)
12. Border (Set up film background gray level)
13. Trim (Set up film trimming area)
0. End
4. Action switch 1. Auto/Manual (Set up operation mode after startup)
(Set up software 2. Auto print (Set up auto print)
processing function) 3. Over write (Set up data overwrite)
4. Reset copy count (Set up copy count reset)
5. Storing beep type (Set up type of beep upon storing)
6. Image clear type (Set up image clear method)
7. Reprint function (Set up reprint)
8. Service option (Set up service option icon display)
9. Magnification (Set up image enlargement/reduction processing)
10. Storing timeout (Set up image acquisition timeout)
11. PRT not ready message
(Set up display of PRT not ready message)
12. ID display
(Set up display of ID information on remote panel basic screen)
0. End
5. Film parameter 1. Black border density (Set up background density)
(Set up film output) 2. Hospital name (Set up output character string)
3. Character location (Set up output character string format)
4. Frame interval (Set up frame interval)
5. Film base color (Set up film base color)
6. Normal/Mirror (Set up mirror image print output enable/disable)
7. ID information data
(Set up ID information film indication enable/disable)
8. Patient information data
0. End
6. Video parameter
(Create video parameters)
7.
8. Save/Load 1. Save (Save file)
(Save, load, initialize file) 2. Load (Load file)
0. End
0. End
2.Utility 1.
(Utility) 2.
3. Software version (View file information)
4. Software switch
(Setup to enable operation other than standard)
5.

0. End 0. End

(NOTE) The numeral shown in the figure above corresponds to the number
to be entered to execute each command.
FP8U0414.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-46
 MU-47

4.2.3 Installation (Installation)

[1] Initialization (Initialization)

■ Function
Sets the date and time; initializes the configuration and other files; clears the remaining
print queues, and so on.

■ List of Functions and Operating Procedures

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-1-1 Date (1) After checking date/time, enter date. The input format for the date is YY/MM/DD.
<Date:YY/MM/DD-HH:MM> YY: Lower two digits of the year
Sets up the date and time 0. End MM: Month (01~12)
common to the system. Input date =_ DD: Date (01~31)
When the date is left unchanged, just press
the Store key.

(2) Enter time. The input format for the time is HH:MM.
Input time =_ HH: Hour (00~23)
MM: Minute (00~59)
When the time is left unchanged, just press
the Store key.
1-1-2 CONFIG file Initialize.
1. Start
Initializes each setup value in 0. End
the configuration file. Select no. =_

1-1-3

1-1-4 Queue Clear.

1. Start
Clears the remaining print 0. End
queues. Select no. =_

1-1-5

1-1-6 Backup RAM Initialize.

1. Start
Initializes the backup RAM. 0. End
Select no. =_
TP8U0401.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-47
 MU-48

[2] Setting Up System Connection (Connection)

■ Function
Sets up input channel connection; sets up the protocols for communication with the
HOST equipments; sets up the language for the messages display on screen; sets up
DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) connection.

■ List of Functions and Operating Procedures

CAUTION
Never power OFF during file saving. Until the remote panel screen reverts back to its
original state, data write to the memory card continues. If the power is turned OFF
during data writing (saving), the memory card contents will be lost.

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-2-1 Input channel (1) Select input channel to be set up.
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_

Sets up the type of board (2) After checking connection setup, select When "7. all" is selected in step (1), the
connected to each input channel, item to be set up. default value is not displayed.
and the number of remote <Default value>
panels connected. 1. Board type
2. Operation panel option
:Single
3. The "3. ID information" displayed is not
4. No connection available for use for up to main unit software
0. End version A02.
Select no. =_
When either 1 or 2 is selected, proceed
to following steps.

(3) Take any of following steps.

❍ When "1. Board type" is selected:
Select board type.
<Default value>
1.
2. DPI
3.
4. HAV
5. DVI
6.
7.
0. End
Select no. =_
When 2.DPI is selected, take steps (4) to
(7).
Otherwise, setup is done.
❍ When "2. Operation panel option" is Select the number of operation units for
selected: each input channel.
Select number of remote panels
connected.
<Default value:Single>
1. Single
2. Double
0. End
Select no. =_
After selecting number of operation
panels connected, setup is done.
TP8U0402.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-48
 MU-49

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
(4) When board type “2. DPI” is selected,
enter maximum size of input image
(horizontal) in four digits.
<Default value>
Pixel:nnnn nnnn: Maximum size in the horizontal
Line:mmmm direction (pixels)
mmmm: Maximum size in the vertical
Input max. image size direction (lines)
Pixel (0:End/0001-4096)=_ Input range for horizontal size: 0001 ~ 4096

(5) Enter maximum size of input image Input range for vertical size: 0001 ~ 8190
(vertical) in four digits. (Though displayed as 8192, maximum input
Line (0:End/0001-8192)=_ is 8190.)

(6) Enter four digits of pixel aspect ratio nnnn: Pixel aspect ratio (width)
(Width). mmmm: Pixel aspect ratio (height)
Pixel aspect ratio Input range for aspect ratio (width):
(Width/Height):nnnn/mmmm 0001~9999

Width (0:End/0001-9999)=_

(7) Enter four digits of pixel aspect ratio Input range for aspect ratio (height):
(Height). 0001~9999
Height (0:End/0001-9999)=_
After input, setup is done.
TP8U0403.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-49
 MU-50

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks

1-2-2 Host Communication (1) Select input channel to be set up.

ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
Sets up the protocols for
communication with HOST (2) After checking setup, select item to be
connected to each input set up.
channel. <Default value>
(Effective for auto-filming 1. Protocol type:0000
connection.) 2. Speed:9600bps
3. Data bit:8
4. Stop bit:1
5. Parity:EVEN
0. End
Select no. =_

(3) Take any of following steps.

❍ When "1. Protocol type" is selected: Set the protocol type according to the data
Enter protocol type. for the relevant model in the auto-filming
<Default value:0000> parameter table set forth separately.

Input protocol type

(0:END) =_
❍ When "2. Speed" is selected: To use the HAV or DVI board, set the baud
Select baud rate. rate in accordance with the data on the
1. 1200bps relevant unit in the auto-filming parameters
2. 2400bps table set forth separately. To use other image
3. 4800bps I/F boards, no setting is necessary here,
4. 9600bps because the baud rate is set on those image
0. End I/F boards.
Select no. =_
❍ When "3. Data bit" is selected: Set the data bit length according to the data
Select data bit length. for the relevant model in the auto-filming
1. 5bit parameter table set forth separately.
2. 6bit
3. 7bit
4. 8bit
0. End
Select no. =_
❍ When "4. Stop bit" is selected: Set the stop bit length according to the data
Select stop bit length. for the relevant model in the auto-filming
1. Nothing parameter table set forth separately.
2. 1bit
3. 1.5bit
4. 2bit
0. End
Select no. =_
❍ When "5. Parity" is selected: Set the parity according to the data for the
Select parity. relevant model in the auto-filming parameter
1. EVEN table set forth separately.
2. ODD EVEN: Even parity
3. Nothing ODD: Odd parity
0. End
Select no. =_

1-2-3

1-2-4 Language to operation Select language. For the remote panel, language-specific
panel 1. Japanese software must be installed.
2. English
Sets up the language for 3. German
display on the remote panel. 4. French
(Sets up the language used for 5. Italian
messages sent from the 6. Dutch 6. Dutch: Not selectable
equipment to the remote panel.) 7. Spanish (cannot be used)
8. Swedish
0. End
Select no. =_

1-2-5

1-2-6
TP8U0404.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-50
 MU-50.1

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-2-7 DRYPIX Station (1)Select whether DRYPIX Station is This function is available for main unit
connected software version A03 or later.
Sets up DRYPIX Station (Image <Default value:Not-Exist> Default value: Not-Exist
Manager Function) connection 1.Exist Exist: DRYPIX Station is connected
2.Not-Exist Not-Exist: DRYPIX Station is not connected
0.End
Select no. =_

(2)When "1. Exist" is selected, select the Details on each setup item are shown below.
DRYPIX Station connection function
items to be set up.
1.Print on/off(default)
2. "2. Search Key (default)" is displayed only for
3.ID Information main unit software version A03.
4.Reserve print (Not displayed for main unit software version
5.Start Display A04 or later)
0.End "5. Start Display" is applicable for main unit
Select no. =_ software version A05 or later.

1-2-7- Print on/off(default) (1)Select whether to turn ON or OFF print at Default value: Print on
1-1 start up. Print on: The value set for "Default copy
Sets up the start up default <Default value:Print on> count" is displayed for number of copies at
display of the COPIES icon of 1.Print on start up.
the remote panel. 2.Print off Print off: "NO PRINT" is displayed for number
0.End of copies at start up.
Select no. =_

1-2-7- Search Key(default) (1)Select the search key to be displayed at This setting is applicable only for main unit
1-2 start up. software version A03.
Sets up the start up default <Default value:Patient ID> Default value: Patient ID
display of the search keys at the 1.Patient ID
ID ENTRY screen of the remote 2.Reception #
panel. 3.Accession No
0.End
Select no. =_

1-2-7- ID Information (1)Select detailed setup in ID Information

1-3 setup.
Sets up the study information 1.Display format selection
displays and various search 2.Routine Search
functions at the ID ENTRY 3.Emergency Search
screen of the remote panel. 4.Searching Result "4. Searching Result", "5. OCR function",
5.OCR function "6. Magnetic Card Type" are applicable for
6.Magnetic Card Type main unit software version A05 or later.
0.End However as "5. OCR function" is currently not
Select no. =_ available, do not change this setting.
When 1 to 6 is selected, proceed to steps
(2) to (7).

(2)When "1. Display format selection" is

selected:
Select the display format of study
information at the ID ENTRY screen of
the remote panel.
<Default value:Pattern1> Default value: Pattern 1
1.Pattern1 Patterns 1 to 3: Defined by IDFMTSTD.PRM
2.Pattern2 (standard setting)
3.Pattern3 Patterns 4 to 6: Defined by IDFMTUSR.PRM
4.Pattern4 (user setting)
5.Pattern5
6.Pattern6
0.End
Select no. =_
TP8U0429.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-50.1
 MU-50.2

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
(3)When "2. Routine Search" is selected:
Select whether or not to implement
routine search.
<Default value:Enable> Default value : Enable
1.Enable The "SEARCH" icon is not displayed when
2.Disable set to "2. Disable".
0.End
Select no. =_

❍When "1. Enable" is selected: The setting for selection of search key in
Select the search key to be executed routine search is applicable only for main unit
in routine search. software version A03.
<Default value:Modality> Modality: Search is carried out by modality
1.Modality information, etc.
0.End
Select no. =_

(4)When "3. Emergency Search" is selected: Emergency search conditions are defined by
Select whether or not to implement DRYPIX Station.
emergency search.
<Default value:Disable> Default value: Disable
1.Enable
2.Disable The "EMRGNCY" icon is not displayed when
0.End set to "2. Disable".
Select no. =_

(5)When "4. Searching Result" is selected: This setting is applicable for main unit
Enter the maximum number of search software version A05 or later.
results to be displayed. Default value: 50
<Default value:50> Input range: 05~50
Searching Result
(0:End/05-50) =_

(6)As "5. OCR function" is currently not

available, do not change this setting.

(7)When "6. Magnetic Card Type" is This setting is applicable for main unit
selected: software version A05 or later.
Select whether or not to use the
expansion function of the
hospital-specific card format.
<Default value:Normal>
1.Normal Default value: Normal
2.Expansion Normal: Expansion function is not used
0.End (CDFORM.DAT is used)
Select no. =_ Expansion: Expansion function is used
(CDFORM2.DAT is used)

1-2-7- Reserve print (1)Select whether to enable or disable the Default value: Disable
1-4 reserve print function.
Sets up whether or not to enable <Default value:Disable>
reservation of prints for the 1.Enable When set to "1. Enable", the disabled
printing-disabled printer(s). 2.Disable printer(s) can be selected, and print
0.End reservation can be performed for that printer.
Select no. =_ (Printing is reserved by DRYPIX Station, and
printing starts at the point the printer is able to
print.)
TP8U0430.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-50.2
 MU-50.3

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks

1-2-7- Start Display (1)Select the default display screen at start This setting is applicable for main unit
1-5 up. software version A05 or later.
Sets up the default display <Default value: Default value: ID ENTRY
screen of the remote panel at the ID ENTRY> Basic: Basic screen at start up, transitions to
start up of the equipment. 1.Basic the basic screen without implementing routine
2.ID ENTRY search when the study is completed.
3.Routine Search List ID ENTRY: ID ENTRY screen at start up,
0.End transitions to the ID ENTRY screen without
Select no. =_ implementing routine search when the study
is completed.
Routine Search List: Implements routine
search from the ID ENTRY screen at start up
and displays results, automatically
implements routine search when the study is
completed and displays results in the same
way.

When set to "3. Routine Search List", routine

search is implemented regardless of the set
up of "2. Routine Search" of "1-2-7-1-3 ID
Information".
TP8U0431.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-50.3
 MU-50.4

BLANK PAGE

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-50.4
 MU-51

[3] Setting Up Default Value (Default value)

■ Function
Sets up default values such as LUT, image quality processing type, recording format,
number of outputs, storing order, border gray lever for output image, etc.

■ List of Functions and Operating Procedures

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-3-1 LUT (1) After checking the setup, select input LUT (lookup table): Tone correction table
channel to be set up.
Sets up the default LUT <Default value>
number for each input ch1:LUT1
channel. :
(The LUT number set is :
displayed on the screen in the ch6:LUT1
Routine Processing Mode.) ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_

(2) Select LUT number.

1. LUT1
2. LUT2
3. LUT3
4. LUT4
5. LUT5
6. LUT6
7. LUT7
8. LUT8
0. End
Select no. =_
1-3-2
1-3-3 Interpolation (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets up the default image <Default value>
quality processing type in ch1:Medium
enlargement/reduction :
processing for each input :
channel. ch6:Medium
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Select default image quality type.
1.Sharp
2.Smooth
3.Medium
0.End
Select no.=_
TP8U0405.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-51
 MU-52

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-3-4 Format selection (1) Select input channel to be set up.
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
Sets up the recording formats
to be effective for each input (2) After checking effective format, select
channel. "Addition" or "Change".
<Default value>
HP01, HP06, HP12
1. Addition Addition: Add to the end of the selected
2. Change format codes.
0. End Change: Change (Update) all the selected
Select no.=_ codes.

(3) Enter format type (in code). Format number: Input code ➭ See the
For each code entry, press Store key. detailed supplementary explanation.
At end, enter 0. For film size 3543:
(A maximum of 16 formats can be Portrait
entered.) HP01:11 HP02:12 HP03:17 HP04:13
(The entry of duplicated code or the HP06:14 HP08:18 HP09:15 HP12:16
codes not specified is rejected.) HP15:21 HP16:19 HP20:22 HP24:23
(The format code that is not supported Portrait for Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS
by the film size of the printer connected HPV1:E0 HPV2:E1 HPV4:E2 HPV6:E3
cannot be entered.) HPV9:E4 HPVC:E5
Input format selection Portrait for PHILIPS Easy Vision
(0:End)=_ HPVE:DB (single image format)
Portrait mix
HPM1:24 HPM2:25 HPM3:26 HPM4:31
HPM5:32 HPM6:33 HPM7:34
Landscape
HL01:41 HL02:42 HL03:53 HL04:43
HL06:44 HL08:54 HL09:45 HL12:46
HL15:55 HL16:51 HL20:56 HL24:57
Landscape for Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS
HLV1:E6 HLV2:E7 HLV4:E8 HLV6:E9
HLV9:EA HLVC:EB
Landscape for PHILIPS Easy Vision
HLVE:DC (single image format)

For film size 3535:

Portrait
DP01:61 DP02:62 DP03:67 DP04:63
DP06:64 DP08:68 DP09:65 DP12:66
DP15:69 DP16:71 DP20:72 DP24:6A
Portrait for Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS
DPV1:EC DPV2:ED DPV4:EE DPV6:EF
DPV9:F0 DPVC:F1
Portrait for PHILIPS Easy Vision
DPVE:DD (single image format)
Portrait mix
DPM1:73 DPM2:74 DPM3:75 DPM4:76
DPM5:77

For film size 2636

Portrait
BP01:82 BP02:83 BP03:84 BP04:85
BP06:86 BP08:87 BP09:88 BP12:89
BP15:8A BP16:8B
Portrait for Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS
BPV1:F2 BPV2:F3 BPV4:F4 BPV6:F5
BPV9:F6 BPVC:F7
Portrait for PHILIPS Easy Vision
HPVE:DB (single image format)
Portrait mix
BPM1:8C
Landscape
BL01:91 BL02:92 BL03:97 BL04:93
BL06:94 BL08:98 BL09:95 BL12:96
BL15:99 BL16:A1
Landscape for Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS
BLV1:F8 BLV2:F9 BLV4:FA BLV6:FB
BLV9:FC BLVC:FD
Landscape for PHILIPS Easy Vision
BLVE:DF (single image format)
Landscape mix
BLM1:A2 BLM2:A3 BLM3:A4 BLM4:A5
TP8U0406.EPS

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-52
 MU-53

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
For film size 2025
Portrait
MP01:B0 MP02:B1 MP03:B2 MP04:B3
MP06:B4 MP08:B5 MP09:B6 MP12:B7
MP15:B8 MP16:B9
Portrait for Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS
MPV1:BB MPV2:BC MPV4:BD MPV6:BE
MPV9:BF MPVC:C0
Portrait for PHILIPS Easy Vision
MPVE:D9 (single image format)
Portrait mix
MPM1:BA
Landscape
ML01:C1 ML02:C2 ML03:C3 ML04:C4
ML06:C5 ML08:C6 ML09:C7 ML12:C8
ML15:C9 ML16:CA
Landscape for Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS
MLV1:D0 MLV2:D1 MLV4:D2 MLV6:D3
MLV9:D4 MLVC:D5
Landscape for PHILIPS Easy Vision
MLVE:DA (single image format)
Landscape mix
MLM1:CB MLM2:CD MLM3:CE MLM4:CF
When using the Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS
format, make sure that the output destination
corresponds with same format.

(4) Select whether to add/change an The format entered at the beginning of the
effective format or not. multiple formats is displayed as the default
Format selection change on the screen in the Routine Processing
1. Yes Mode.
2. No
Select no.=_

1-3-5 Pos/Neg (1) After checking setup, select input

channel to be set up.
Sets up the positive/negative <Default value>
as default for the output film of ch1:Pos
each input channel. :
:
ch6:Pos
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Select either positive or negative.
1. Pos
2. Neg
0. End
Select no.=_

1-3-6 Maximum of copy count (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets up the maximum number <Default value>
of output films for each input ch1:05
channel. :
(This setup is to prevent false :
output due to copy count ch6:05
mistake.) ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Enter maximum copy count.
Input maximum copy count Input range: 01~99
(0:End/01-99)=_
1-3-7 Default copy count (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets up the default copy count <Default value>
for the output film of each input ch1:01
channel. :
(The copy count set is :
displayed on the screen in the ch6:01
Routine Processing Mode.) ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Enter default copy count. Input range: 01~99
Input default copy count Any value greater than the setup value for "1-3
(0:End/01-99)=_ -6 Maximum of copy count" cannot be entered.
TP8U0407.EPS

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-53
 MU-54

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks

1-3-8 Storing order (1) Select input channel to be set up ➮ See the detailed supplementary explanation.
<Default value> "7: all" can be selected only when the same
Sets up the default storing order ch1:Type1 format type is selected in "Format selection" for
type and storing order of storing : all the input channels.
order type 2 upon startup of each : The storing order for the channel whose
input channel. ch6:Type1 bootup mode is in the auto-filming connection
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
mode cannot be changed.
When either 1 through 6 or 7 is selected,
take steps (2) to (5).

(2) Select default storing order type upon Type 1: Fixed storing order
startup. (Horizontal storing order from upper
<Default value:Type1> left to lower right)
1. Type1(standard) Type 2: User-specific storing order
2. Type2(customized) (Any storing order)
0. End The default value for Type 2 storing
Select no.=_
order is the same as Type 1.
(3) From effective formats, select a desired
format for which storing order is to be
changed.
1. HP01 2. HP06 3. HP12
4.......

0. End
Select format no.=_
(4) After checking default storing order for
format selected, set storing order
changed.
(Enter storing order corresponding to
image position, in order of image
position numbers.)
Press Store key for each entry of Enter the storing order in accordance with
storing order. the number of frames.
<Default value>
01 02 03 .......

New order. (0:End)=_ 0. End: Clear the value entered.

(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4), and check
contents changed.
1-3-9
1-3-10
1-3-11
1-3-12 Border (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets up the border gray level <Default value>
for the output film image of ch1:Black
each input channel. :
:
ch6:Black
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Select border color.
1. Black
2. Clear
0. End
Input no.=_
1-3-13 Trim (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets up to enable or disable of <Default value>
trimming area of film image of ch1: Enable
each input channel. :
:
ch6: Enable
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_

(1) Select to enabel or disable trimming

area.
1.Enable
2.Disable
0.End
Select no.=_
TP8U0408.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-54
 MU-55

[4] Setting Up Software Processing Functions (Action switch)

■ Function
Sets up various functions such as boot-up mode, auto print, data overwrite, and reset
copy count.

■ List of Functions and Operating Procedures

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks

1-4-1 Auto/Manual (1) After checking setup, select input

channel to be set up.
Sets up the operating mode <Default value>
after boot-up for each input ch1:Manual
channel. :
(Sets either auto-filming :
connection or manual ch6:Manual
connection.) ch(0:End/1-6:each/7: all)=_

(2) Select boot-up mode.

1. Auto Auto: Auto-filming connection
2. Manual Manual: Manual connection
0. End
Select no.=_

(3) Select whether to enable or disable the When “1. Enable” is selected, the error
function to clear the error message message is cleared automatically based on
that prompts for confirmation of auto- the timer value set in step (4).
filming. This function is valid only for auto-filming.
<Default value:Disable>
1. Enable
2. Disable
0. End
Select no.=_

(4) When “1. Enable” is selected in step Default value: All spaces (indicates 000)
(3), enter timer value. Input range: 000~999sec
<Default value: (sec)> If 000 is entered, this function is disabled
even when “1. Enable” is selected in step
(0:End/000-999) = _ (3).
That is the same as selecting “2. Disable.”
1-4-2 Auto print (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets to determine whether auto <Default value>
print is enabled or disabled ch1:Enable
after all the images in the :
format (frame data) for each :
input channel are stored. ch6:Enable
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7: all)=_

(2) Select whether auto print is enabled or

disabled.
1. Enable
2. Disable
0. End
Select no.=_

1-4-3 Over write (1) After checking setup, select input

channel to be set up.
Sets to determine whether a <Default value>
write over the stored images is ch1:Enable
enabled or disabled for each :
input channel. :
ch6:Enable
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7: all)=_

(2) Select whether overwrite is enabled or

disabled.
1. Enable
2. Disable
0. End
Select no.=_
TP8U0419.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-55
 MU-56

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-4-4 Reset copy count (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets to determine whether the <Default value>
copy count is to be reset to the ch1:Reset count
default value or not, after the :
copy count has been changed :
for each input channel. ch6:Reset count
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Select whether to continue changed 1. Continue count: Continue the changed
copy count or to reset copy count to copy count.
default. 2. Reset count: Reset the copy count to the
1. Continue count default.
2. Reset count
0. End
Select no.=_

1-4-5 Storing beep type (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets the beep generation <Default value>
timing during storing for each ch1:KEY+STR
input channel. :
No beep can also be set. :
ch6:KEY+STR
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Select beep generation timing. KEY: When the Store key is pressed.
1. KEY IMG: When the image data is acquired.
2. IMG STR: When the image data is transferred.
3. STR
4. KEY + IMG When auto-filming is available, a beep
5. KEY + STR sounds only on a STR timing.
6. IMG + STR
7. KEY + IMG + STR
8. Nothing
0. End
KEY = Key in timing
IMG = Getting image done
STR = Transfer done
Select no.=_

1-4-6 Image clear type (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets up image clearing at the <Default value>
end of print for each input ch1:After print
channel. :
(Effective for auto-filming :
connection) ch6:After print
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Select whether to clear by command or By command: Clear by command from HOST.
after print. After print: Clear automatically after print.
1. By command
2. After print For the 3M (M952) protocol, select "1. By
0. End command".
Select no.=_ Otherwise, select "2. After print".
1-4-7 Reprint function After checking setup, select whether to When the reprint function is enabled, the
enable or disable reprint function. image on the memory cannot be erased.
Sets to determine whether the <Default value:Enable> Thus, the storing capacity is reduced
reprint function is enabled or 1. Enable accordingly until the memory gets full.
disabled. 2. Disable
0. End
Select no.=_

1-4-8 Service option (1) After checking setup, select input Only when the service option is used, set "1.
channel to be set up. Enable".
Sets to determine whether the <Default value> Be sure to revert back to "2. Disable" after
service option icon is enabled ch1:Enable the service option is used.
or disabled on the screen in the :
Routine Processing Mode. :
ch6:Enable
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
(2) Select whether to enable or disable
service option icon display.
1. Enable
2. Disable
0. End
Select no.=_
TP8U0420.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-56
 MU-57

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks

1-4-9 Magnification (1) After checking setup, select input

channel to be set up.
Sets to specify to the printer <Default value>
whether to perform image ch1:Enable
:
enlargement/reduction :
processing (the enlargement/ ch6:Enable
reduction process itself is ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
performed at the printer).
(2) Select whether to perform enlargement/ Enable: Enlargement/reduction processing is
reduction processing. performed.
1. Enable Disable: Enlargement/reduction processing is
2. Disable
0. End not performed.
Select no.=_ Select Disable when nonmagnified output is
requested or when the format for PHILIPS
Easy Vision has been selected at Format
selection.
1-4-10 Storing timeout (1) After checking setup, select input The image acquisition timeout value is set,
channel to be set up. by default, at 15 seconds for acquisition and
Sets the image acquisition ch1(Acquisition, Transfer) 15 seconds for transfer with analog input, and
timeout value for each input M:000,000 A:000,000 at 15 seconds for acquisition and 75 seconds
channel : for transfer with digital input. If any problem
: occurs such as timeout error with the default
ch6(Acquisition, Transfer) setup values, change the settings.
M:000,000 A:000,000
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_
When either 1 through 6 or 7 is selected, M: Timeout value for manual connection
take steps (2) to (5). A: Timeout value for auto-filming connection
(2) Enter image acquisition timeout value for
manual connection.
Input timeout second Input range: 000-180 sec
Acquisition timeout(MANUAL) When 000 is entered, the default values are
(0:End/000-180)=_ valid.
For manual connection, it is desirable to set
the value less than 75 seconds.

(3) Enter image transfer timeout value for

manual connection.
Transfer timeout(MANUAL) Input range: 000-180 sec
(0:End/000-180)=_ When 000 is entered, the default values are
valid.
For manual connection, it is desirable to set
the value less than 75 seconds.

(4) Enter image acquisition timeout value for

auto-filming connection.
Acquisition timeout(AUTO) Input range: 000-600 sec
(0:End/000-600)=_ When 000 is entered, the default values are
valid.
(5) Enter image transfer timeout value for
auto-filming connection.
Transfer timeout(AUTO) Input range: 000-600 sec
(0:End/000-600)=_ When 000 is entered, the default values are
valid.
After input, setup is done.
TP8U0409.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-57
 MU-58

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-4-11 PRT not ready message (1) After checking setup, select input If, immediately after booting up the system,
channel to be set up. entry to print queue is effected before printer
Sets to determine whether printer <Default value> is booted, the display of "PRT not ready"
not ready message is ch1:Display message may cause some problem during
displayed. : auto-filming or the like. In such a case, "No
: display" should be selected.
ch6:Display
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_

(2) Determine whether message is

displayed or not.
1. Display
2. No display
0. End
Select no.=_

1-4-12 For up to main unit software version A04,

"1-4-12 ID display" is displayed but is not
available.
(Not displayed for A05 or later)
TP8U0410.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-58
 MU-59

[5] Setting Up Film Output (Film parameter)

■ Function
Sets up the black border density and film base color on output film, etc.

■ List of Functions and Operating Procedures

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-5-1 Black border density (1) After checking setup, select input
channel to be set up.
Sets up the density of the <Default value>
output film border for each ch1:15
input channel. :
:
ch6:15
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_

(2) Enter border density. Settable in 16 steps from minimum (00) to

Input black border density maximum (15) density.
(0:End/00-15)=_

1-5-2

1-5-3
1-5-4
1-5-5 Film base color (1) Select input channel to be set up. Set the base color according to the size of
ch(0:End/1-6:each/7:all)=_ the film output for each input channel.
Sets up the base color of output Base colors not available in the printer used
film for each input channel. (2)Select the film size. cannot be set.
<Default value>
1.3543 After setting, displayed as Blue or Clear.
2.3535
3.2636 Do not select “2. 3535”.
4.2025
0.End
Select no.=_

(3)Select the base color.

1.Blue
2.Clear
0.End
Select no.=_

1-5-6
1-5-7 For up to main unit software version A04,
"1-5-7 ID information data" is displayed but is
not available.
(Not displayed for A05 or later)
1-5-8 For up to main unit software version A04,
"1-5-8 Patient information data" is displayed
but is not available.
(Not displayed for A05 or later)
TP8U0411.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-59
 MU-60

BLANK PAGE

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-60
 MU-61

BLANK PAGE

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-61
 MU-62

[6] Creating Video Parameters (Video parameter)

<NOTE>
Video parameter is effective only for the channel that has been set to analog input.

■ Function
Set up various parameters for the input signal in accordance with the specification of
the analog video signal.
“5.2.4 Detailed Supplementary Explanation for Maintenance Mode”

■ Video Parameter Default Values

1. Hor. line: 64.000
2. Hor. front porch: 1.350
3. Hor. blanking: 11.852
4. Pixel clock rate: 13.500
5. Scanning type: Interlace
6. Total line: 625
7. Ver. front porch: 2.5
8. Ver. blanking: 25.5
9. Video signal type: 3
10. Pixel aspect ratio (Width/Height): 1/1

■ List of Functions and Operating Procedures

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks

1-6- Hor. line Enter horizontal sync interval. Unit: µs

ch No. 0. End Can be entered to the third decimal place.
-1 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal line (µs)
(0.001-999.999)=_

1-6- Hor. front porch Enter horizontal front porch time. Unit: µs
ch No. 0. End Can be entered to the third decimal place.
-2 Horizontal front porch time Horizontal front porch (µs)
(0.001-999.999)=_

1-6- Hor. blanking Enter horizontal blanking time. Unit: µs

ch No. 0. End Can be entered to the third decimal place.
-3 Horizontal blanking time Horizontal blanking (µs)
(0.001-999.999)=_

1-6- Pixel clock rate Enter pixel clock frequency. Unit: MHz
ch No. 0. End Can be entered to the third decimal place.
-4 Pixel clock frequency Pixel clock rate (MHz)
(0.001-999.999)=_

1-6- Scanning type Select image scanning type.

ch No. 1. Non-interlace
-5 Image scanning type 2. Interlace
0. End
Scanning type=_

1-6- Total line Enter total number of lines. Be sure to type the total line in four digits.
ch No. 0. End Ex. Input “0640” when 640 lines.
-6 Total number of lines Total lines
(0001-9999)=_
TP8U0414.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-62
 MU-63

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-6- Ver. front porch Enter No. of vertical front porch lines. Can be entered to the first decimal place.
ch No. 0. End
-7 No. of vertical front porch lines Vertical front porch
(0.1-999.9)=_

1-6- Ver. blanking Enter No. of vertical blanking lines. Can be entered to the first decimal place.
ch No. 0. End
-8 No. of vertical blanking lines Vertical blanking
(0.1-999.9)=_

1-6- Video signal type Select video signal type.

ch No. 1.Component & Composite-sync
-9 Video signal type 2.Component & HD & VD
3.Composite
0.End
Video signal type=_

1-6- Pixel aspect ratio (1) Enter pixel width in four digits. Be sure to enter the ratio in four digits.
ch No. (Width/Height) 0. End
-10 Width (0001-9999)=_
Pixel aspect ratio (2) Enter pixel height in four digits.
Height (0001-9999)=_
TP8U0415.EPS

■ Operation after Each Parameter Setup

(1) Upon completing the input of each setup value, a message asking you if you want
to save the setup value into the video parameter file, as follows.
VIDEO files saving
1. Yes
2. No
Select no. =_
(2) To save the setup value, select “1. Yes”.
[1] → [Store]
→ The message appears.
Press the [Store] key.
→ The data is written into the video parameter file.

CAUTION
Never power OFF during file saving. If the power is turned OFF during saving, the
memory card contents will be lost.

If you don’t want to save the setup value, select “2. No”.
[2] → [Store]

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-63
 MU-64

[7]

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-64
 MU-65

[8] Saving, Loading, and Initializing File (Save/Load)

■ Function
Saves and loads the configuration file, video parameter file, and other files to and from
the floppy disk.

■ List of Functions and Operating Procedures

CAUTION
Never power OFF during file saving and loading. If the power is turned OFF during
saving and loading, the memory card contents will be lost.

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks

1-8-1 Save (1) Select file to be saved. User-specific information file

1. CONFIG 11. CONFIG.PRM
Saves the configuration file, 2. CONFIG2 99.ALL CONFIG2.PRM
video parameter file, and other 3. VIDEOIN 0. End VIDEOIN.PRM
files into the FD. 4. VIDEOAJ VIDEOAJ.PRM
5. CHAUSER CHAUSER.PRM
6. FMTENTRY.PRM
7. FMTENTRY
8. When "99. ALL" is selected, all the files are
9. saved.
10. However, it should not be selected when
Select no.=_ Save/Load is to be performed between
different software versions, because files
defined in "ALL" may be different.

(2) After checking name of file selected at file name: File selected
step (1), check that FD has been set up,
and then execute save .
<file name>
Please set Backup FD.
Are you sure?
1. Start
0. End
Select no.=_
(3) After checking message, press Store Display upon occurrence of FD access error.
key. Caution!!
It takes a few minute (FD access error)
for writing FD. 0. End
Select no. =_
Press Store key to start. Enter 0.
TP8U0416.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-65
 MU-66

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks
1-8-2 Load (1) Select file to be loaded. User-specific information file
1. CONFIG 11. CONFIG.PRM
Loads the configuration file, 2. CONFIG2 99.ALL CONFIG2.PRM
video parameter file, and other 3. VIDEOIN 0. End VIDEOIN.PRM
files from the FD. 4. VIDEOAJ VIDEOAJ.PRM
5. CHAUSER CHAUSER.PRM
6. FMTENTRY.PRM
7. FMTENTRY
8. When "99. ALL" is selected, all the files are
9. saved.
10. However, it should not be selected when
Select no.=_ Save/Load is to be performed between
different software versions, because files
defined in "ALL" may be different.
When quitting the Maintenance Mode after
loading the CONFIG file, select "2. No" at
the CONFIG file saving prompt.
To set the video parameter after loading the
video-related file, first quit the Maintenance
Mode and then reboot before setting the
video parameter.
(2) After checking name of file selected at file name:File selected
step (1), check that FD has been set up,
and then execute load .
<file name>
Please set Original FD.
Are you sure?
1. Start
0. End
Select no.=_

(3) After checking message, press Store Display upon occurrence of FD access error.
key. Caution!!
It takes a few minute (FD access error)
for writing memory card. 0. End
Select no. =_
Press Store key to start. Enter 0.
TP8U0417.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-66
 MU-67

4.2.4 Utility (Utility)

■ Function
Sets up for displaying the capacity of various files, date of update and enabling non-
standard operation, etc.

■ List of Functions and Operating Procedures

Input No. Command Name and Function Procedures and Screen Display Remarks

2-1
2-2
2-3 Software version Display file information. File information for five files is displayed on
1. PSYSTEM.PRM 453/2048 screen.
Displays the size and 0 00-09-29 15:04
modification date of various 2. CH_DEFLT.PRM 460/2048 Screen scroll
files. 2048 02-01-09 20:27 Previous screen: Enter 2.
3. FILMCONF.TXT 332/1024 Next screen: Enter 1.
4096 00-08-17 19:34
4. MS_ADJPH.PRM 383/1024
5120 00-12-11 13:33
5. MS_GOKI.DAT 48/1024
6144 00-10-25 14:14
(0:End/1:Next/2:Before)=_
2-4 Software switch (1) Enter No. of software switch to be set ➭ See the detailed supplementary
up. explanation.
Setup to enable operation other Input word (0:End/01-50) =_
than standard.
(2) Enter four digits of software switch
selected.
<Default value:01- >
Input switch
(0:End/0000-FFFF) =_

2-5
TP8U0418.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-67
 MU-68

4.2.5 Detailed Supplementary Explanation for Maintenance Mode

■ Setting Recording Screen Format (Default value – 4. Format selection)
The output image pattern for each format is illustrated below.
<NOTES>
• HPV✱, HLV✱, DPV✱, BPV✱, BLV✱, MPV✱, and MLV✱, the formats for Hitachi
DR2000H/HI-PACS, are similar to HP✱✱, HL✱✱, DP✱✱, BP✱✱, BL✱✱, MP✱✱, and
ML✱✱, respectively: On their output image, the ID area is added at the bottom. “C”
for HPVC, HLVC, DPVC, BPVC, BLVC, MPVC, and MLVC denotes “12”.
• HPVE, HLVE, DPVE, BPVE, BLVE, MPVE and MLVE are included in the format for
PHILIPS Easy Vision. Because it is a single-image format for recording an image
over the entire recordable area of each film size, the hospital name, date and so on
cannot be displayed.

For film size 3543

P. Portrait

HP01 HP02 HP03 HP04 HP06

HP08 HP09 HP12 HP15 HP16

HP20 HP24

PM. Portrait mix

HPM1 HPM2 HPM3 HPM4 HPM5

(NOTE)
HPM2 is a mix of one-half HP02 and one-half HP12.
HPM6 HPM7 HPM3 is a mix of one-half HP02 two-fifths HP15.

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-68
 MU-69

L. Landscape

HL01 HL02 HL03 HL04 HL06

HL08 HL09 HL12 HL15 HL16

HL20 HL24

For film size 2636

P. Portrait

BP01 BP02 BP03 BP04 BP06

BP08 BP09 BP12 BP15 BP16

L. Landscape

BL01 BL02 BL03 BL04 BL06

BL08 BL09 BL12 BL15 BL16

LM. Landscape mix PM. Portrait mix

BLM1 BLM2 BLM3 BLM4

BPM1

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-69
 MU-70

For film size 2636/ (2025)

P. Portrait

BP01/ (MP01) BP02/ (MP02) BP03/ (MP03) BP04/ (MP04) BP06/ (MP06)

BP08/ (MP08) BP09/ (MP09) BP12/ (MP12) BP15/ (MP15) BP16/ (MP16)

L. Landscape

BL01/ (ML01) BL02/ (ML02) BL03/ (ML03) BL04/ (ML04) BL06/ (ML06)

BL08/ (ML08) BL09/ (ML09) BL12/ (ML12) BL15/ (ML15) BL16/ (ML16)

LM. Landscape mix PM. Portrait mix

BLM1/ (MLM1) BLM2/ (MLM2) BLM3/ (MLM3) BLM4/ (MLM4)

BPM1/ (MPM1)

FP8U0408.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-70
 MU-71

■ Setting Storing Order (Default value – 8. Storing order)

The image position number is fixed for each recording screen format. The storing order
number means the image data storing order for multiple images on a single film.
The storing order is composed of two types.
Type 1 indicates that the image position number is identical to the storing order
number, and the storing order cannot be changed.
Type 2 indicates that the storing order number is independent of the image position
number, and the storing order can be set flexibly.
Type 2 is used to designate the storing order that conforms to the specification of the
customer for each recording screen format.

For Type 1
Image position number Storing order number

1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 Storing is performed
sequentially in the
horizontal direction of film.
7 8 9 7 8 9

10 11 12 10 11 12

The image position number is identical to the storing order number.

The storing order cannot be changed.
For Type 2
Image position number Storing order number

The storing order is

1 2 3 1 5 9
set in the vertical
direction of film.
4 5 6 2 6 10

7 8 9 3 7 11

10 11 12 4 8 12

The image position number may be different from the storing order number.
The storing order can be changed.

How to set up in the above example

New order (0: End) = 01 05 09 02 06 10 03 07 11 04 08 12 (Storing order)
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 (Image position)
Enter the storing order corresponding to the image position, in the order of image
position numbers.

<NOTE>
The default storing order for Type 2 is the same as Type 1, and it is necessary to set the
storing order only when user-specific storing order is required.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-71
 MU-72

BLANK PAGE

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-72
 MU-73

■ Creating Video Parameter (Video parameter)

The specification for each video parameter of the analog video signal is shown in the
figure below.

● Specifications of Video Parameters in Horizontal Direction

Define active(Image output)

Back Front
Spec Definition

porch porch

SYNC

Blanking

Frequency
Frequency expression

Pixel Clock Rate ( . MHz)

Horizontal Freq. ( . MHz)

Reciprocal

Timing
Horizontal Line ( . µs)
Timing expression

Horizontal Sync Tip ( . µs) Horizontal Front Porch ( . µs)

Horizontal Back Porch ( . µs)

Horizontal Blanking ( . µs)

Pixels
Pixels expression

Ha Hb Hc

H-back H-active H-front

Expression for Operation panel (for fine adjustment)

Expression for Calculation

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-73
 MU-74

● Specifications of Video Parameters in Vertical Direction (non-interlace)

Define active (image output)

Back Front
porch porch
Spec Difinition

SYNC

Blanking

Frequency
expression
Frequency

Horizontal Freq. ( . KHz)

Field Rate ( . Hz)

Reciprocal

Timing Field ( . µs)

=Frame ( . µs)

µs) µs)
Timing expression

Vertical Sync Tip ( . Vertical Front Porch ( .

Vertical Back Porch ( . µs)

Vertical Blanking ( . µs)

lines Total lines ( ) lines

Vertical Sync Tip ( ) lines Vertical Front Porch

( ) lines

Vertical Back Porch ( ) lines

Pixels expression

Vertical Blanking ( ) lines

Va Vb Vc

V-back V-active V-front

Expression for Operation panel

(for fine adjustment)

Expression for Calculation

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-74
 MU-75

● Specifications of Video Parameter in Vertical Direction (interlace)

Define active (image output) active (image output)

Back Front Back Front

porch porch porch porch
Spec Definition

SYNC SYNC

Blanking

Frequency

Horizontal Freq. ( . KHz)

expression
Frequency

Field Rate ( . Hz)

Reciprocal

Timing Field ( . µs)

Frame ( . µs)
Timing expression

Vertical Sync Tip ( . µs) Vertical Front Porch ( . µs)

Vertical Back Porch ( . µs)

Vertical Blanking ( . µs)

lines Total lines ( ) lines

Vertical Sync Tip ( ) lines Vertical Front Porch ( ) lines

Vertical Back Porch ( ) lines

Pixels expression

Vertical Blanking ( ) lines

Va Vb Vc

V-back V-active V-front

Expression for Operation panel

(for fine adjustment)

Expression for Calculation

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-75
 MU-76

■ Description of Software Switch (Utility – 4. Software switch)

CAUTION
Before using the software switch, contact the service headquarters and follow the
instructions for its setting.
Because the software switch is set to enable non-standard operations, any wrong
setting may cause improper operation.

● Setup of Masking Function for Hardware Error of DSR (Device Status Register)
of Analog Board [SW1] [SW2]
• Purpose
When image acquisition failure has occurred due to error (one of the causes for error
code “ln12”) caused by PLL lock misalignment during image input on the analog board,
this setup may permit image acquisition by ignoring the PLL lock misalignment error.

CAUTION
Because PLL lock misalignment error is ignored during the entire image acquisition
period, an abnormal or improper image may be outputted. Accordingly, exercise due
care to use this setup.

• How to set up
(1) Select address 01 of the software switch, and set the input channel to enable the
DSR masking function.

bit15 bit0
ch6 ch5 ch4 ch3 ch2 ch1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Setup of designated channel

1: Enable
0: Disable

Setup of DSR masking function

1: Enable
0: Disable

Enter the above binary numeral in hexadecimal notation. For example, to enable
the DSR masking function for input channels 1 and 3, enter “0105”.

(2) Select address 02 of the software switch, and enter the DSR mask value “FF7F”
to ignore the PLL lock misalignment error.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-76
 MU-77

● Setup for Manually Switching Acquisition Frequency (15 kHz and 30 kHz) of
Horizontal Sync Signal [SW4]
• Purpose
When image acquisition failure has occurred due to error caused by improper
horizontal sync signal acquisition during image input on the analog board, this setup
may allow the horizontal sync signal to be acquired normally, thus permitting image
acquisition.

CAUTION
Because the acquisition frequency switching for the horizontal sync signal is
automatically set to an optimum value by video parameter input, the setup described in
this section should not be used normally.

• How to set up
Select address 04 of the software switch, and set the input channel on which the
acquisition frequency switching for the horizontal sync signal is enabled, and the
acquisition frequency (15 kHz or 30 kHz).

bit15 bit0
ch6 ch5 ch4 ch3 ch2 ch1
0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Acquisition frequency switching

1: 15 kHz
0: 30 kHz

Setup of designated channel

1: Enable
0. Disable

Manual switching of acquisition frequency

1: Enable
0. Disable
FP8U0402.EPS

Enter the above binary numeral in hexadecimal notation. For example, to manually
switch the input channel 2 to 30 kHz and the input channel 3 to 15 kHz, enter “1038”.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-77
 MU-78

● Setup to Clear by A Host Command An Error Message That Requires A

Confirmation Displayed on The Remote Panel During Auto-filming [SW12]
• Purpose
When the 3M (M952) protocol (Protocol type 06xx) is used to connect this equipment
and host in auto-filming mode, communication for host control is halted, and auto-
filming is also stopped if an error message that requires a confirmation is issued.
Normally, in order to resume auto-filming, it is necessary that the user perform a
confirmation action on the remote panel.
If this setup is made, however, the error message is automatically cleared by issuing a
specific command from the host, so that auto-filming can be resumed.
Host commands available for clearing the error message are as follows:

ALI (Allocate Laser Imager) Exposure start command

RLI (Release Laser Imager) Exposure end command
RES (Reset Laser Imager) Imager reset command
CLA (Clear Alarm) Imager alarm clear command

<NOTE>
• This setup should be used only in cases where a confirmation action performed by
the user on the remote panel might pose any operational problem.
• The clear function to clear an error message that requires a confirmation in “Action
switch - Auto/Manual” mode is executed under timer control on this equipment side;
thus, it can be used in conjunction with this setup.

• How to set up
Select address 12 of the software switch , and set the input channel where the clear
function to clear by a host command an error message that require a confirmation is
used.

bit15 bit0
ch6 ch5 ch4 ch3 ch2 ch1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Designation of host command-

based clear function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Enter the above binary number in hexadecimal notation. For example, to enable the
host command-based clear function on input channel 2, enter “0002”.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-78
 MU-79

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-79
 MU-80

● Setup to Enable Landscape Format Output and Output with Film Size and Film
Orientation Changed in The Middle of Host Control During Auto-filming
[SW15]
• Purpose
When the 3M (M952) protocol (Protocol type 06xx) is used to connect this equipment
and host in auto-filming mode, the format-related information sent from the host only
contains the designated number of horizontal and vertical frames for the portrait format.
Thus, information regarding the film size and film orientation (portrait/landscape) is not
contained. Consequently, there are such restrictions that a format with mixed film sizes
or a format with mixed film orientations cannot be registered on this equipment side.
Furthermore, because for a format with different numbers of horizontal frames and
vertical frames, the arrangement of the landscape orientation is not the same as that of
the portrait, there is such a restriction that the landscape format cannot be used.
When this setup is performed, the film size and film orientation can be changed for
output in the middle of host control. In addition, the landscape format with different
numbers of horizontal frames and vertical frames can be outputted.

<NOTE>
• This setup should not be used if such a host connected to this equipment in the 3M
(M952) protocol (Protocol type 06xx) that the film size and film orientation can be
changed by its command.
• Furthermore, this setup should be used only in cases where it is necessary to use
mixed film sizes or film orientations when a host that cannot change the film size or
film orientation by its command is connected.

• How to set up
Select address 15 of the software switch, and set the input channel where the
landscape format output and output with film size and film orientation (portrait/
landscape) changed in the middle of host control is enabled.

bit15 bit0
ch6 ch5 ch4 ch3 ch2 ch1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Designation of landscape format

output and output with film size
and film orientation changed
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Enter the above binary number in hexadecimal notation. For example, to enable
landscape format output and output with film size and film orientation changed on input
channel 4, enter “0008”.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-80
 MU-81

• Precautions for use

(1) When only the landscape format is outputted, use “Default value - Format
selection” to register one or more landscape formats of the film size used. In this
case, the operation on this equipment side is not required.

(2) To change the film size or film orientation (portrait/landscape) in the middle of host
control, use “Default value - Format selection” to register one or more portrait/
landscape formats, respectively, corresponding to each film size used.
By performing this setup, a format selection key that cannot be selected in auto-
filming can be selected. Changing the film size or film orientation should be done
on the format selection screen.
This change should be made while no exposure is being performed under host
control (i.e., in the intervals between exposures). If the change is effected during
an exposure, it may cause an exposure error.

(3) If the format corresponding to the frame arrangement designated by the host is
not set in “Default value - Format selection,” everything is universally displayed in
the maximum frame arrangement of an outputtable format on the frame
arrangement display screen of the remote panel. For example, for a portrait of
film size 3543, everything is displayed in HP24.
The format type display icon indicates the format corresponding to the frame
arrangement designated by the host.

(4) When a format arranged with different numbers of horizontal frames and vertical
frames is outputted in the landscape format, the frame arrangement of the output
film does not correspond to the display in the portrait frame arrangement on the
host side.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-81
 MU-82

● Setup to Enable Output with Landscape Format of Film Size 2636 and Portrait
Format of Film Size 3543 Changed During Auto-filming [SW16]
• Purpose
• When the Siemens protocol (Protocol type 0502) is used to connect this equipment
• and host in auto-filming mode, there is a restriction such that the landscape format
• of film size 2636 and the portrait format of film size 3543 cannot be changed for
• output through host console operation. Note, however, that although different film
• sizes and different film orientations (landscape and portrait) cannot be mixed, any film
• size and format can be used, provided that they are of the same type.
• When this setup is performed, the output with the landscape format of film size 2636
• and portrait format of film size 3543 changed can be enabled through host console
• operation.
<NOTE>
If this setup is performed, only the landscape format of film size 2636 and portrait
format of film size 3543 can be used, rendering other film sizes and formats unusable.

• How to set up
• Select address 16 of the software switch, and set the input channel where changing of
• the landscape format of film size 2636 and the portrait format of film size 3543 is
• enabled.

bit15 bit0
ch6 ch5 ch4 ch3 ch2 ch1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Designation of changing of landscape

format of 2636 and portrait format of 3543
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Enter the above binary number in hexadecimal notation. For example, to enable
changing of landscape format of film size 2636 and portrait format of film size 3543 on
input channel 1, enter “0001”.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-82
 MU-83

• Precautions for use

(1) It is a prerequisite for this function that the equipment can use films of 2636 and
3543 film sizes.

(2) Use “Default value - Format selection” to register one or more landscape and
portrait formats of film size 2636 and 3543 used, respectively.

(3) If the format designated by the host is not set in “Default value - Format selection,”
everything on the frame display screen of the remote panel is universally
displayed in the format with the maximum number of frames that can be outputted
with the film size designated.
For example, for a landscape of film size 2636, everything is displayed in BL16.
The format type display icon indicates the format designated by the host.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-83
 MU-84

● Settings for Releasing Prohibit Key on Remote Panel in Auto-filming

Connection [SW21]
• Purpose
In auto-filming connection of the Toshiba protocol (Protocol type 0100), operations
disabled on the remote panel can be enabled by this setting.
This setting is divided into two group functions and controlled. Select group 1 only or
groups 1 and 2 for use.

• Group 1 function
Enables settings of the following four parameters to be changed on the remote panel,
and ignores designations from the host.
• LUT
• Image quality processing type
• Recording format
• Number of copies

<NOTE>
As designations from the host for all four parameters are ignored, there is a need to
change all settings of these parameters from the remote panel.

• Group 2 function
These following four keys can be operated from the remote panel. These operations
can also be performed by host control.
• Store
• Print
• Clear image
• Clear page

CAUTION
During exposure by host control, do not perform operations using group 2 function from
the remote panel. Otherwise inconsistencies in the exposure control by host control
may occur, and the equipment may end abnormally according to the exposure state.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-84
 MU-85

• How to set up
Select address 21 of the software switch, and set the input channel to enable the
group 1 or group 2 function.

bit15 bit0
ch6 ch5 ch4 ch3 ch2 ch1 ch6 ch5 ch4 ch3 ch2 ch1
0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Designation of group 1 function

0 : Disable
1 : Enable

Designation of group 2 function

0 : Disable
1 : Enable FP8U0411.EPS

Enter the above binary numeral in hexadecimal notation. For example, to enable
group 1 function for input channel 1, enter “0001”.

<NOTE>
When the group 2 function is enabled, the group 1 function will also be automatically
enabled as the input channel.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-85
 MU-85.1

● Settings for Releasing Prohibit Key on Remote Panel in Auto-filming

Connection [SW31] (Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later)
• Purpose
In auto-filming connection of the Toshiba protocol (protocol type 0100), operations
disabled on the remote panel-LUT, image quality processing type, recording format,
number of copies, and clear page-can be individually enabled by this setting.
For LUT, image quality processing type, recording format, and number of copies, the
designation of parameters from the host can be enabled/disabled individually.

<NOTE>
This setting (SW31) is effective only when the software switch (SW21) is not set
(“0000”).
If SW21 and SW31 are set simultaneously, SW21 will be effective.

• How to set up
Select address 31 of the software switch, and set the procedure for enabling
operations and enabling/disabling designation of parameters from the host.

bit15 bit0
0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Designation of enabling operations

LUT 1 : Enable / 0 : Disable
Image quality processing type 1 : Enable / 0 : Disable
Recording format 1 : Enable / 0 : Disable
Number of copies 1 : Enable / 0 : Disable
Clear page 1 : Enable / 0 : Disable

Designation of parameters from the host

LUT 1 : Disable / 0 : Enable
Image quality processing type 1 : Disable / 0 : Enable
Recording format 1 : Disable / 0 : Enable
Number of copies 1 : Disable / 0 : Enable
FP8U0417.EPS

Enter the above binary numeral in hexadecimal notation. For example, To enable
LUT operations and disable designation of LUT parameters from the host, enter
“0101”.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-85.1
 MU-85.2

BLANK PAGE

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-85.2
 MU-85.3

BLANK PAGE

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-85.3
 MU-85.4

BLANK PAGE

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-85.4
 MU-86

4.3 SERVICE OPTION

In the Service Option, test processing in combination with functions such as print output
is performed.
The Service Option has the following functions:
• VIDEO ADJUST
• IMAGE TRANSFER
• TEST PRINT
The Service Option is entered from the Routine Processing Mode.

4.3.1 Common Information for Service Option

■ Preconditions for Entering Service Option
For performing operation in the Service Option, it is a prerequisite that the external unit
is connected and operates normally.
Before entering the Service Option, it is necessary to take appropriate steps in the
Maintenance Mode in advance so as to enable the Service Option icon display.
<NOTE>
For this equipment, select channel 1 as the input channel to be set.

■ Setting Service Option Icon Display Enable/Disable

(1) Enter the Maintenance Mode.
(2) Select “1. Installation” and “4. Action switch” in sequence.
␣ [1] → [Store] → [4] → [Store]␣
(3) Select “8. Service option”.
␣ [8] → [Store]␣
(4) Select a desired input channel.
Each channel: ␣ [Channel No.] → [Store]␣
All channels: ␣ [7] → [Store]␣
(5) Select “1. Enable” or “2. Disable”.
To enable display: ␣ [1] → [Store]␣
To disable display: ␣ [2] → [Store]␣
(6) Exit the Maintenance Mode.
(7) Power OFF.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-86
 MU-87

■ How to Enter Service Option

<NOTE>
Before entering the Service Option, take appropriate steps in the Maintenance Mode in
advance so as to enable the Service Option icon display.

(1) Power ON.

(2) Select the SERVICE OPTION on the screen.
[F2]␣

Service option icon MANUAL

LUT FORMAT
8 HP04
COPIES
F2key 01
1 2
SERVICE
OPTION
3 4
OPTION

Store images, then press print key

FILM : 0000 WAIT : 000 PRT

FP8U0417.EPS

The Service Option menu appears on screen.

MANUAL

VIDEO TEST PRINT

ADJUST
IMAGE
TRANSFER
Cancel Enter

Select icon.

FILM : 0000
000 WAIT : 000 PRT
FP8U0412.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-87
 MU-88

■ How to Exit Service Option

On the Service Option menu screen, select Enter or Cancel.
To save setup content: [F8]␣
To cancel setup content: [F3]␣
The Service Option is exited to return to the routine screen.

<NOTE>
The Service Option is not open to the general user. After completing the work in the Service
Option, be sure to take appropriate steps in the Maintenance Mode so as to disable the
Service Option icon display.
“■ Setting Service Option Icon Display Enable/Disable”

■ Operation in Service Option

Operations in the Service Option are similar to those generally performed on the
remote panel by the general user.
To perform operation, press the function key corresponding to the icon displayed on
screen.

■ Setting Numeral Value in Service Option

Numeral values cannot be entered in the Service Option.
To set a numeral value, press the or key to increment or decrement the value
displayed.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-88
 MU-89

4.3.2 Service Option Screen Transition Diagram

Routine Screen

Service Option Menu Screen

IMAGE
Enter TRANS- Cancel/Enter Cancel/Enter
VIDEO
Cancel FER
ADJUST TEST
PRINT
Enter

VIDEO TRIAL PRINT/ IMAGE

TEST PRINT
ADJUST Re-adjust TRANSFER
Screen
Screen Screen Screen

Re-adjust

TRIAL PRINT SAVE/LOAD Start TEST PRINT

FP8U0413.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-89
 MU-90

4.3.3 VIDEO ADJUST

<NOTE>
• On channels other than the analog video signal input, the VIDEO ADJUST icon on the
Service Option menu screen is dimmed out, so VIDEO ADJUST is disabled.
• If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version
A03 or later, VIDEO ADJUST must be implemented with study information in the
unidentified state. If implemented with study information in the identified state, films for
checking will not be printed normally.
Data will not be output for storage regardless of whether the Network icon on the remote
panel routine screen is displayed as ON or OFF.

■ Function
VIDEO ADJUST allows for fine adjustment of image acquisition timing in accordance
with the specification of the analog video signal.

■ Parameters for Video Adjustment

Image signal
Output image
SYNC BACK PORCH FRONT PORCH
Image output at this
Image acquisition acquisition timing
Image output
control signal
before adjustment
a b c
Image format
The output
image is shifted
rightward and
downward. Output image
x

Image output after

Image acquisition Image output adjustment
control signal after
adjustment
a-x b c+x

Image format
FP5U0603.EPS

The timing of the acquisition control signal relative to the image signal should be
adjusted so that the output image fits into the image format.
In the Service Option, the following parameters are adjustable:
• In the horizontal direction
a: H-back, b: H-active, c: H-front
• In the vertical direction
a: V-back, b: V-active, c: V-front
Note that x represents the amount of parameter shifted.
The boundary between a and b illustrated above stands for an image acquisition timing.
By moving this acquisition timing, the output image can be shifted.
006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-90
 MU-91

■ Flow of VIDEO ADJUST

Make adjustment by repeating each parameter adjustment and checking the film
image.

START

VIDEO ADJUST Screen Displayed

Adjust Each Parameter on VIDEO ADJUST Screen

➪ See "■ How to Adjust Each Parameter"

Select Enter to Finish

Select Re-adjust
Select TRIAL PRINT
on TRIAL PRINT/Re-adjust Screen

NG Check
Output Image

OK
The Service Option
Select Enter to Finish
menu screen appears.

END
FP5U0604.EPS

■ Display of VIDEO ADJUST Screen

Select video adjust on the Service Option menu screen.
Then, the VIDEO ADJUST Screen appears.
MANUAL
H-back V-back
124 – 2 30 – 2
H-active V-active
640 – 1 512 – 1
H-front V-front
52 + 3 20 + 3
Cancel Enter

Select icon.

FILM : 0000
000 WAIT : 000 PRT
FP5U0605.EPS

The numeral displayed to the left represents the default value for each parameter. The
numeral preceded by sign “+” or “–” denotes the amount of image shift.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-91
 MU-92

■ How to Adjust Each Parameter

(1) On the VIDEO ADJUST screen, select a parameter to be adjusted.
The icon of the selected parameter is highlighted in reverse video.
(2) Using the or key, set the amount of image shift. Add or subtract the amount
of image shift, x, as follows.
To shift the image on film leftward/upward : H-back + x, H-active, H-front – x
: V-back + x, V-active, V-front – x
To shift the image on film rightward/downward: H-back – x, H-active, H-front + x
: V-back – x, V-active, V-front + x
<NOTE>
• Observe the following requirements when setting the amount of image shift.
H-back + H-active + H-front = constant
V-back + V-active + V-front = constant
• Normally, video adjustments should be made within the following range (setup range is
±99). If video adjustments cannot be done within this range, it is conceivable that setup
values for video parameters may be inappropriate. In that case reexamine the video
parameters that have been set up.
For HAV90A or DVI90A board:
Horizontal direction : Up to ±30, depending on the pixel clock
Vertical direction : ±10
For HAV90B or HAV90E board:
Horizontal direction : Up to ±60, depending on the pixel clock
Vertical direction : ±10

(3) To determine the amount of image shift, press again the function key
corresponding to the parameter adjusted.
(4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) above for each parameter.
If the video adjustment cannot be touched up by the amount of shift x alone,
increase or decrease H-active or V-active for readjustment.

■ Countermeasure for Faulty Interface Image Acquisition Start Line

● When HAV or DVI board is used

Switch the interlace ODD/EVEN mode for remedial action.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-92
 MU-93

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-93
 MU-94

4.3.4 IMAGE TRANSFER

● Tools used: FD

CAUTION
Never power OFF during file saving and loading. If the power is turned OFF during
saving and loading, the contents of the memory card or FD will be lost.

■ Function
Use this function when the data used for analysis is to be carried in the FD, for example.

● Saving image data

Saves the input image data from each host into the FD. The data saved by this function
is the image data last stored before saving.

● Loading image data and printing with loaded data

Loads the data in the FD into the memory in the equipment.
When Load is executed, LOAD MODE is automatically turned ON. If Store is selected
from the routine screen under this condition, the data loaded is stored as one image,
instead of receiving the image data from the input channel.

<NOTE>
On print using the data loaded, its LUT, Interpolation, positive/negative conditions are
reflected by those set in the equipment loaded. Thus, if it is desired to output the same image
as when saved, it is necessary to take note of the processing conditions at that time, and set
them in the equipment loaded.

■ Flow of Image Data Saving

START

Insert FD for Image Saving into

FDD

IMAGE TRANSFER Screen Displayed

The SAVE icon is highlighted in reverse video,

Select SAVE from IMAGE TRANSFER Screen and saving into the FD is done.
When saving is completed, the icon changes
from highlight to its normal state.
END
FP5U0606.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-94
 MU-95

■ Flow of Image Data Loading and Printing with Loaded Data

START

Insert FD into FDD

IMAGE TRANSFER Screen Displayed

LOAD MODE icon appears

Select LOAD
upon completion of loading.

Select Enter to Finish

Quit Service Option

A series of internal operations are performed

Start Store on Routine Screen using the loaded image data as one image.

NO Storing Images
of Format Completed?

YES
Printing with loaded data
Start Print on Routine Screen is started.

Select Service Option

Select IMAGE TRANSFER

Select LOAD MODE LOAD MODE icon disappears.

Select Enter to Finish

END
FP5U0607.EPS

■ Display of IMAGE TRANSFER Screen

From the Service Option menu screen, select IMAGE TRANSFER.
Then, the IMAGE TRANSFER screen appears.

MANUAL
LOAD MODE icon
(display after LOAD is executed)
LOAD MODE
ON
SAVE LOAD
(to FD) (from FD)
Cancel Enter

Insert Floppy Disk, then select icon.

FILM : 0000 WAIT : 000 PRT FP8U0418.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-95
 MU-96

4.3.5 TEST PRINT

■ Function
Outputs the test pattern image data generated in a specific memory or device in this
equipment.
The test items consist of the followings.
Test1: Generates test pattern data at the input board.
Test2: Writes/reads data in/from the hard disk.
Test3: Generates test pattern data with the image memory.
Test8: Outputs a step wedge for checking tone correction after LUT
fine-tuning (BAR/SAR scheme).
Test9: Outputs test pattern 1 (SMPTE).
Test10: Outputs test pattern 2 (gradation).
By performing the above tests in sequence, check which test item resulted in a normal
image. This may help locate the defective functional block or parts.
Also check connections with the printer by outputting the various test patterns.
<NOTE>
• When performing test 1 with digital input, set to no parity for image data of the DPI board (S7
setting).
• Test 2 cannot be performed on this equipment.
• In Test 8, a step wedge is output for checking tone correction of LUT details of the printer
corresponding to the LUT No. set on this equipment.
• If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version
A03 or later, TEST PRINT must be implemented with study information in the unidentified
state. If implemented with study information in the identified state, test patterns will not be
printed normally.
Data will not be output for storage regardless of whether the Network icon on the remote
panel routine screen is displayed as ON or OFF.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-96
 MU-97

■ Flow of TEST PRINT

START

TEST PRINT Screen Displayed

The icon of the test item selected is highlighted in reverse video,

Select Test Item
and the test pattern data is entered into the print queue.
on TEST PRINT Screen
When entering is completed, the icon changes from highlight to its
normal state, and the numeral for WAIT displayed is incremented
by 1. Then, film is printed out from the printer.
Check Output Image

NO Defective functional
block located?

YES

Select Enter to Finish

END
FP5U0609.EPS

■ Display of TEST PRINT Screen

From the Service Option menu screen, select Test Print.
Then, the TEST PRINT screen appears.

First page Second page

MANUAL MANUAL
PAGE TEST 3 PAGE TEST 8
1/2 IMAGE MEMORY 2/2 STEPWEDGE
TEST 1 TEST 9
VIDEO BOARD PATTERN 1
TEST 2 TEST 10
HD W/R PATTERN 2

Cancel Enter Cancel Enter

Select icon. Select icon.

FILM : 0000 WAIT : 000 PRT FILM : 0000 WAIT : 000 PRT

FP8U0403.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-97
 MU-98

■ Output Image for Each Test Item

The input image size in digital input (when the DPI board is used) is fixed at 1024 x
1024 pixels.
The input image size in analog input (when the HAV/DVI board is used) is the size set
in this equipment (the input image size is not taken into consideration for tests 8, 9, and
10).
Images are output in the format set in this equipment for both digital and analog inputs
(excluding test 8).
The output images of internal test prints differ according to the analog input and digital
input, and according to where data is generated and flow of data generation in each
test.
The following figures show the difference in images output with each test.
Test 1 Test 3

In test 1, striped patterns of 2 In test 3, striped patterns of 0

bit shift data from 0 to 255 are to 1023 data at a varying rate
made at a varying rate of 8 of 10 bits. This data is enlarged
bits. This data is enlarged according to the recording
according to the recording screen format.
screen format. Changes are more moderate
than test 1.

Test 8

0 0 0
1/15 F.S 1/16 F.S In test 8, step wedges with 13, 16, and 17
5%
2/16 F.S steps are displayed.
2/15 F.S
The numbers in the figure are reference
10% 3/16 F.S
3/15 F.S information and are not displayed.
20% 4/16 F.S The output format is 3-frame format in
4/15 F.S
landscape size.
5/16 F.S
30% 5/15 F.S
6/16 F.S How the step wedge pattern looks:
6/15 F.S
40% 7/16 F.S In the illustration at left, the gamma curve
7/15 F.S is a positive curve, with the output film
50% 8/16 F.S posi/nega set to "nega."
8/15 F.S
9/16 F.S If the posi/nega for the output film is set
60% 9/15 F.S to "posi," the density pattern is inverted.
10/16 F.S
70% 10/15 F.S
11/16 F.S The portion around the test pattern is
80% 11/15 F.S 12/16 F.S either Black or Clear according to
12/15 F.S the "Default value - Border" setting.
13/16 F.S The frame around each test pattern
90%
13/15 F.S 14/16 F.S complies with the image frame-related
95% setting.
14/15 F.S 15/16 F.S
100% Full Scale Full Scale
FP8U0404.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-98
 MU-99
Test 9

FP8U0415.EPS

Test 10

FP8U0416.EPS

Common Information on Tests 9 and 10

The image is output to the first frame in the format set at this equipment.
The density pattern of the image output according to the combination of gamma curves used and positive/negative settings is reversed.
The surrounding areas of the image become black or clear according to the Default value - Border setting.
The frame of the surrounding parts of the image follows settings related to image frame.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-99
 MU-100

4.4 How to Handle Magnetic Card During ID Information Entry

<NOTE>
• This function is available for main unit software version A03 or later.
• If search is performed from the magnetic card during verification of ID entry when DRYPIX
Station (Image Manager Function) is connected, search will be executed according to the
patient ID number in the magnetic card.
For main unit software version A04 or later, patient information can be acquired from the
various information in the magnetic card and studies started.
• For main unit software version A05 or later, the hospital-specific card format expansion
definition file (CDFORM2.DAT) corresponding to the expansion of readable number of
characters can be used.
In addition, at “6. Magnetic Card Type” (hospital-specific card format is expanded or not) of
“1-2-7-1-3 ID Information” of remote panel maintenance mode “Connection” (set up system
connection), specify whether to use the standard hospital-specific card format definition file
(CDFORM.DAT) or expansion definition file (CDFORM2.DAT).

The CR card (Fuji standard format and extended format) can be used for inputting ID
information from the ID card as a standard. The formats of the CR card are
automatically recognized.
To use a hospital-specific card, it is necessary to create and install a card format
definition file (CDFORM.DAT or CDFORM2.DAT) corresponding to the hospital card
format.
“4.4.1 Creating Hospital-Specific Card Format Definition File”, “4.4.2 Installing
Hospital-Specific Card Format Definition File”
When the card format definition file has been installed, both the CR card and hospital-
specific card can be used.

The specification of each card is as follow.

• CR card
Fuji standard format (FUJI): JIS or ISO
Extended format (FJ01-05): JIS
Extended format (FJ51): ISO
• Hospital-specific card: JIS or ISO

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-100
 MU-101

4.4.1 Creating Hospital-Specific Card Format Definition File

■ Obtaining Hospital Card Format Data
Obtain the hospital card format data for the installation site, and examine how items
such as name and birth date are formatted and where they are set.

■ Procedures for Creating File

(1) Insert a FD for file backup into the FD drive of this equipment.
(2) Using the M-Utility of the operation panel of this equipment, save the card format
definition file (CDFORM.DAT or CDFORM2.DAT) in the FD.
(3) Based on the saved card format definition file, create hospital-specific card format
definition files using the file editing software running on the PC.
<NOTE>
The card format definition file on which the hospital-specific card format definition file is based
contains default values preset. Delete unnecessary items and add necessary items, as
required by hospital specific card items.

■ How to Write File

With the CDFORM.DAT or CDFORM2.DAT file, each item (name, birth date, sex, ID
number, etc.) consists of five fields as follows.
indent:
convert:
data_lng:
source_pnt:
destination_pnt:
Anything after Chapter “:” in each field is ignored as a comment, and the first numeral
immediately after the line feed subsequent to “:” is read.

● indent
Originally, this field designates the card type, but it is not used; consequently, enter a
comment indicative of the item name, and enter 0 for data.

● convert
It designates how to convert the data stored in the card.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-101
 MU-102

❍ Convert Specifications
Convert type Before convert After convert

No conversion.
0 The whole data length is copied from the source.
Shift codes (SI, SO, ESC,$,B,SI, ESC,$,B,SO) within a record are replaced by SP (space).

1 ANSI long date 1987.OCT.14 1987.10.14

2 American short date 10.14.1987 1987.10.14
3 American long date OCT.14.1987 1987.10.14
4 European short date 14.10.1987 1987.10.14
5 European long date 14.OCT.1987 1987.10.14
S62.10.14 (M: Meiji; T: Taisho;
6 Japanese date 1987.10.14
S: Showa; H: Heisei)
7 ANSI short date (no separator) 19871014 1987.10.14
8 ANSI long date (no separator) 1987OCT14 1987.10.14
9 American short date (no separator) 10141987 1987.10.14
A American long date (no separator) OCT141987 1987.10.14
B European short date (no separator) 14101987 1987.10.14
C European long date (no separator) 14OCT1987 1987.10.14
S621014 (M: Meiji; T: Taisho;
D Japanese date (no separator) 1987.10.14
S: Showa; H: Heisei)
ANSI short date, special (no
E 871014 1987.10.14
separator)
Japanese short, special (no 3621014 (1: Meiji; 2: Taisho;
F 1987.10.14
separator) 3: Showa; 4: Heisei)
G Sex, special 1 (1 : M, 2 : F, 3 : O) M
H Japanese short, special (Kanagawa) S.62.10.14 1987.10.14
Japanese year (abbrev.)
S62 (M: Meiji; T: Taisho; S: Showa;
I 3 characters of the source are 1987
H: Heisei)
converted to 4 characters.
Japanese year (numeral)
362 (1: Meiji; 2: Taisho; 3: Showa;
J 3 characters of the source are 1987
4: Heisei)
converted to 4 characters.
European month
K 3 characters of the source are OCT 10
converted to 2 characters.
one char month (1)
1-9 01-09
L One character of the source is
X, Y, Z 10,11,12
converted to 2 characters.
one char month(2)
1-9 01-09
M One character of the source is
A, B, C 10,11,12
converted to 2 characters.
Japanese name of era (abbrev.) S 62 (M: Meiji; T: Taisho; S: Showa;
(separator) H: Heisei)
N 1987
4 characters of the source are denotes an arbitrary separator,
converted to 4 characters. which is ignored.
Japanese name of era (numeral) 3 62 (1: Meiji; 2: Taisho; 3: Showa;
(separator) 4: Heisei)
O 1987
4 characters of the source are denotes an arbitrary separator,
converted to 4 characters. which is ignored.
It is converted as Kanji code based on double-byte code stipulated in JIS-Z-
P Kanji code designation
0208, independently of Kanji Shift.
Shift code padding
The whole data length is copied from the source, but Shift codes (SI, SO, ESC,$,B,SI, ESC,$,B,SO) within a record will
S
not be converted to space, but padded from the left-most digit. That is, if a data length of 10 characters contains each
SI,SO, then the effective number of characters is 8.
ANSI short data, special (separator)
T 87.10.14 1987.10.14
(*1)
U ANSI short year (*1) 87 1987
V Sex, special 2 (*1) 0 (0 : M, 1 : F, 2 : O) M
W Sex, special 3 (*1) A (A : M, B : F, C : O) M
TP8U0432.EPS

(*1): Compatible with remote panel software version A06 or later.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-102
 MU-103

● data_lng
It designates the length of data stored in the card in bytes (decimal notation).

● source_pnt
It designates the start position of the data stored in the card in decimal notation. The
starting point for the JIS and ISO cards are illustrated below.
JIS card
0 1 2 3 4

S
T
X
'7F'

ISO card
0 1 2 3 4

S
T
F
X
'05' '26'

● destination_pnt
It denotes the location on the memory within this equipment, and is set in accordance
with the table indicated below.
For the ID number, Examination number, etc., if the data is shorter than the maximum
length, and there is a need to right-align the data, change the value of destination_pnt
according to the following example.
Example:When using CDFORM.DAT and the ID number is a 8-digit value
4 (destination_pnt before change) + 10 (maximum length)
-8 (required number of digits)
=6 (destination_pnt after change)
CDFORM.DAT CDFORM2.DAT (*1)
Card item name
destination_pnt Max. length after convert destination_pnt Max. length after convert
ID number 4 10 4 64
Patient name (alphanumeric, kana) 14 20 68 64
Patient name in Kanji 34 20 (10 Kanji characters) 132 64 (32 Kanji characters)
Year/month/day of birth date 54 10 196 10
Only year of birth date 54 4 196 4
Only month of birth date 59 2 201 2
Only day of birth date 62 2 204 2
Sex 70 1 212 1
Distribution code 72 8 214 8
Distribution code (4-digit) 76 4 218 4
Alphanumeric department name 80 8 222 64
Examination number 88 10 286 16
Department name in Kanji 98 8 (4 Kanji characters) 302 64 (32 Kanji characters)
Reception number 106 5 366 16
TP8U0433.EPS

(*1): Compatible with main unit software version A05 or later.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-103
 MU-104

4.4.2 Installing Hospital-Specific Card Format Definition File

(1) Create the card format definition file (CDFORM.DAT or CDFORM2.DAT)
according to “How to Write File”, save it on a FD, and insert the FD into the FD
drive of this equipment.
(2) Using the M-Utility of the operation panel of this equipment, load the card format
definition file (CDFORM.DAT or CDFORM2.DAT) in this equipment.

4.4.3 Example of Creating Card Format Definition File

■ Example of Hospital Card Format

0 .... 9 10 17 18 19 35 36 41 42

S
T ID No. Department Name (Kana) Birth date Sex
X name (Japanese era,
in Kanji S S GA11 special) 1
I O
362Y05

Pad the Shift November 5 Male: 1

codes. in the year 62 Female: 2
GA11 of the
Showa era

■ Example of Creating Card Format Definition File

An example of creationg a card format definition file is described below corresponding
to the example of hospital card format shown above.

## CDFORM.DAT
indent : ID#
0
convert:
0
data_lng:
10
source_pnt:
0
destination_pnt:
4
indent: KANJI KAMEI
0
convert:
P
data_lng:
8
source_pnt:
10
destination_pnt:
98

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-104
 MU-105

indent: NAME
0
convert
S
data_lng:
18
source_pnt:
18 (19 may be acceptable.)
destination_pnt:
14
indent: YEAR
0
convert:
J
data_lng:
3
source_pnt:
36
destination_pnt:
54
indent: MONTH
0
convert:
L
data_lng
1
source_pnt:
39
destination_pnt:
59
indent: DAY
0
convert:
0
data_lng:
2
source_pnt:
40
destination_pnt:
62
indent: sex
0
convert:
G
data_lng:
1
source_pnt:
42
destination_pnt:
70
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-105
 MU-106

4.4.4 Readable Hospital Card Types

Hospital card types described below are readable in the definitions of the card format
definition file.

● ID number
For the JIS card, it must be consecutive 7-bit code characters (including Katakana).
For the ISO card, it must be consecutive 6-bit code characters.
It is restricted to 10 characters or less in accordance with the FCR Interface
Specification.
When CDFORM2.DAT is used, expanded to 64 characters.

● Name
For the JIS card, it must be consecutive 7-bit code characters (including Katakana).
For the ISO card, it must be consecutive 6-bit code characters.
It is restricted to 20 characters or less in accordance with the FCR Interface
Specification.
When CDFORM2.DAT is used, expanded to 64 characters.

● Sex
It must be one character, corresponding only to the two types M (= male)/F (= female)/
O (= others) or 1 (= male)/2 (= female)/3 (= others).
When using remote panel software version A06 or later, two more types 0 (= male)/1 (=
female)/2 (= others), and A (= male)/B (= female)/C (= others) can be used (total four
types).

● Birth date
The year, month and date must meet the following requirements. There is no restriction
on their sequence. They may be separated, and their separator may be anything.
• Year
It must be either of the following six types.
Four-decimal-character representation, in the year 1994 of the Christian Era, or
two-decimal-character representation of the lower two digits of the Christian Era.
Three-character representation, in H06 or 406 of the Japanese Era:The year
should be represented by two decimal characters.
Four-character representation, in H ∆ 06 or 4 ∆ 06 of the Japanese Era: The year
should be represented by two decimal characters. There should be one character
between the name of era and the year, and ∆ denotes an arbitrary separator
symbol.
• Month
It must be either of the following four types.
01-12:Two characters
JAN-DEC: Three characters
1-9, X (= 10), Y (= 11), Z (= 12): One character
1-9, A (= 10), B (= 11), C (= 12): One character
• Date
It must be two decimal characters, from 01 to 31.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-106
 MU-107

● Name in Kanji (for JIS card only)

It corresponds to JIS Kanji Code. The presence/absence of ESC,$,B,SI has no
significance.
It is restricted to 10 Kanji characters (20 half-width characters) or less in accordance
with the FCR Interface Specification.
When CDFORM2.DAT is used, expanded to 32 Kanji characters (64 half-width
characters).

● Others
Because the other items are not converted, they may be set in consecutive 7-bit code
characters (including Kana) or Kanji codes for the JIS card; for the ISO card, they may
be set in consecutive 6-bit code characters.
<NOTE>
If the contents of the hospital card start at FUJI, the “indent” data edited at the start of
CDFORM.DAT or CDFORM2.DAT should be set to Z (upper-case letter). Note, however, that
the Fuji standard format (FUJI) for the CR card cannot be used in this case. If the contents start
at FJ, contact the Service Headquarters.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-107
 MU-108

4.4.5 Symbol/Character Code Table for Magnetic Card Recording

Information
■ 7-Bit Symbol/Character Code Table (for JIS Card)

Code No. Symbol/character Code No. Symbol/character Code No. Symbol/character Code No. Symbol/character
Roman Katakana Roman Katakana Roman Katakana Roman Katakana

00 NUL 20 SP 40 60
01 SOH 21 41 61
02 STX 22 42 62
03 ETX 23 43 63
04 EOT 24 44 64
05 ENQ 25 45 65
06 ACK 26 46 66
07 BEL 27 47 67
08 BS 28 48 68
09 HT 29 49 69
0A LF 2A 4A 6A
0B VT 2B 4B 6B
0C FF 2C 4C 6C
0D CR 2D 4D 6D
0E SO 2E 4E 6E
0F SI 2F 4F 6F
10 DEL 30 50 70
11 DC1 31 51 71
12 DC2 32 52 72
13 DC3 33 53 73
14 DC4 34 54 74
15 NAK 35 55 75
16 SYN 36 56 76
17 ETB 37 57 77
18 CAN 38 58 78
19 EM 39 59 79
1A SUB 3A 5A 7A
1B ESC 3B 5B 7B
1C FS 3C 5C 7C
1D GS 3D 5D 7D
1E RS 3E 5E 7E
1F US 3F 5F 7F DEL

NOTE 1: For more detail, see JIS-X-0201.

NOTE 2: Symbols/characters from code numbers 21 to 7E differ between Roman characters and Katakana.
NOTE 3: Symbols/characters for Katakana from code number 60 to 7E are not defined.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-108
 MU-109

■ 6-Bit Symbol/Character Code Table (for ISO Card)

Code No. Symbol/character Code No. Symbol/character Code No. Symbol/character Code No. Symbol/character
00 SP 10 0 20 (*1) 30 P
01 (*1) 11 1 21 A 31 Q
02 (*1) 12 2 22 B 32 R
03 (*3) 13 3 23 C 33 S
04 $ 14 4 24 D 34 T
05 %(*4) 15 5 25 E 35 U
06 (*1) 16 6 26 F 36 V
07 (*1) 17 7 27 G 37 W
08 ( 18 8 28 H 38 X
09 ) 19 9 29 I 39 Y
0A (*1) 1A (*1) 2A J 3A Z
0B (*1) 1B (*1) 2B K 3B (*2)
0C (*1) 1C (*1) 2C L 3C (*2)
0D - 1D (*1) 2D M 3D (*2)
0E . 1E (*1) 2E N 3E ^(*4)
0F / 1F ?(*4) 2F O 3F (*1)

NOTE 1: For more detail, see ISO7811.

NOTE 2: Characters indicated by (*1) are used for hardware control, and not used as information characters.
NOTE 3: Characters indicated by (*2) are not intended for international use.
NOTE 4: Characters indicated by (*3) are available for use as additional graphic characters.
NOTE 5: Characters indicated by (*4) are restricted to the following meanings:
%: start symbol; ?: end symbol; ^: separator symbol

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-109
 MU-110

4.5 Specifications of Files Related to DRYPIX Station (Image

Manager Function) Connection
<NOTE>
• The following files can be used for main unit software version A03 or later.
For the MODALITY.TXT applies only to main unit software version A03.
Although OCRIMG.PRM is applicable to DICOM software version A04 or later, it is currently
not available.
• The EXAMENU.PRM and MODALITY.PRM of up to main unit software version A02 cannot
be used.

● MENULIST.TXT

❍ File name: Examination menu file

❍ Summary
• Describes examination menu data entered at the ID ENTRY screen.
• Up to 20 cases can be registered.
• The descriptive content of this file is displayed on the selection screen of the
examination menu.
• The first 10 bytes are displayed on the upper portion of the function keys, while
the remaining bytes are displayed on the lower portion.

Upper portion (The first 10 bytes

of the setup value are displayed.)

Lower portion (The remaining bytes of

the setup value are displayed.)

<NOTE>
At shipment, the MENULIST.TXT installed in the equipment is described with full-width setup
value (Japanese) as the default.
If using in countries other than Japan, use the MENULSTE.TXT (for editing half-width
characters) stored in floppy disc (1/4) of main unit software version A03 or later. After editing,
change the filename to MENULIST.TXT, and load the data to the equipment.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-110
 MU-111

❍ Format
Display type, “half-width setup value”, “full-width setup value”

• For the display type, 0:half-width and 1:full-width. The others are considered 0.
• The half-width setup value should be 16 characters (16 bytes) long, and the full-
width setup value should be 10 characters (20 bytes) long.
• For the display of half-width characters, full-width setup value need not be
described. (full-width setup value can be described using 20 half-width spaces, or
10 full-width spaces.)
• For the display of full-width characters, be sure to describe half-width setup value
(16 half-width spaces can be used).
• Half-width and full-width characters can be described together.
• The description of the space at the top or middle of the character is valid
(displayed as described on the selection screen of the examination menu). Fill in
spaces behind.
However, the spaces at the top, middle, and back are deleted when list displaying
study information after entering the examination menu and when transmitting
information to DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function).
• The half-width and full-width setup values should be enclosed by “ ”.
• A separator symbol should be “,”.
• Because the data is displayed from the beginning of the file on the selection
screen, the menu data that is frequently used should be written at the beginning of
the file.
• A portion after # at the line is for a comment.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-111
 MU-112

❍ Setup example
#
# File name="memulist.txt"
#
# memulist.txt English
# =========================================================
#
#
0," HEAD "
0," NECK "
0," CHEST "
0," ABDOMEN "
0," PELVIS "
#
## End
##########################################
# ATTENTION !! #
# Never edit nor delete below this line. #
# [EOF]is required at the last line #
##########################################

● MODALITY.TXT

❍ File name: Connection modality file

This file applies only to main unit software version A03 (for main unit software version
A04 or later, set the modality name at the DRYPIX Station (Imager Manager function)
side).

❍ Summary
• Describes the name of the modality to be connected.
• The modality name to be described is used for narrowing down various search
conditions at the ID ENTRY screen.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-112
 MU-113

❍ Format
Connection modality name

• For the connection modality name, a double-byte alphabetic abbreviation should

be described in accordance with the DICOM regulations.
AU = Audio
BI = Biomagnetic imaging
CD = Color flow Doppler
CT = Computed Tomography
DD = Duplex Doppler
DG = Diaphanography
DX = Digital Radiography
ES = Endoscopy
GM = General Microscopy
HC = Hard Copy
HD = Hemodynamic Waveform
IO = Intra-oral Radiography
LS = Laser surface scan
MA = Magnetic resonance angiography
MG = Mammography
MR = Magnetic Resonance
MS = Magnetic resonance spectroscopy
NM = Nuclear Medicine
OT = Other
PR = Presentation State
PT = Positron emission tomography (PET)
PX = Panoramic X-Ray
RF = Radio Fluoroscopy
RG = Radiographic imaging (conventional film/screen)
SM = Slide Microscopy
SR = SR Document
ST = Single-photon emission computed tomography (SPECT)
TG = Thermography
US = Ultrasound
XA = X-Ray Angiography
XC = External-camera Photography
• A portion after # at the line is for a comment.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-113
 MU-114

❍ Setup example
# File name="MODALITY.TXT"
#
###########################################
CT
#
## End
##########################################
# ATTENTION !! #
# Never edit nor delete below this line. #
# [EOF]is required at the last line #
##########################################

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-114
 MU-115

● IDFMSTD.PRM/IDFMTUSR.PRM

❍ File name: Study information format definition file

❍ Summary
• The display format of various study information is defined on the ID ENTRY
screen.
• IDFMTSTD.PRM (standard study information format definition file) is defined with
Patterns 1 to 3.
• IDFMTUSR.PRM (user study information format definition file) is defined with
Patterns 4 to 6.

❍ Details of each format

• Bold characters in each pattern indicate characters that are fixed for display (on
the screen, these do not appear bold but the same as others).
• The number in the ( ) of the description in each pattern indicates the number of
bytes which can be displayed.

• Pattern1
(Display format)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 Patient ID (16)
2 Patient Name in Ank (30)
3 Date of Birth (10) Sex (1)
4 Accession No. (16)
5 Requesting Department in Ank (24)
6 (Search results) Examination Menu (30)

(Example of Display)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 0 0 1 - 1 2 3 4 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 F U J I T A R O
3 1 9 9 9 1 2 3 1 M
4 A - 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 - 1 2 3 4 5
5 S U R G E R Y
6 C S P I N E
TP8U0422.EPS

• Pattern2
(Display format)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 Accession No. (16)
2 Patient ID (16)
3 Patient Name in Ank (30)
4 Requesting Department in Ank (25)
5 Technologist in Ank (25)
6 (Search results) Examination Menu (30)

(Example of Display)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 A - 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 - 1 2 3 4 5
2 0 0 1 - 1 2 3 4 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 F U J I T A R O
4 S U R G E R Y
5 F U J I H A N A K O
6 C S P I N E
TP8U0423.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-115
 MU-116

• Pattern3
(Display format)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 Reception # (10) Accession No. (10)
2 Patient ID (16)
3 Patient Name in Ank (30)
4 Date of Birth (10) Sex (1)
5 (Search results) Examination Menu (30)
6 (Selected using the remote panel) Examination Menu (30)

(Example of Display)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 0 0 1 - 0 0 0 3 3 3 A - 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7
2 0 0 1 - 1 2 3 4 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 F U J I T A R O
4 1 9 9 9 1 2 3 1 M
5 C S P I N E
6 T S P I N E
TP8U0424.EPS

• Pattern4
(Display format)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 Patient ID (16)
2 Patient Name in Kanji (20)
3 Patient Name in Ank (20) Date of Birth (10)
4 Accession No. (16) Sex (1)
5 Requesting Department in Kanji (20)
6 (Search results) Examination Menu (30)

(Example of Display)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 0 0 1 - 1 2 3 4 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
3 F U J I T A R O 1 9 9 9 1 2 3 1
4 A - 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 - 1 2 3 4 5 M
5
6
TP8U0425.EPS

• Pattern5
(Display format)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 Accession No. (10) Patient Name in Ank (15)
2 Patient ID (16) Date of Birth (10) Sex (1)
3 Patient Name in Kanji (20)
4 Requesting Department in Kanji (20)
5 Technologist in Kanji (20)
6 (Search results) Examination Menu (30)

(Example of Display)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 A - 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 F U J I T A R O
2 0 0 1 - 1 2 3 4 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 9 9 9 1 2 3 1 M
3
4
5
6
TP8U0426.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-116
 MU-117

• Pattern6
(Display format)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 Reception # (10) Accession No. (10)
2 Patient ID (16)
3 Patient Name in Ank (20) Date of Birth (8) Sex (1)
4 Patient Name in Kanji (30)
5 (Search results) Examination Menu (30)
6 (Selected using the remote panel) Examination Menu (30)

(Example of Display)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 0 0 1 - 0 0 0 3 3 3 A - 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7
2 0 0 1 - 1 2 3 4 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 F U J I T A R O 1 9 9 9 1 2 3 1 M
4
5
6
TP8U0427.EPS

• Contents displayed at the bottom of the remote panel routine screen (The
same contents are displayed for Patterns 1 to 6. These contents are displayed
in one line.)
(Display format)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Patient ID (16)

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Patient Name in Ank (20)

(Example of Display)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0 0 1 - 1 2 3 4 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
F U J I T A R O
TP8U0428.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MU-117
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

 MC-1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3360) All pages
10/25/2002 01 Revised (FM3576) 1, 32
01/20/2003 02 Revised (FM3671) 1, 22~24, 30~35
05/15/2003 03 Revised (FM4011) 1, 4, 32, 33, 44, 45, 54, 60~63
11/10/2003 04 Revised (FM4153) 1, 15, 18, 19, 31, 33~35
11/30/2004 05 Revised (FM4508) 1, 2, 7, 7.1~7.4

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-1
 MC-2

PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS,

AND ADJUSTMENTS
This chapter does not describe parts which require no special note or adjustments in
removal and installation.
For details on the removal of these parts, refer to the Parts List.
Also follow the precautions below when performing inspections, replacements, and
adjustments of parts.

WARNING
To prevent electrical shocks, be sure to turn OFF the power of this equipment
before starting work.

WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in “1. SAFETY PRECAUTION” of
“SAFETY PRECAUTION” Chapter.

CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards and
optical units. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic
parts on the boards and optical units.

CAUTION
Never remove the screws painted in red.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
The screws painted in yellow must be adjusted after the installation of parts.
When installing parts, follow the check/adjustment procedure provided.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and
retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set
forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to
properly secure the parts.

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-2
 MC-3

The diagrams in this manual displays the CHECK and FIT ON icons where necessary.
When removing/reinstalling, following these icons.

• CHECK icon: When reinstalling removed parts, this is indicated if reinstalling

positions must be checked or adjusted.
This symbol is shown inside illustrations of parts removal
CHECK procedures. Whenever this is shown, be sure to refer to “■ CHECK/
Adjusting procedure”.

• FIT ON icon: When installing parts, this is indicated if alignment to the boss is
required.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-3
 MC-4

CONTENTS
1. EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 1.1 Front Cover MC-6
1.2 Right Cover MC-7
1.3 Left Cover MC-8
1.4 FDD MC-10
1.5 Power Supply Unit MC-12
1.6 LAN90C Board MC-14
1.7 CPU90K Board MC-18

2. INSTALLING SOFTWARE 2.1 Installing and Upgrading Version of MC-22

AND UPGRADING the Main Unit Software
VERSION 2.2 Installing and Upgrading the Version MC-24
of the DICOM Software
2.3 Installing the Remote Panel Software MC-26
2.4 List of Software Files MC-30

3. BOARD, FDD, REMOTE 3.1 IMG15C Board MC-36

PANEL SETTINGS AND 3.2 FIX90A Board MC-37
LED LIGHTING 3.3 CPU90K Board MC-38
INFORMATION 3.4 HAV90A Board MC-40
3.5 HAV90B Board MC-42
3.6 DVI90A Board MC-48
3.7 DPI90A/DPI90B Board MC-52
3.8 LAN90C Board MC-54
3.9 MTH15B Board MC-55
3.10 Power Supply Unit MC-56
3.11 FDD MC-57
3.12 Remote Panel MC-58
3.13 HAV90E Board MC-60
FP8C0001.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-4
 MC-5

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-5
 1 EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY

FP8C0101.EPS

1 - 1 Front Cover

FP8C0102.EPS

■ Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the front cover.

Front cover

Hook

CHECK

#3
[Remove]
Front cover
#2
[Release] Hook
#1
[Remove] 1-BR3x8 FP8C0103.EPS

■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure.

■ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Check that the hooks on the front cover are fitted properly to the frame of the
equipment.
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-6
 MC-7

BLANK PAGE

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-7
 1 - 2 Right Cover

FP8C0104.EPS

1.2.1 Standard Model

■ Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the front cover.
“1.1 Front Cover”
(2) Remove the right cover.
#1
Right cover [Remove] 3-BR3x6

#3
[Remove] Right cover

Hook

CHECK

#2
[Release] Hook

Hook

CHECK
FP8C0105.EPS

■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure.

■ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Check that the hooks on the right cover are fitted properly to the frame of the
equipment.

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-7.1
 MC-7.2

1.2.2 Electromagnetic Radiation Disturbance Immune Model

■ Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the front cover.
“1.1 Front Cover”
(2) Remove the right cover.

Right cover

#3 Tab
[Remove] Right cover

Hook
#1
CHECK [Remove] 3-BR3x6

#2
[Release] Hook

Hook

CHECK
FP8C0120.EPS

■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure.

■ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Check that the hooks on the right cover are fitted properly to the frame of the
equipment.

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-7.2
 MC-7.3

BLANK PAGE

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-7.3
 MC-7.4

BLANK PAGE

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-7.4
 1 - 3 Left Cover

FP8C0106.EPS

■ Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the front cover.
“1.1 Front Cover”
(2) Remove the right cover.
“1.2 Right Cover”
(3) Remove the left cover.
#1
Left cover [Remove] 4-BR3x6

#3
[Remove] Left cover

Hook

CHECK #2
[Release] Hook

Hook

CHECK

FP8C0107.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-8
 MC-9

■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure.

■ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Check that the hooks on the left cover are fitted properly to the frame of the equipment.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-9
 1 - 4 FDD

FP8C0112.EPS

CAUTION
When handling the FDD, be sure to wear a wristband to discharge static electricity in
the body.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
boards.

■ Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the front cover.
“1.1 Front Cover”
(2) Remove the right cover.
“1.2 Right Cover”
(3) Remove the left cover.
“1.3 Left Cover”
(4) Remove the FDD.
#4
#3 [Remove] 2-BR3x6
[Remove] FDD
#5
[Remove] Bracket

#2
[Loosen] 2-BR3x6

#1
[Disconnect] Connector
FP8C0113.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-10
 MC-11

■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure.

■ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Check the settings of the new FDD installed.

DS0

DS1

H2
IF
DC2

H4
DC
RY
T2
Jumper pin

<FDD information>
TYPE YD-702D-6639D
FP8C0119.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-11
 1 - 5 Power Supply Unit

FP8C0114.EPS

CAUTION
When handling the power supply unit, be sure to wear a wristband to discharge static
electricity in the body.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
boards.

■ Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the front cover.
“1.1 Front Cover”
(2) Remove the right cover.
“1.2 Right Cover”
(3) Remove the left cover.
“1.3 Left Cover”
(4) Remove the FDD.
“1.4 FDD”
(5) Remove the power supply unit.

#1
[Release] Clamp

#2
[Disconnect] Connector
FP8C0115.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-12
 MC-13

#4
[Remove]
Power supply unit #5
[Remove] Switch cover

Power supply unit

#3
[Remove] 6-BR3x6

FP8C0116.EPS

■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure.

■ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
If the power supply unit has been replaced, check/adjust that the DC output voltage is
within the specified value.
“TROUBLESHOOTING 4.3 Checking the DC Voltage”

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-13
 1 - 6 LAN90C Board

FP8C0108.EPS

■ Replacing Procedure
The replacement of the LAN90C board returns the configuration files on the LAN90C
board to default settings. If the LAN configuration has been changed, perform one of
the following three procedures according to the changes made to return the latest LAN
configuration settings.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• After replacing the LAN90C board, start the M-Utility and check the DICOM software
version of the new LAN90C board.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [1-1-5] Check Version”
• After checking the version, if the DICOM software is the old version, upgrade it to the
latest version.
“2.2 Installing and Upgrading the Version of the DICOM Software”

● When the Latest LAN Configuration File FD is Available

(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2) Remove the LAN90C board.
“■ Removing Procedure”
(3) Check the board settings of the new board.
“3.8 LAN90C Board”
(4) Install the new LAN90C board, and turn ON the power of the equipment.
(5) Start the M-Utility.
(6) Load the LAN configuration files from the FD to the LAN90C board.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [2-2-3] Load from FD>”
(7) Turn OFF and then ON the power of the equipment to reboot it.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-14
 MC-15

● When the Latest LAN Configuration File FD is not Available

<REMARKS>
Since LAN configuration files are included in the individual data, saving the individual data also
saves the configuration files. However saving the individual data will take more time than
saving only the LAN configuration files. The loading times of the LAN configuration files and
individual data are the same.

(1) Save the LAN configuration files on the LAN90C board mounted to the
equipment.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [2-2-2] Save to FD>”
(2) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(3) Remove the LAN90C board.
“■ Removing Procedure”
(4) Check the board settings of the new board.
“3.8 LAN90C Board”
(5) Install the new LAN90C board, and turn ON the power of the equipment.
(6) Start the M-Utility.
(7) Load the LAN configuration files saved on a FD at step (1) to the LAN90C board.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [2-2-3] Load from FD>”
(8) Turn OFF and then ON the power of the equipment to reboot it.

● When the Latest LAN Configuration File FD is not Available and Configuration
Files Cannot Be Saved
(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2) Remove the LAN90C board.
“■ Removing Procedure”
(3) Check the board settings of the new board.
“3.8 LAN90C Board”
(4) Install the new LAN90C board, and turn ON the power of the equipment.
(5) Start the M-Utility.
(6) Perform the necessary network settings.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [2] Set Network, [3] Set DICOM, [4] Set Printer, [7] Set
Station”
(7) Turn OFF and then ON the power of the equipment to reboot it.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-15
 MC-16

■ Removing Procedure

CAUTION
When handling the board, be sure to wear a wristband to discharge static electricity in
the body.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
boards.

(1) Remove the front cover.

“1.1 Front Cover”
(2) Remove the right cover.
“1.2 Right Cover”
(3) Remove the left cover.
“1.3 Left Cover”
(4) Remove the FDD.
“1.4 FDD”
(5) Remove the power supply unit.
“1.5 Power Supply Unit”
(6) Remove the bracket.

Bracket
#1
[Remove] 3-BR3x6

#3
[Remove] Bracket #2
[Release] Hook
Hook FP8C0117.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-16
 MC-17

(7) Remove the image interface board.

(8) Remove the LAN90C board.
#2
[Remove] 2-BR4x8
LAN90C board

#1
[Disconnect]
Connector

FP8C0109.EPS

■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-17
 1 - 7 CPU90K Board

FP8C0110.EPS

■ Replacing Procedure

CAUTION
• Replace the CPU board if the lithium battery has worn out.
• Return the old CPU board to the Parts Center (factory).
• Improper replacement of the battery may result in explosion. When replacing the
lithium battery, use the battery designated by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. or use an
equivalent battery. Dispose the old battery as specified by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

<NOTE>
Loading individual data will rewrite LAN configuration settings on the LAN90C board.
If LAN configuration settings in the individual data used here and LAN configuration settings
when the CPU board was replaced differ, re-set the LAN configuration settings.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [2] Set Network, [3] Set DICOM, [4] Set Printer, [7] Set
Station”

(1) If the individual data can be saved (backed up), save it.
This procedure is not required if the latest individual data is already present or if
the individual data cannot be saved.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [1-2-1] Indiv. Data>”
(2) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(3) Remove the CPU board.
“■ Removing Procedure”
(4) Check the settings of the new board.
“3.3 CPU90K Board”
(5) Remove the memory card from the old board and reinstall it in the new one.
(6) Mount the new board onto the equipment, and check connector connections.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-18
 MC-19

(7) Reinstall the parts removed, and turn ON the power of the equipment.
→ “BOOT ERROR” and “00000004” appear on the operation panel.
<REMARKS>
These error messages are appeared due to inconsistency of the backup RAM contents. The
backup RAM will be cleared to zero after the error messages are displayed.

(8) After the above messages appears, wait for more than 10 seconds and then turn
OFF the power of the equipment.
(9) Turn ON the power of the equipment again.
→ Check that the ERROR display LED lights up, and that “ERROR:P:0301” appears on
the operation panel.
<REMARKS>
As the contents of the backup RAM are cleared to zero, the error message appears.

(10) Start the M-Utility.

(11) Initialize the whole area of the BACKUP RAM.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [1-1-2] Init. BkupRAM >”
(12) Set the system date.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [1-1-1] Set Date> ”
(13) Load the individual data saved at step (1) or the latest individual data present.
If the individual data loaded is not the latest or there is no individual data to load,
perform all the following steps.
If the latest individual data has been loaded, perform step (18).
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [1-2-1] Indiv. Data>”
(14) Check or reset the various parameter settings.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [1-1-3] Set Params>”
(15) Check or reset the various network settings.
"SERVICE MODE 3.3 [2] Set Network, [3] Set DICOM, [4] Set Printer, [7] Set
Station"
(16) For AD-I/F connection, turn OFF and then ON the power supply of the equipment,
and start the remote panel maintenance mode after rebooting the equipment.
For E-I/F connection, perform step (18).
(17) Check or reset the various settings of the remote panel maintenance mode.
“SERVICE MODE 4.2 Maintenance Mode”
(18) Turn OFF and then ON the power of the equipment to reboot it.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-19
 MC-20

■ Removing Procedure

CAUTION
When handling the board, be sure to wear a wristband to discharge static electricity in
the body.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
boards.

(1) Remove the front cover.

“1.1 Front Cover”
(2) Remove the right cover.
“1.2 Right Cover”
(3) Remove the left cover.
“1.3 Left Cover”
(4) Remove the FDD.
“1.4 FDD”
(5) Remove the power supply unit.
“1.5 Power Supply Unit”
(6) Remove the LAN90C board.
“1.6 LAN90C board”

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-20
 MC-21

(7) Remove the CPU90K board.

Memory card
#2
CPU board [Remove] 2-BR4x8
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector

FP8C0111.EPS

■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-21
 MC-22

2. INSTALLING SOFTWARE AND UPGRADING VERSION

Software is provided on 3.5” floppy disks (hereafter referred to as FD).

● Structure of FDs for installation

All FDs for installation, shown below, are 3.5” 1.44 MB FD in the DOS format.
Prior to installation, check that all the following FDs are available.
• Main unit software 4 FDs (1/4 to 4/4)
• DICOM software 2 FDs (1/2, 2/2)

2.1 Installing and Upgrading Version of the Main Unit

Software
When installing or upgrading version of software, copy the contents of the FDs to the
memory card of the CPU90K board.
After replacing memory card, implement full installation.
<NOTE>
• When error occurs during installation of upgrading the version, a warning will be displayed
on the operation panel after installation completes. In this case, repeat from the beginning.
“TROUBLESHOOTING 2. ERROR CODE”
• In [FULL INSTALL], as the individual data will be cleared (becomes the default of the
installation FD), save the individual data beforehand and load it after completing installation.
• In [UPGRADING], the individual data will be preserved.
• When “Set Next FD.” appears on the message display, insert the next FD and perform the
procedure within one hour. After this time, the procedure will be aborted by time-out, in
which case, it must be performed from the beginning again.

(1) Save the individual data if performing full installation.

“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [1-2-1] Indiv. Data>”
(2) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(3) Insert the main unit software FD (1/4) into the FD drive.
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
→ The “Main Unit Soft. UPGRADING” message appears.
(5) To upgrade the version, check that [UPGRADING] is displayed and press
<ENTER>. To perform full installation, select [FULL INSTALL] using the <UP
arrow> and <DOWN arrow> keys, and press <ENTER>.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-22
 MC-23

(6) “CONTINUE?”→<ENTER>
→ The data is copied from the floppy disk to the memory card.
<REMARKS>
• To cancel installation or upgrading version, press <CANCEL> while “CONTINUE?” is
displayed. “CANCELED.” is displayed on the operation panel and an alarm sounds. To
install or upgrade the version again, turn OFF and then ON the power with the FD inserted.
• If connecting AD-I/F, the message “SYSTEM DOWN 0001 Communication error between
operation panel and the main unit.” may appear on the remote panel during installation, and
an alarm will sound. In this case, press [STOP ALARM] and resume installation.

(7) Check that “Set Next FD.” is displayed on the operation panel, and a buzzer
sounds.
(8) Insert the main unit software FD (2/4) into the FD drive.
→ When inserted, copy starts from the FD to the memory card.
(9) Check that “Set Next FD.” is displayed on the operation panel, and a buzzer
sounds.
(10) Perform steps (7) and then (8) with the main unit software FD (3/4, 4/4).
(11) When the main unit software FD (4/4) completes, “Wait for a while” appears on
the operation panel. Then, a buzzer sounds and “COMPLETED” appears.
→ This means that installation and version upgrade have completed normally.
(12) Remove the main unit software FD (4/4) from the FD drive.
(13) Load the individual data if full installation has been performed.
“SERVICE MODE 3.3 [1-2-1] Indiv. Data>”
(14) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
<REMARKS>
Time required for full installation and version upgrading
• (1/4): Approx. 4 minutes
• (2/4): Approx. 1 minute 30 seconds
• (3/4): Approx. 2 minutes
• (4/4): Approx. 5 minutes

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-23
 MC-24

2.2 Installing and Upgrading the Version of the DICOM

Software
(1) Turn ON the power of the equipment, and start the M-Utility.
(2) Insert the DICOM software FD (1/2) into the FD drive.
(3) [2. Set Network>]→<ENTER>→<Down arrow key>→<Down arrow key>→
<Down arrow key>→[2-4. N-Soft V-UPG>]→<ENTER>
(4) “CONTINUE?”→<ENTER>
→ Upgrading of the DICOM software version starts.
(5) A buzzer sounds and “COMPLETED” appears.
→ This means that installation and version upgrade have completed normally.
(6) End the M-Utility.
(7) Remove the DICOM software FD (1/2) from the FD drive.
(8) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
<REMARKS>
• In installation and version upgrading of the DICOM software, the contents of the LAN
configuration file will not be changed.
• The DICOM software FD (2/2) contains configuration files.
• Time required for full installation and version upgrading : Approx. 3 minutes.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-24
 MC-25

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-25
 MC-26

2.3 Installing the Remote Panel Software

The following describes the procedures for installing the remote panel software. The
procedure for version upgrading is the same as installing.
These procedures are the same for the Fuji Medical Laser Imager and Fuji Medical Dry
Imager.

(1) Check the software version of the memory card for installing the remote panel.
(2) Check that the memory card for installing is write-protected.
(3) Remove the screw securing the memory card cover, and remove the memory
card cover.

Memory card cover

FP8C0201.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-26
 MC-27

(4) Insert the memory card for installation in the slot.

Remote panel

Memory card
for remote panel

Label side

Memory card slot

FP3B0902.EPS

(5) Check that the REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the operation panel is set to the
REMOTE side.
(6) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
(7) Turn ON the power of the remote panel.
→ The following message appears and installation starts.

ROM(128K) version x.x yy/mm/dd

CPU HARDWARE STARTUP
MEMORY CARD COPYING

About 30 seconds after, the following message appears.

***Please pull out memory card

(8) Remove the memory card.

After several seconds, installation completes and the following message appears.

NORMAL END
***please power off.

(9) Turn OFF the power of the remote panel.

(10) Attach the memory card cover removed to the remote panel with one screw.
(11) Turn ON the power of the remote panel, and check that the equipment starts up
normally.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-27
 MC-28

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-28
 MC-29

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-29
01.20.2003 FM3671
006-260-02

2.4 List of Software Files

■ Main Unit Software

Memory space used Save to FD Load from FD

Appli-
cable
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

FD File name Details Sub- CPU90K CPU90K CPU90K

No. as
Individual
system LAN90 LAN90 LAN90
BACK C BACK Memory C BACK Memory C
Data UP Memory
card UP card UP card
RAM RAM RAM
FD_NO1.BAT
INSTALL.BAT
INSTALL.EXE
PSYSTEM.PRM System parameter file MFC
CH_DEFLT.PRM Default value file by CH MFC
FILMCONF.TXT Film setting file MFC
MS_ADJPH.PRM Scanning image position adjustment parameter file MFC
MS_GOKI.DAT Scanning image position adjustment parameter file (Individual data) MFC

HD_NUM.DAT Head serial number file MFC/HED

PNL_INFO.TXT Operation panel control information file PNL

1/4 PNL_MSG7.TBL Various language message table PNL

PNL_GAIJ.TBL External character pattern table PNL
FDCHK.TXT Startup FD check setting file UTL
PTN_DATA.TXT Test pattern data file FIF/HED

Stores startup program/formatter main program/printer

SCRIPT.TXT main program configuration information
(Configuration control information)
JAPANESE.MES Japanese message file
ENGLISH.MES English message file

FRENCH.MES French message file

MC-30

MC-30
GERMAN.MES German message file

ITALIAN.MES Italian message file

TP8C0201.EPS
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Memory space used Save to FD Load from FD

Appli-
FD cable CPU90K CPU90K CPU90K
File name Details as Sub-
No. system LAN90 LAN90 LAN90
Individual BACK BACK BACK
Memory C Memory C Memory C
Data UP UP UP
RAM card RAM card RAM card

SPANISH.MES Spanish message file

DRYPIX Link Service Manual

SWEDISH.MES Swedish message file

VRTX32.OS OS (program code)

IFX.OS OS (program code)

Program which operates temporarily at startup.
IPLMAIN.SYS Loads file and implements board status diagnosis, transfers
control to the OS, and extinguishes (program code)
Program which provides the I/F for running the general
OS.ABS OS (Vrtx) on the original board, application I/F, driver I/F,
etc. (program code)
RTSCOPE.OS OS (program code)

DISASM.OS OS (program code)

FILE.TBL Address information required by the BOOT/IPL/OS, loading

information are displayed in batch file format (batch)
1/4
CONFIG.PRM Configuration file
CONFIG2.PRM Configuration file
VIDEOIN.PRM Video input file
VIDEOAJ.PRM Video fine adjustment file
FMTSTD.PRM Standard format definition file
FMTUSER.PRM User format definition file
FMTENTRY.PRM Format number registration file
GAMMA.PRM Gamma table definition file (BAR method)
GAMMA2.PRM Gamma table definition file (SAR method)
LPMOD.PRM LP density characteristics definition file
LUTMOD.PRM LUT change details file (SAR method)
MC-31

MC-31
CDFORM.DAT Hospital individual card format file
TP8C0202.EPS
05.15.2003 FM4011
006-260-03

Memory space used Save to FD Load from FD

Appli-
FD cable CPU90K CPU90K CPU90K
File name Details as Sub-
No. system LAN90 LAN90 LAN90
Individual BACK Memory BACK Memory BACK Memory
Data C C C
UP card UP card UP card
RAM RAM RAM
EXAMENU.PRM (*2) Exposure request menu file
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

MODALITY.PRM (*2) Connection modality file

CHAUSER.PRM ID information film display definition file

KANA1224.FON Character font (1-byte characters kana) file for ID

information film display

IBM1224.FON Character font (special characters) file for ID information

film display

RMTMODEM.PRM Modem information setting file used in remote

maintenance mode
RMT.PRM Control file for remote maintenance mode
RMTSIO.PRM Remote maintenance SIO setting file
FILMCOL.PRM Film base setting file
1/4 DICOMFMT.DAT DICOM print format conversion information setting file
FILMINFO.PRM File for setting default film size to be notified to CR
EX_SORT.DAT File for setting whether to sort to printer equipped with sorter
SORTDEF.DAT File for setting sorting conditions for printer equipped with sorter

SORT_CH.DAT File for setting CH sort default values for printer equipped
with sorter
PSTRTIME.DAT (*1) Printer substitute setting file
IDFMTSTD.PRM (*3) Standard study information format definition file
IDFMTUSR.PRM (*3) User study information format definition file
MODALITY.TXT (*4) Connection modality file
MENULIST.TXT (*3) Examination menu file
MENULSTE.TXT (*3) Examination menu file (For editing of 1-byte characters)
TP8C0203.EPS
(*1): Compatible with main unit software version A01 or later.
MC-32

(*2): Compatible with up to main unit software version A02.

MC-32
(*3): Compatible with main unit software version A03 or later.
(*4): Compatible with main unit software version A03 only.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Memory space used Save to FD Load from FD

Appli-
FD cable CPU90K CPU90K CPU90K
File name Details as Sub-
No. system LAN90 LAN90 LAN90
Individual BACK BACK BACK
C C C
Data UP Memory UP Memory UP Memory
RAM card RAM card RAM card

PSUBSET.DAT (*5) Printer substitute setting file

DRYPIX Link Service Manual

1/4
CDFORM2.DAT (*6) Hospital individual card format expansion file
FD_NO2.BAT
PRT_MAIN.APL Operation panel control program (program code)
VERSION.TXT Version No. file MFC
GOKIBKUP.LST Individual data backup file list UTL
2/4
GOKIFILE.LST Individual data file list UTL
SAVEFILE.LST Save file list UTL
UTLMSG.TXT M-UTL message file UTL
SORTFILE.LST Sorting related file list
FD_NO3.BAT
Implements preliminary process (task startup, acquisition
of various resources, registration, etc.) for starting the
3/4 STARTUP.APL system which starts after the OS. When its role ends,
it sets into the idling state, runs the knightrider of the
CPU board LED, and informs the state of the system.
FMT_MAIN.APL Main program of the formatter
FD_NO4.BAT
HOST1CH.TCD Connection data file (Program code)

HSTS1.APL Program enabling connection with the LP I/F compatible

model such as FCR etc.
FUJI_STD.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming
4/4 TOSHIBA.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming
YOKOGAWA.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming
HITACHI.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming
SHIMADZU.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming
MC-33

MC-33
TP8C0204.EPS
(*5): Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later.
(*6): Compatible with main unit software version A05 or later.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

Memory space used Save to FD Load from FD

Appli-
FD cable CPU90K CPU90K CPU90K
File name Details as Sub-
No. system LAN90 LAN90 LAN90
Individual BACK Memory BACK Memory BACK Memory
Data C C C
UP card UP card UP card
RAM RAM RAM
SIEMENS.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

M952_3M.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming

P831_3M.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming
M952H_3M.ABS Program for protocol control of auto-filming
FUJI_STD.TXT Fuji standard configuration information file
TOSHIBA.TXT Toshiba configuration information file
YOKOGAWA.TXT Yokogawa configuration information file
HITACHI.TXT Hitachi configuration information file
SHIMADZU.TXT Shimadzu configuration information file
SIEMENS.TXT Siemens configuration information file
M952_3M.TXT 3M M952 configuration information file
P831_3M.TXT 3M P831 configuration information file
4/4 M952H_3M.TXT 3M M952HSA configuration information file
FLAT.IMG Test pattern image data (FLAT)
FLAT.INF Test pattern image information (FLAT)
SMPTE.IMG Test pattern image data (SMPTE)
SMPTE.INF Test pattern image information (SMPTE)
RESPIMG1.IMG Honorary title character image data file
RESPIMG1.INF Honorary title character image information file
RESPIMG2.IMG Honorary title character image data file
RESPIMG2.INF Honorary title character image information file
RESPIMG3.IMG Honorary title character image data file
RESPIMG3.INF Honorary title character image information file
MC-34

MC-34
RESPIMG4.IMG Honorary title character image data file
RESPIMG4.INF Honorary title character image information file
TP8C0205.EPS
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
■ DICOM Software

Memory space used Save to FD Load from FD

Appli-
FD cable CPU90K CPU90K CPU90K
File name Details as Sub-
No. system LAN90 LAN90 LAN90
Individual BACK Memory BACK Memory BACK Memory
Data C C C
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

UP card UP card UP card

RAM RAM RAM
FD_NO1.BAT

1/2 TDASHLAN.out DICOM application software

SOFTINF.PRM Software version file
netinf.prm Network information file
dicom.cfg DICOM environment setting file
printer.cfg (*1) Printer setting definition file
2/2
linkpc.cfg (*1) DRYPIX Station setting file

linkpc2.cfg (*2) DRYPIX Station setting file

ocrimg.prm (*2) OCR image cutout information file

TP8C0206.EPS
(*1): Compatible with DICOM software version A02 or later.
(*2): Compatible with DICOM software version A04 or later, however the OCR function is currently not available.
MC-35

MC-35
 MC-36

3. BOARD, FDD, REMOTE PANEL SETTINGS

AND LED LIGHTING INFORMATION
CAUTION
This section describes only the settings and adjustments required in field servicing.
Do not adjust, replace, or change the settings of volumes, switches, and fuses of
boards not described.

3.1 IMG15C Board

CN13
CN12
CN11

J4 J1
CN97

CN96

CN1 CN2
Jumper pin

J4

∗ J1 : No Jumper (Not used) FP8C0314.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-36
 MC-37

3.2 FIX90A Board

S4 S5 S6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF OFF OFF

S1

S2 D1~D7 S3 S4 S5 S6

CN3

CN1 CN2

1
2
3
4
Input Ch S1 Setting S2 Setting
(Rotary SW)
1ch 1 1
S1: Address setting
Invalid Others S2: Slot No. setting O
F
S3 F
S6 Setting
bit Contents Setting S3 Setting (Not used) S4 Setting S5 Setting
1 Remote control OFF bit Setting bit Setting bit Setting
input/output setting
2 OFF 1~4 ALL OFF 1~8 ALL OFF 1~8 ALL ON

3 ON

4 ON

5 E I/F ON
parity
6 ON

7 OFF

8 OFF

<LED Lighting Information>

LED Name Information
D1(CBSY) Lights up when CBSY bit in CHANNEL BSY, TRANSFER CONTROL REG (TCR) turns ON.
D2(FIXINT) Lights up when the interrupt request from FIX90A is active.
D3(PGSNC) Lights up during active period of the PGSYNC signal on the interface
D4(LNCK) Lights up during active period of the LNCLK signal on the interface
D5(TDR) Lights up when corresponding bit in the TRANSFER DIRECTION (TCR) turns ON
D6(REQ) Lights up during active period of the DMA transfer request signal of the EIF010 gate array
D7(ACK) Lights up during active period of the transfer response signal to the EIF010 gate array
FP8C0301.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-37
 MC-38

3.3 CPU90K Board

<INSTRUCTIONS>
• When obtained as spare parts, as bits 3 and 4 of S3 are set to OFF, be sure to set
them to ON.
• When using the CPU90K board in this equipment, CN4 will functions without a
jumper. However to prevent losing the jumper pins, short-circuit pins 1 and 3.

CN18 J3
CN11
D15 D14~D9 D8~D1
S2 S1

S4 1 1

OFF

OFF
CN5 24
13 CN4 2 2
13
3 3
4 4
S3
CN1 BAT1 CN2
5 5
6 6
1 2 3 2 4 OFF
Jumper pin
7 7
Jumper pin 8 8
CN5
1 3 4 3 2 1
CN4 S3 S2 S1

∗ J3 : No Jumper (Not used) FP8C0310.EPS

S1 Settings S2 Settings
bit Contents Setting bit Contents Setting
1 FD format 1, 2 - OFF
OFF: IBM 1.44M Always: OFF
3 - ON
2 ON: Self-diagnosis memory full
check mode 4 - OFF
Always OFF
OFF: Self-diagnosis diagnosis 5 Machine settings ON
memory check mode 6 - OFF
3 Not used Always OFF 7, 8 - ON
4 ON: I/O tracer started
ON: I/O tracer not started Always OFF S3 Setting
5 Memory card copy mode bit Contents Setting
specification
Always OFF 1 OFF: CPU cache invalid
ON: Copied from card A to card B Always OFF
OFF: Normal use ON: CPU cache valid

6 Valid only during the function test OFF: Nonmaskable

memory card R/W test 2 interruption valid Always OFF
performed/not performed Always OFF ON: Nonmaskable
ON: Test is performed interruption invalid
OFF: Test is not performed ON: Power is supplied from
Image memory during initialization 3 backup battery to backup Always ON
7
self-diagnosis RAM and timer IC
Test range OFF: Power is not supplied
Always OFF from backup battery to
ON: Full test of bits 1 to 11 4 Always ON
OFF: Test of bits 1 to 8 backup RAM and timer IC
(Bits 9 to 11 are not tested)
8 Recording mode S4
ON: Preliminary Always OFF Reset switch: Resets the CPU90K and peripheral circuits
OFF: Normal use TP8C0302.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-38
 MC-39

LED Information
D1~D8(0~7) Repeatedly turns on and off while CPU90K is operating.
D9(CARD0) Lights up when the program memory card is accessed (card slot A)
D10(CARD1) Lights up when the install memory card is accessed (card slot B)
D11(BERR) Lights up when BERR generates
D12(TOUT) Lights up when timeout generates
D13(INT) Lights up when interrupt generates
D14(RST) Lights up when the reset switch is operated or when the software reset command is issued
D15(PWR) Lights up when +5V power is supplied

<Lighting State of D1 to D8 at Start Up>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power supply on Lit OFF

Hardware initialization
Mounting environment
check
Indicates the self-diagnosis test number
Self-diagnosis

Program load

OS start

TCD research end

OS initialization end
Memory partition
compilation end

Rtscope start end

Ul task generation end

While the CPU is
operating, each LED
goes off one by one
repeatedly.
(The LEDs light up and
go off repeatedly
starting from LED1.)
TP8C0304.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-39
 MC-40

3.4 HAV90A Board

TP105 TP12 R302 R301

AGND ADIN GAIN OFFSET

S1 ON(S2)OFF D8
Side View
Side View

Connector for selecting filter

Connector for setting presence/
absence of serration pulse F20M 20 MHz low pass filter inserted
With serration pulse CN15:NO F40M 40 MHz low pass filter inserted
Without serration pulse CN15:SP F80M 80 MHz low pass filter inserted
TH No filter
PLL lock Check pin for
display LED adjusting
GAIN, OFFSET

D2 D1
TP105 R302 CN9
S1 S2 D8 A•IN
TP12 CN7
AGND R301
CN8
A•OUT

Switch for
adjusting HOST
Control for
sync phase CN15 adjusting GAIN
signal CN16 HD•CS

Control for
adjusting OFFSET VD
F1
PANEL

CN1 CN2

Connector for adjusting pixel deviation

RG: No delay of the sampling clock
count start signal
IR: Delay of the sampling clock count start signal

<LED Lighting Information>

D1(FRAM) D2(BSY) HAV90A Board State
OFF OFF Standby
OFF Lit During bus control transfer
Lit Lit During image input

LED Information
D8 Lit: When PLL is locked
OFF: 1n12/1n10 error occurs during store
FP8C0302.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-40
 MC-41

HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch (S1, S2)

CN8 configuration

3
ID

O
O

F
F
F
F
RS422 setting

ID 2
ID
C 1
8
N

2
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
2
1
Fixed to OFF
because not
Rotary switch for HAV90A used

O
F
F

F
F
HAV board setup board input channel
(factory default setup) select (S4, S5) RS232C setting
ID1 ID2 S5 S4

2
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3

1
IN ch (SLOT) (ADR) S1 S2
1ch 1 1
CN5
Invalid Others Location for
retaining spare
connector (s)
(Version H or later)
S5 S4
CN8 S1 S2
CN11
CN12 A•IN
CN13 CN10
CN7

CN8
A•OUT

HOST
CN15
HD•CS
CN801
VD
F1
PANEL
Connector for selecting video signal
pixel clock frequency
CN1 CN801 Pixel clock frequency CN2
<20M Less than 20 MHz
≥20M 20 MHz or higher

Connector for selecting video signal type

CN15
Video signal type CN11 CN10
With serration pulse Without serration pulse Connector for switching video signal input/output
Composite NO SP CS CV This setup should
normally be used CN7 Buffer output
Component &
NO SP CS SV regardless of the
Composite-sync BF TH
connection type
of the external OP TR
Component &
NO SS SV
HD & VD devices CN8 75 Ω termination
(HOST/CRT).
Connector for selecting horizontal sync interval of video signal If glitches such as
CN12/CN13 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal sync frequency improper CN7 Through output
brightness occur
H80K 12.500~13.333µs 75~80kHz BF TH
with the CRT
connected to the OP TR
H75K 13.333~20.000µs 50~75kHz
A·OUT connector CN8 Termination OFF
H50K 20.000~27.027µs 37~50kHz when the power is
turned ON/OFF.
H37K 27.027~37.037µs 27~37kHz
H27K 37.037~50.000µs 20~27kHz
H20K 50.000~64.516µs 15.5~20kHz

<Fuse Information>
No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use
F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to the remote panel FP5C0A07.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-41
 MC-42

3.5 HAV90B Board

Connector for selecting filter(CN9, CN18)
Connector for setting presence/ CN9 CN18
absence of serration pulse F20M:20 MHz low pass filter inserted
With serration pulse CN15:NO F40M:40 MHz low pass filter inserted
Without serration pulse CN15:SP1 F80M:80 MHz low pass filter inserted
(SP3: invalid) TH :No filter

Check pin for adjusting

GAIN, OFFSET
AGND D2 D1

S1 S2
D8 R301 R302
PLL lock TP12 TP105 A•IN
display LED

CN15 CN19
A•OUT
Switch for CN18
adjusting sync
phase signal HOST
CN9
CN8 CN7
Control for
adjusting OFFSET HD•CS
CN16
Control for
adjusting GAIN VD
F1
PANEL

CN1 CN2

Connector for adjusting pixel deviation

RG: No delay of sampling clock
count start signal
IR: Delay of sampling clock count start signal

<LED Lighting Information>

D2 (BSY) D1 (FRAM) HAV90B Board State
OFF OFF Standby
Lit OFF During bus control transfer
Lit Lit During image input

LED Information
D8 Lit: When PLL is locked
OFF: 1n12/1n10 error occurs during store

FP8C0303.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-42
 MC-43
Connector for selecting sync signal polarity of video signal
(effective only when CN10 is set to SV)
CN14 CN17 Remarks
Connector for selecting horizontal sync interval of video signal Polarity (horizontal sync) (vertical sync)
CN12/CN13 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal sync frequency
Negative LA (factory default) LA(factory default setup) Use the factory
H80K 12.500~13.333µs 75~80kHz default setting
Positive HA HA fixed
H75K 13.333~20.000µs 50~75kHz
H50K 20.000~27.027µs 37~50kHz
Switching for A•OUT connector termination
H37K 27.027~37.037µs 27~37kHz
When connected in the order
H27K 37.037~50.000µs 20~27kHz of HOST, CRT, and HAV90B 75 Ω
board;or when no CRT is termination
H20K 50.000~64.516µs 15.5~20kHz connected OP TR
When connected in the order
of HOST, HAV90B board, Termination
CN8 configuration OFF
and CRT OP TR
3
ID

ID 2
ID
C 1

HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch

8
N

(S1, S2) S1 S2

O
O

F
F
F
F
Rotary switch for HAV90B board
HAV board setup input channel select (S4, S5) RS422 setting
(factory default setup) S5 S4

2
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
2
1
IN ch (ADR) (SLOT) Fixed to OFF
ID1 ID2
because not
1ch 1 1 used

O
F
F

F
F
Invalid Others
Location where the RS232C setting
CN12/CN13 short pins

2
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3

1
are packed when
shipped
S5 S4
CN8 S1 S2

CN17 A•IN
CN12 CN11 CN14
CN13 CN10
CN15 CN19 A•OUT
Connector for selecting
video signal pixel
clock of video signal; HOST
fixed at ≥20M CN8 CN7
(i. e. 20 MHz or higher)
HD•CS

CN801
VD
F1
PANEL

CN1 CN2
Connector for switching video signal input/output
This setup should
Connector for selecting video signal type normally be used CN8 CN7
regardless of the OP BF
CN15 (SP3 is invalid) connection type of
Video signal type CN10 CN11 TR TH
With serration pulse Without serration pulse the external
Composite CV CS NO SP1
devices 75 Ω
(HOST/CRT). Buffer output
termination
Component & If glitches such as
SV CS NO SP1
Composite-sync improper CN8 CN7
Component & brightness occur
SV SS NO with the CRT OP BF
HD & VD
connected to the TR TH
A·OUT connector
when the power is Termination Through output
turned ON/OFF. OFF
<Fuse Information>
No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use
F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to the remote panel
FP8C0304.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-43
 MC-44

■ Checkpoints of Various Signals on HAV90A/HAV90B Board

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Check all the following checkpoints on the AVE board.

● Checkpoints of Input Video Signal

• TP8 (VIN)-AGND
Monitor the input video signals (composite/component) from the host.
<NOTE>
The signals cannot be monitored without power supplied to the HAV board.

Approx. 1Vp-p
No sync signal for component video
FP8C0317.EPS

• TP10 (VOUT)-AGND
The same signal as TP8 can also be monitored using the returned output signal check
terminal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Terminate at 75 Ω and then measure.

• TP14 (HDCS)-AGND
Monitor the input horizontal (or composite) sync from the host for the component video.
<NOTE>
If the monitored signal is positive polarity, it can be inverted by CN14. (Only HAV90B)

Example of composite sync signal

2.5V

GND FP8C0319.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-44
 MC-45

• TP15 (VD)-AGND
Monitor the input vertical sync from the host for separate sync.
<NOTE>
If the monitored signal is positive polarity, it can be inverted by CN17. (Only HAV90B)

2.5V
Vsync tip

FP3F0S12.EPS
GND

• TP20 (HSL)-GND
Check the horizontal sync period with the horizontal sync signal (signal serving as
reference of the PLL circuit) after sync separation.
5V

GND
1H FP3F0S13.EPS

• TP22 (VSL)-GND
Check the vertical sync period with the vertical sync signal after sync separation.
5V

1V

GND FP3F0S14.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-45
 MC-46

● PLL Lock Check on AVE Board

• TP25 (FR)
Horizontal sync signal removed from the video signal from the host (Reference signal
of the PLL circuit)

• TP24 (FV)
Comparison signal of horizontal sync period (Count up signal generated by counting
clocks generated in the PLL circuit for one line)

The PLL is locked if the two signals above are stationary in a fixed phase relation.
<REMARKS>
• The LED (D8) lights up when the PLL is locked.
• The PLL may not be completely locked even if this LED is lit.

4V
FR
GND Magnification

5V
FV
GND
Several ten ns
FP3F0S15.EPS

● Power Supply Checkpoints on the AVE Board

TP1(AVDD) - AGND Analog +15V power supply
TP2(AVCC) - AGND Analog +15V power supply (Generated in the AVE board)
TP3(AVEE1) - AGND Analog -5.2V power supply (Generated in the AVE board)
TP4(AVEE2) - AGND Analog -5.2V power supply (Generated in the AVE board: Used mainly in the AD converter)
TP5(AVSS) - AGND Analog -15V power supply
TP6(VCC) - GND Digital +5V power supply
TP7(EVEE) - EGND Digital -5.2V power supply (For ECL logic)
TP33(P12V) - AGND Analog +12V power supply (Generated in the AVE board: Used mainly in the video amplifier)
TP11(M2V) - AGND Analog -2V reference voltage (Generated in the AVE board: Used for the ADC reference)
TP28(P8V) - AGND Analog +8V power supply (Generated in the AVE board: Amplifier power supply of the PLL)
TP34(M5V) - AGND Analog -5V power supply (Generated in the AVE board: Used mainly in the PLL circuit)
(HAV90B)
TP3F0S44.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-46
 MC-47

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-47
 MC-48

3.6 DVI90A Board

CN8 configuration
3 HOST I/F RS232c/RS422 select switch (S1, S2)
ID

O
O

F
F
F
F
ID 2
ID
1
8
RS422 setup
N
C

2
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
2
1
Rotary switch for DV190A
board input channel select (S4, S5) Fixed to OFF
DVI board setup because not
(factory default setup) S5 S4 used

O
F
F

F
F
IN ch (SLOT) (ADR)
ID2
RS232C setup
1ch 1 1

2
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3

1
ID1 Invalid Other S1 S2

S5 S4
CN8 S1 S2

CN6 DIGITAL
CN5 VIDEO

CN4
CN50 HOST
CN51

CN18
CN13
F1 PANEL

CN1 CN2

Connector for selecting Connector for Connector selecting pixel clock Connector for selecting sync
video signal type selecting pixel clock rising edge/falling edge of signal polarity of video signal
frequency of video video signal (Supported by H/K version)
signal (Supported by H/K version) Factory default setup
Factory default setup
1 CN50 (Horizontal sync)
HS LS

CS Component & Less than CN51 (Vertical sync)

2
SS HD & VD 40 MHz
CLKH
3 Falling edge NOM Normal sync
CLKL polarity
REV (Factory default
1
HS LS

CS Component & Over 40 MHz setup)

2 to less than CLKH Rising edge NOM
SS Composite-sync 80 MHz (Factory default
3 CLKL setup)
Reversed
REV
sync polarity

CN5/CN6 Connector for selecting horizontal sync interval of video signal

VR CN5/CN6 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal sync frequency
H70K
H50K H70K 14.286~20.000µs 50~70kHz
H37K H50K 20.000~27.027µs 37~50kHz
H37K 27.027~36.364µs 27.5~37kHz
VR Invalid
FP8C0305.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-48
 MC-49

Sync phase signal

adjustment switch (S1)

Interlace acquisition start line switching connector S1 Phase delay

(Supported by version G or later)
0 0ns
Acquisition start line ODD setting 1 2ns
(factory default setup)
ODD EVEN 2 4ns
Acquisition start line EVEN setting 3 6ns
ODD EVEN 4 8ns
(Only Q1 labeled on the EVEN side for G/J version) 5 10ns
6 12ns
7 14ns

D2 D1

S1 DIGITAL
VIDEO

CN450
HOST

F1 PANEL

CN1 CN2

<LED Lighting Information>

D1(FRAM) D2(BSY) DVI90A Board State
OFF OFF Standby
OFF Lit During bus control transfer
Lit Lit During image input

<Fuse Information>
No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use
F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to the remote panel

FP5C0A22.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-49
 MC-50

■ Checkpoints on DVI Board

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Check all the following checkpoints on the DVE board.

● Checkpoints of Signals from the Host

• TP17 (EXCLK)-EGND
Pixel clocks supplied from the host (ECL level)

FP3F0S16.EPS

• TP11 (LSB)-GND
Monitor the LSB of the digital video signal (digital video signal) after sampling
<NOTE>
When the pixel clock is above 20 MHz, the signals from the host are not completely the same
for division sampling.

5V

GND
FP3F0S17.EPS

• TP14 (EXHD)-GND
Monitor of horizontal (or composite) sync signal (after conversion from differential ECL
to TTL).
<NOTE>
If the monitored signal is positive polarity, it can be inverted by CN50.

Example of composite sync signal

5V

GND FP3F0S18.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-50
 MC-51

• TP50 (EXVD)-GND
Monitor the vertical sync signal (separate sync, only when input from the host) (after
conversion from differential ECL to TTL).
<NOTE>
If the monitored signal is positive polarity, it can be inverted by CN51.

5V

FP3F0S19.EPS
GND

• TP26 (VDH)-GND
Check the vertical sync period with the internal vertical sync signal (vertical sync signal
waveform-shaped after sync separation).
5V
1V

GND FP3F0S20.EPS

• TP20 (HDH)-GND
Check the horizontal sync period with the internal horizontal sync signal (horizontal
sync signal waveform-shaped after sync separation).
1H

5V

GND
FP3F0S21.EPS

● Power Supply Checkpoints on DVE Board

TP1 (D5V) - DGOUT +5V input power supply
TP3 (VCC) - GND +5V logic power supply (Filtered input power supply)
TP6 (M5R2V) - EGOUT -5.2V input power supply
TP8 (EVEE) - EGND -5.2V ECL power supply (Filtered input power supply)
TP9 (EXVEE) - EXGND -5.2V terminated power supply (Power supply for terminating signal
supplied together with the digital video signal from the host)
TP3F0S45.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-51
 MC-52

3.7 DPI90A/DPI90B Board

T1 setting Setting time T1 setting Setting time T2 setting Setting time T3 setting Setting time
0 500ns 8 128µs 0 150ns 0 150ns
1 1µs 9 256µs 1 250ns 1 250ns
2 2µs A 512µs 2 500ns 2 500ns
3 4µs B 1.024ms 3 1µs 3 1µs
4 8µs C 2.048ms 4 2µs 4 2µs
5 16µs D 4.096ms 5 4µs 5 4µs
6 32µs E 8.192ms 6 8µs 6 8µs
7 64µs F 16.384ms 7 16µs 7 16µs
8 32µs 8 32µs
9 64µs 9 64µs
∗ CN6, CN7 : Not used
A 102µs A 102µs
∗ JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5 : No Jumper (Not used)
B~F Invalid B~F Invalid

Rotary switch for image data transfer request Image data parity setting (S7-1, -2)
signal width setting (T1, T2, T3) OFF
T1 None
DAREQ 2 1
[Normal] (OFF time)
T1 T2 OFF
[Retransmission DAREQ Odd
request] (OFF time) 2 1
REP OFF
(ON time) T3 Even
2 1

JP2 CN3
S7 S6
CN7 ADR SLOT T3 T2 T1 DIGITAL
JP1 DATA
JP3
CN4
S8
HOST
JP4
JP5 F3 F4
CN5
PANEL
CN6
F1 F2

CN1 CN2

HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch HOST-I/F baud rate select switch
(S8, S6-6) (S6-1-4)
RS232C setup RS422 setup OFF
9600 bps setup
Rotary switch for selecting S8 S8 4 3 2 1
DPI90A/DPI90B board
OFF

OFF
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

input channel OFF

IN ch ADR SLOT 4800 bps setup

4 3 2 1
1ch 1 1
OFF
Invalid Other
2400 bps setup
4 3 2 1
S6 S6
OFF OFF OFF
1200 bps setup
6 6 4 3 2 1

FP8C0308.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-52
 MC-53

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6

CN3
ADR SLOT DIGITAL
DATA

CN4
HOST

F3 F4

CN6 CN5
F1 F2 PANEL

CN1 CN2
FP8C0306.EPS

<LED Lighting Information>

LED Information
D1 Lights up during DPI board operations (during image data reading, transfer, etc.)
D2 Lights up when the DPI board ends abnormally (when control is ended due to line count
number error generated during DPI board operations)
D3 Monitor of MODE signal from image diagnosis device (Valid only during DPI board operations)
Lights up when the MODE signal is "H"
Goes off when the MODE signal is "L"
D4 Monitor of CLK signal from image diagnosis device (Valid only during DPI board operations)
Lights up when the CLK signal is "H"
Goes off when the CLK signal is "L"

D5 Monitor of DAREQ signal to image diagnosis device (Valid only during DPI board operations)
Lights up when the DAREQ signal is "H"
Goes off when the DAREQ signal is "L"
D6 Monitor of REP signal to image diagnosis device (Valid only during DPI board operations)
Lights up when the REP signal is "H"
Goes off when the REP signal is "L"

<Fuse Information>
No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use
F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of external output +5V supply cable
(For auto filming special specification destination) (DPI90A only)

F2 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to the remote panel (Both DPI90A/
DPI90B)

F3 0.5A/250V Overcurrent protection of external output +12V supply cable (DPI90B only)

F4 0.5A/250V Overcurrent protection of external output -12V supply cable (DPI90B only)

TP8C0301.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-53
 MC-54

3.8 LAN90C Board

S3
S2 Setting
7
Address setting switch bit Function Setting
Setting: 7 (Fixed) ON: Setting in use of DRYPIX
1 Link Always ON
OFF: -
2 ON : Little endian (Little) Always OFF
OFF: Big endian (Big)
S1 S2 3 ON: Memory test (MEMTEST) Always OFF
Reset switch: O OFF: No memory test (NoTEST)
Resets LAN90C N 4 ON: Function test (FT) Always OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
board OFF: OS boot (NORMAL)
5, 6 Not used Always OFF

COL
LINK
S3 S2
CN6 D6~D9 CN7
S1 D11
D12
D13
D10

CN3

CN4

CN1 CN2

<D6 to D9 Lighting and OFF State> Lit OFF

No. Contents 6 7 8 9 No. Contents 6 7 8 9

1 When power is turned ON (Power ON) 8 End of cache enable setting

2 Memory check (All LEDs are lit randomly) 9 End of memory controller initialization of OS
3 End of CPU register settings 10 End of system clock setting

4 End of expansion of OS to the memory 11 End of debug terminal setting

5 Start of interrupt vector address initialization 12 End of initialization of library used

6 End of interrupt vector address initialization 13 Application program loading

7 End of interrupt vector table initialization (All LEDs go off during operations hereafter)

<LED Lighting Information>

LED Information
D10(100) Lights up when connected at 100Mbps, and goes off when connected at 10Mbps.
(100/10Mbps depends on the network environment, while this information is effective when LINK
LED is light.)
D11(FDPOL) Lights up when connected by full duplex, and goes off when connected by half duplex.
(Full duplex/half duplex communication depends on the network environment, while this information
is effective when LINK LED is light.)
D12(RX) Lights up when data is received (actually blinking because data is received in units of packet).
D13(TX) Lights up when data is transmitted (actually blinking because data is transmitted in units of packet).
LINK(CN7 internal
Lights up when network physical layer link is established (communicatable state).
green LED)
COL(CN7 internal Lights up when collision occurs (communication collision by simultaneous data transmission from
yellow LED) multiple devices). (This usually occurs, but frequency may be higher according to the network
environment, resulting in delayed data transfer.)
FP8C0309.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-54
 MC-55

3.9 MTH15B Board

CN5 CN6
CN91
CN3 CN4
CN90
J1
CN1 CN2
CN51
CN7 TP1 TP3 TP2 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7
CN8
CN9

∗ J1 : No Jumper (Not used)

<Check Pin for Measuring DC Voltage>

Check Pin No. Voltage
TP4 (+5V) – TP7 (GND) +5V ±2%
TP5 (+5VS) – TP7 (GND) +5V ±2%
TP1 (-5.2V) – TP2 (GND) -5.2V ±2%
TP6 (+15V) – TP7 (GND) +15V ±2%
TP3 (-15V) – TP2 (GND) -15V ±2%
FP8C0312.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-55
 MC-56

3.10 Power Supply Unit

-5.2V-15V +5V +5VS+15V

FP8C0311.EPS

<VR information>
No. Function Measured Position Specification
+5V +5V output adjustment VR MTH15B baord/TP4 (+5V) – TP7 (GND) +5V ±2%
+5VS +5VS output adjustment VR MTH15B board/TP5 (+5VS) – TP7 (GND) +5V ±2%

-5.2V -5.2V output adjustment VR MTH15B board/TP1 (-5.2V) – TP2(GND) -5.2V ±2%

+15V +15V output adjustment VR MTH15B board/TP6 (+15V) – TP7 (GND) +15V ±2%

-15V -15V output adjustment VR MTH15B board/TP3 (-15V) – TP2 (GND) -15V ±2%
TP8C0303.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-56
 MC-57

3.11 FDD

DS0

DS1

H2
IF
DC2

H4
DC
RY
T2
Jumper pin

<FDD information>
TYPE YD-702D-6639D

FDD

<FDD information>
TYPE YD-702D-6639D
FP8C0313.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-57
 MC-58

3.12 Remote Panel

O
1 2 3 4 N

LED5 SW1 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW4

SW1 setting SW4 setting (ON when set to down)

When 1 panel/ch, or bit Function Setting
Set to left side
(Setting of first panel) first panel in 2 panel/ch 1 OFF: Setting of first remote panel Follow SW1
connection
ON: Setting of second remote panel setting
Setting to right side
Second panel in 2 panel/ch 2 Not used Always OFF
(Setting of second
connection 3 bit3 bit4
panel)
OFF OFF Normal mode/installation mode
ON OFF IPL test Full check
4
OFF ON Hardware test
ON ON Mode using installed memory card

<LED1 to LED4 Lighting and OFF State>

4 3 2 1
When power is turned ON (Power ON) Lit OFF

When hardware is initialized

When hardware is checked

When file (program) is loaded

When processing ends
(Control transferred to FRM)
When error occurs in IPL Lights up and goes off repeatedly

While the CPU is operating, each LED

goes off one by one repeatedly.
(The LEDs light up and go off
repeatedly starting from LED1.)

<LED5 Lighting and OFF State>

FP8C0307.EPS
Lit when accessing memory card

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-58
 MC-59

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-59
 MC-60

3.13 HAV90E Board

Switch for setting MASK
S3 : FRONTMASK Check pin for measuring
vertical sync signal (VSYNCL)
S4 : BACKMASK

Check pin for measuring

MASK signal (MASK)
Switch for selecting filter
PLL lock 1-OFF : No filter
Check pin for adjusting 2-80M : 80 MHz low pass filter inserted
Adjustment display LED
GAIN, OFFSET (ADIN) 3-40M : 40 MHz low pass filter inserted
mode display
LED 4-20M : 20 MHz low pass filter inserted

AGND Check pin for measuring

Switch for adjusting input video signal (VIN)
sync signal phase
D2 D1

S6 S5 S301S300 S303 S302 S9

A•IN
TP21 TP30 TP23TP24 TP7
D11 S4 S3 D7 S1
CN8
CN19 A•OUT
CN7 TP14
Adjustment
mode switch
TP29 HOST

HD•CS
Check pin for measuring
S21 AUTOGAIN
separate sync signal
execution switch
(HDCS) VD
F1
PANEL
Check pin for measuring
PLL lock misalignment
(UNLOCK)
CN1 CN2
Switch for adjusting GAIN
Switch for adjusting S302 : Rough adjustments
CHARGE POMP S303 : Fine adjustments

Switch for adjusting OFFSET

S300 : Rough adjustments
S301 : Fine adjustments
<LED Lighting Information>
D1 (FRAM) D2 (BSY) HAV90E Board State
OFF OFF Standby
OFF Lit During bus control transfer
Lit Lit During image input

LED Information
D7 Lit: When PLL is locked
OFF: 1n12/1n10 error occurs during store
D11 Lit: When adjustment mode switch (S6) is ON
OFF: When adjustment mode switch (S6) is OFF

FP8C0315.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-60
 MC-61

Switch for selecting horizontal sync interval of video signal

S12/S13 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal sync frequency
Switching connector for A•OUT connector termination
100K 10.000~13.333µs 75~100kHz
When connected in the order
75K 13.333~20.000µs 50~75kHz of HOST, CRT, and HAV90E TR 75 Ω
board;or when no CRT is OP termination
50K 20.000~27.027µs 37~50kHz connected
37K 27.027~37.037µs 27~37kHz When connected in the order TR Termination
27K 37.037~50.000µs 20~27kHz of HOST, HAV90E board,
OP OFF
and CRT
20K 50.000~64.516µs 15.5~20kHz

HAV board setup CN8 configuration HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch
(factory default setup) (S1, S2) S1 S2

3
ID

O
O

F
F
F
F
ID1 ID2
RS422 setting

ID 2
ID
C 1
8
N

2
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
2
1
Fixed to OFF
because not
Rotary switch for HAV90E board used

O
S18

F
F

F
F
PR input channel select (S4, S5)
RS232C setting
S5 S4
NO IN ch (ADR) (SLOT)

2
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3

1
Fixed at
S20 NO setting
PR 1ch 1 1
CN5
NO Invalid Others Location for
retaining spare
connector (s)

S5 S4
CN8 S1 S2

A•IN
S13 S12
CN8
CN19 A•OUT
S18
CN7

S20 S14 HOST

CN10
S17 HD•CS

S19 VD
F1
PANEL

Connector for switching video signal input/output

CN1 CN2
This setup should
normally be used CN8 CN7
regardless of the
OP TH
connection type of
Connector/Switch for selecting TR BF
the external
video signal type
devices 75 Ω
(HOST/CRT). Buffer output Switch for selecting sync signal polarity
termination
Video signal type CN10 S19 of video signal
If glitches such as
improper CN8 CN7 (effective only when CN10 is set to SV)
Composite CV CV brightness occur
TH S14 S17
with the CRT OP Polarity (horizontal sync) (vertical sync)
Component &
SV SV connected to the TR BF
Composite-sync
A·OUT connector Negative LA (factory default) LA (factory default)
Component & when the power is Termination Through output
SV SV
HD & VD turned ON/OFF. OFF Positive HA HA

<Fuse Information>
No. Fuse Rating Purpose of Use
F1 1A/250V Overcurrent protection of +15V supply cable to the remote panel FP8C0316.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-61
 MC-62

■ Checkpoints of Various Signals on HAV90E Board

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Check all the following checkpoints on the AVE board.

● Checkpoints of Input Video Signal

• TP7 (VIN)-AGND
Monitor the input video signals (composite/component) from the host.
<NOTE>
The signals cannot be monitored without power supplied to the HAV board.

Approx. 1Vp-p
No sync signal for component video
FP8C0317.EPS

• TP8 (VOUT)-AGND
The same signal as TP7 can also be monitored using the returned output signal check
terminal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Terminate at 75 Ω and then measure.

• TP14 (HDCS)-AGND
Monitor the input horizontal (or composite) sync from the host for the component video.
<NOTE>
If the monitored signal is positive polarity, it can be inverted by S14.

Example of composite sync signal

2.5V

GND FP8C0319.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-62
 MC-63

• TP18 (HSYNCL)-GND
Check the horizontal sync period with the horizontal sync signal (signal serving as
reference of the PLL circuit) after sync separation.
5V

GND
1H FP3F0S13.EPS

• TP21 (VSYNCL)-GND
Check the vertical sync period with the vertical sync signal after sync separation.
5V

1V

GND FP3F0S14.EPS

● PLL Lock Check on AVE Board

• TP29 (UNLOCK)-GND
PLL lock misalignment can be monitored.

5V PLL lock misalignment

GND PLL lock

FP8C0318.EPS

<REMARKS>
• The LED (D7) lights up when the PLL is locked.
• The PLL may not be completely locked even if this LED is lit.

● Power Supply Checkpoints on the AVE Board

TP1(+5VA) - AGND Analog +5V power supply (Generated in the AVE board)
TP4(-5VA) - AGND Analog -5V power supply (Generated in the AVE board)
TP2(+3.3VA) - GND Digital +3.3V power supply (Generated in the AVE board)
TP5(VCC) - GND Digital +5V power supply
TP8C0305.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual MC-63
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

 PM-1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3360) All pages
01/20/2003 02 Revised (FM3671) 1, 7, 11, 14~17
11/30/2004 05 Revised (FM4508) 1, 2, 4, 16, 17

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-1
 PM-2

1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and
retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set
forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to
properly secure the parts.

1.1 Preventive Maintenance Items

Periodic
Refer to Item Interval Work Time replacement Remarks
requirements (Min.) parts
3.1 Checking Error Log 1Y 5 M-Utility (Error log)

3.2 Checking Film Output and Images 1Y 10 M-Utility/Remote panel service

option (Test pattern)

3.3 Checking the Power Supply 1Y 5 Tester

Voltage
3.4 Checking the Fan Operations 1Y 1

Cleaning the Louver 1Y 3 Vacuum cleaner

3.5
Replacing the Louver 3Y 3 Louver
3.6 Cleaning Inside the Equipment 1Y 5 Vacuum cleaner

3.7 Reinstalling and Cleaning Covers 1Y 5 Moistened cloth

1Y 10 M-Utility/Remote panel service

3.8 Checking Final Operations/Images
option (Test pattern)

Checking for Improper Protective 1Y 1

3.9
Grounding

Maintenance Report After 1Y

3.10
Completion
TP8M0101.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-2
 PM-3

1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle

In this chapter, the following symbols are indicated for every maintenance item.
Before beginning the respective maintenance work, be sure to confirm the cycle
indicated by the symbols.

Maintenance to be performed every year.

1Y

Maintenance to be performed every three years.

3Y

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-3
 PM-4

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW

START

3.1 Checking Error Log

3.2 Checking Film Output and Images

3.3 Checking the Power Supply Voltage

3.4 Checking the Fan Operations

3.5 Cleaning/Replacing the Louver

3.6 Cleaning Inside the Equipment

3.7 Reinstalling and Cleaning Covers

3.8 Checking Final Operations/Images

3.9 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding

3.10 Maintenance Report After Completion

END
FP8M0201.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-4
 PM-5

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-5
 PM-6

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.1 Checking Error Log

Check for errors using the M-Utility, and save the error long on a FD 1Y
if necessary before initializing the error log.

■ Procedure
(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2) Remove the front cover.
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
(4) Start the M-Utility.
(5) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-3.
Err.Log Data>] → <ENTER> → [1-3-1. Error Log #1] → <ENTER>
→ The error log #1 display appears.
<REMARKS>
The following shows examples of error logs displayed and error code details.
Example of display)
Pressing <ENTER> repeatedly displays the error code/
date and time the error occurred.

01 : N 0000 0001 02-4-19 13:12

YY : X AAAA BBBB CCCCCC DDDD FP8M0301.EPS

<Details of display>
YY : Index
X : Error source differentiation (P: Printer, F: Formatter, N: Network)
AAAA : Error code (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
BBBB : Detailed error information (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
CCCCCC : Date error occurred
DDDD : Time error occurred

<REMARKS>
For details on error codes, refer to the meaning of error codes, suspected causes, and
remedies in the following chapter.
“TROUBLESHOOTING 2.3 Error Code”

(6) [1-3-3. Clear>] → <ENTER> → [CONTINUE?] → <ENTER>

→ The error log is initialized.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-6
 PM-7

3.2 Checking Film Output and Image

Print the test pattern image from this equipment, and check that there are no 1Y
problems in the images and that the network is operating normally.

■ Procedure

● E-I/F Connection
(1) [5. Test Print>] → <ENTER> → [5-1. Pattern1] → <ENTER>
→ Information on printers connected which are in the printable state and whose
information have been preset in this equipment will be displayed.
(2) Select the printer name (AE Title), and press <ENTER>.
→ The film size input display appears.
(3) Select the film size, and press <ENTER>.
→ The film base color input display appears.
(4) Select the film base color, and press <ENTER>.
→ Check that test print film (SMPTE pattern) is output to the printer selected. Also check
that there are no problems in the output image.

● AD-I/F Connection
(1) Start the maintenance mode from the remote panel.
(2) Select “Installation” - “Action switch” - “Service option”.

[1] [Store] [4] [Store] [8] [Store]

(3) Set input channel number “1” to “Enable”.

(4) Save the configuration, and turn OFF and then ON the power of the remote panel.
→ Check that the SERVICE OPTION icon is displayed on the remote panel.
(5) Select “SERVICE OPTION” and implement “TEST 9 PATTERN 1” of “TEST
PRINT”.
→ Check that test print film (SMPTE pattern) is output to the printer. Also check that
there are no problems in the output image.
<NOTE>
If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version A03
or later, “TEST PRINT” must be implemented with study information in the unidentified state. If
implemented with study information in the identified state, test patterns will not be printed
normally.
Also check that when “TEST PRINT” is implemented, test print film is output to the printer via
DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function).
Data will not be output for storage regardless of whether the Network icon on the remote panel
routine screen is displayed as ON or OFF.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-7
 PM-8

3.3 Checking the Power Supply Voltage

Using a tester, check the DC voltage. 1Y

CAUTION
Observe the following to prevent electric hazards.
• Do not touch the voltage terminals.
• To prevent short-circuit, be sure to use the tester lead.

■ Procedure
(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2) Remove the right cover.
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
(4) Measure the voltage at the following voltage measurement points.
If the voltage differs from the specified values, adjust using the voltage adjustment
volume on the right side of the power supply unit.

■ Measured Voltage Adjustment Volume

<REMARKS>
+5VS is supplied only for lightings the POWER display LED on the operation panel.

● MTH15B Board

Voltage Measured Point Specified Range Adjustment Volume

+5V (VCC) TP4 (+5V) – TP7 (GND) +5V ±2% (+4.90 to +5.10V) +5V

+5V (+5VS) TP5 (+5VS) – TP7 (GND) +5V ±2% (+4.90 to +5.10V) +5VS

-5.2V TP1 (-5.2V) – TP2 (GND) -5.2V ±2% (-5.096 to -5.304V) -5.2V

+15V TP6 (+15V) – TP7 (GND) +15V ±2% (+14.70 to +15.30V) +15V

-15V TP3 (-15V) – TP2 (GND) -15V ±2% (-14.70 to -15.30V) -15V
TP8M0301.EPS

■ Measured Positions

● MTH15B Board

TP1 TP3 TP2 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7

FP8M0304.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-8
 PM-9

■ Measuring Method

Tester lead

FP8M0305.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-9
 PM-10

3.4 Checking the Fan Operations

Check the fan operation. 1Y

■ Procedure
(1) Check the operations and wind direction of the fan at the back of the power supply
unit.
Fan

FP8M0303.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-10
 PM-11

3.5 Cleaning/Replacing the Louver

Clean or replace the louver (air filter).

: Clean : Replace
1Y 3Y

■ Procedure
(1) Remove the louver from the right cover. Using a vacuum cleaner, clean the louver
(air filter).
Right cover

Air filter

Louver

FP8M0302.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-11
 PM-12

3.6 Cleaning Inside the Equipment

Clean the inside of the equipment. 1Y

■ Procedure
(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2) Remove the left cover.
(3) Using a cleaning cloth, vacuum cleaner, etc., remove the dusts and dirt in the
equipment.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-12
 PM-13

3.7 Reinstalling and Cleaning Covers

Wipe covers with moistened cloth. 1Y

■ Procedure
(1) Reinstall the following covers.
• Left cover
• Right cover
• Front cover
<INSTRUCTIONS>
For the E-I/F connection, do not install the front cover because the following needs to
be performed on the operation panel.

(2) Wipe the covers with moistened cloth.

<NOTE>
Check that the covers are not damaged.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-13
 PM-14

3.8 Checking Final Operations/Images

Print the test pattern image from this equipment after completing 1Y
maintenance, and check again that there are no problems in the images and
that the network is operating normally.

■ Procedure

● E-I/F Connection
(1) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
(2) Start the M-Utility.
(3) [5. Test Print>] → <ENTER> → [5-1. Pattern1] → <ENTER>
→ Information on printers connected which are in the printable state and whose
information have been preset in this equipment will be displayed.
(4) Select the printer name (AE Title), and press <ENTER>.
→ The film size input display appears.
(5) Select the film size, and press <ENTER>.
→ The film base color input display appears.
(6) Select the film base color, and press <ENTER>.
→ Check that test print film (SMPTE pattern) is output to the printer selected. Also check
that there are no problems in the output image.
(7) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(8) Reinstall the front cover.

● AD-I/F Connection
(1) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
→ Check that the SERVICE OPTION icon is displayed on the remote panel.
(2) Select “SERVICE OPTION” and implement “TEST 9 PATTERN 1” of “TEST
PRINT”.
→ Check that test print film (SMPTE pattern) is output to the printer. Also check that
there are no problems in the output image.
<NOTE>
If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version A03
or later, “TEST PRINT” must be implemented with study information in the unidentified state. If
implemented with study information in the identified state, test patterns will not be printed
normally.
Also check that when “TEST PRINT” is implemented, test print film is output to the printer via
DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function).
Data will not be output for storage regardless of whether the Network icon on the remote panel
routine screen is displayed as ON or OFF.

(3) Turn OFF and then ON the power of the equipment.

(4) Start the maintenance mode from the remote panel.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-14
 PM-15

(5) Select “Installation” - “Action switch” - “Service option”.

[1] [Store] [4] [Store] [8] [Store]

(6) Set input channel number “1” to “Disable”.

(7) Save the configuration, and turn OFF and then ON the power of the remote panel.
→ Check that the "SERVICE OPTION" icon is not displayed on the remote panel.
(8) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-15
 PM-16

3.9 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding

(1) Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire 1Y

connections are established in the same manner as for installation.

(2) Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are secured and
connected in the same manner as for installation.
(3) Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-16
 PM-17

3.10 Maintenance Report After Completion

After completing maintenance, inform the user. 1Y

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PM-17
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

 SP-1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3359/FM3360) All pages
10/25/2002 01 Revised (FM3575/FM3576) 1, 2, 7, 9, 18
01/20/2003 02 Revised (FM3670) 1, 6, 7, 12~14, 18~21
05/15/2003 03 Revised (FM4010) 1, 9, 11~13, 17, 18
11/10/2003 04 Revised (FM4152) 1, 12, 13, 18
11/30/2004 05 Revised (FM4508) 1, 6~9, 18

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-1
 SP-2

<The RANK guide>

HOW TO USE THE The Fault RANK characters, Handling
RANK characters, and Export regulation-
SERVICE PARTS LIST applicable character are assigned in that
order.
RANK Thus, at least one character or up to three
characters are assigned in the RANK
Handling RANK Characters
column.
(Parts that are handled in a special
manner during parts operation, such as REF.NO.
replacement) The reference number is the part’s
It is assigned only to applicable parts. number on the correspouding service
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty parts diagram. Part with different functions
R Must be returned. Repairable are distinguished by their eutries in the
Q
Must be returned.
Not repairable
REMARKS and SERIAL NUMBER
(We use for analysis.)
columns.
Must not be returned.
(Consumable part. PART NUMBER
T Not repairable
Not applicable for free
of change.) The PART NUMBER is the code number
without
Must not be returned. Not repairable assigned to the individual parts. An
R, Q, T
TP3Z0002.EPS
alphabetic suffix has the following
meanings.
Export Regulation-applicable Character
• Hardware
(Parts without the following designator are The suffix indicates the version number.
not controlled by export regulations.) Version with newer suffixes remain up
It is assigned only to applicable parts. wardly compatible with older ones.
Character Description
• Software
+ Parts applicable to export regulations.
TP3Z0003.EPS
The suffix indicates a difference in the
specifications.
Fault RANK Characters
PART NAME
(which provide reference for determining
the recommended stock quantity) The PART NAME column contains a
All parts are assigned either A thorugh E. general name for a part.
Character Description QTY.
Consumable parts or parts that will be
A The QTY. column gives the number of
replaced at short intervals.
Parts that may become faulty accidentally parts used in the current unit.
B
and have a relatively high failure rate. When the quantity value for a particular
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but part is with the suffix “-S,” it means that the
C are expected to have a relatively high failure
rate.
part is to be issued in packs of 50.
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but Even when the ordered quantity is 1, a
D
are expected to become faulty. bag containing 50 pieces will be supplied.
Parts that are necessary for fault analysis, or
parts that may be needed in case of
E
unexpected accidents such as man-induced
damage.
TP3Z0004.EPS

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-2
 SP-3

REMARKS PRECAUTIONS TO BE OBSERVED WHEN

The REMARKS column gives the specific RETURNING PARTS IN NEED OF REPAIR
name for the part and other special When returning parts in need of repair,
information. pack them in the same manner as for the
supplied substitutes, using the substitute
SERIAL NUMBER
packing materials.
The part used sometimes depends on the The use of different packing materials or
machine shipment number.The SERIAL packing methods may incur damage to
NUMBER column gives the machine packed parts during transit.
shipment number for which the part
applies.
If the column is blank,the part is suitable
for all machine shipment numbers.

QUANTITIES OF RECOMMENDED SPARE

PARTS
We recommend the dollowing guidelines
for determining the number of
replacement parts to keep in stock for the
various breakdown rankings (A,B,C,D,and
E).
These quantities are over and above
those stocked for regularly scheduled
replacements. Adjust the number of
service parts in stock according to N,the
number of units in operation. Q is the
number of parts used in a single system.
• N=1
Rank A = 1 + Q x 0.3
Rank C = 1 + Q x 0.05
Rank D = 1 + Q x 0.02
• 2≤N≤10
Rank A = 2 + N x Q x 0.3
Rank C = 2 + N x Q x 0.05
Rank D = 1 + N x Q x 0.02
• 11≤N≤300
Rank A = 3 + N x Q x 0.3
Rank C = 3 + N x Q x 0.05
Rank D = 3 + N x Q x 0.02

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-3
 SP-4

INDEX 01A INDEX 01B INDEX 02A

● 装置本体1 ● 装置本体2 ● オプション1
EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 1 EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 2 OPTION 1

INDEX 02B INDEX 03 INDEX 04

● オプション2 ● ケーブル ● 接続図
OPTION 2 CABLE CABLE CONNECTION
DIAGRAM

INDEX 05 INDEX 06 INDEX 07

● 部品番号検索表 ● ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表 ● 消耗品一覧表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE TABLE OF SCREWS/ LIST OF QUICK WEARING
WASHERS INDICATION PARTS
SYMBOLS

FP8Z0001.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3359 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-4
 SP-5

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3359 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-5
 装置本体 1
01A EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 1

19 3-BR3x6
F

1
18
17

16

3
5
4
2-BR3x6
2-BR3x30 6

B
9 7

E D
8
4-BR3x6 20
E
F
2-BR3x6 4-BR3x6
21
A

B
10
23 C

4-BR3x6
11 D
22

12
4-BR3x6
13

6-BR3x6
3-Ps3x8

3-BR3x6
15
15
14
15
15

BR3x8 FP8Z0101.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-6
 装置本体 1
EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.

E 1.1 350N2685 右側面カバー Right Cover 1

E 1.2 350N3210 右側面カバー Right Cover 1 (∗1)
D 2 345Y0300A ルーバ Louver 1 with Air Filter
E 3 356N9056 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 4 850S0089 FDD FDD 1
CR 5.1 125N0122B 電源ユニット Power Supply Unit 1
CR 5.2 125N0122C 電源ユニット Power Supply Unit 1 (∗1)
D 6 119Y0058 ファン Fan 1
E 7 316S1238 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 3
E 8 350N2687 電源スイッチカバー Power Switch Cover 1
E 9 350N2686 左側面カバー Left Cover 1
for Fixing
Additional
E 10 308S0062 特殊ネジ Screw 1 Protective
Grounding Cable
(M4x6)

C 11.1 113Y1624A PNL15C PNL15C 1 Main Unit Panel

Main Unit Panel
C 11.2 113Y1849 PNL15E PNL15E 1
(∗1)
E 12 350N2683 前面カバー Front Cover 1 Front Main Cover
Front Display Part
E 13 350Y1656 前面カバー Front Cover 1
Cover
E 14 356N9054 ブラケット Bracket 1
E 15 367N2063 ゴム脚 Rubber Foot 4
D 16 376N0238 メカニカルフィルタ Air Filter 1
E 17 382N1772 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 18 382N1769 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 19 382N1775 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 20 382N1776 ガスケット Gusket 2 (∗1)
E 21 356N10509 側面シールド Side shield 1 (∗1)
E 22 356N10510 前面シールド Front shield 1 (∗1)
E 23 382N1771 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)

(∗1) : Electromagnetic radiation disturbance immune model only

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-7
 装置本体 2
01B EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 2
3 4
1
BR3x6
2
1 BR4x8
7
8
9
4-BR3x6 5 10
6
BR4x8 11

BR4x8
BR3x6
12
2-BR3x25
5
6
BR4x8

28
27

26
25 13

10-BR3x6

A
19
18 14
20
23
24
15

15
22
4-BR4x8

21
B

17
17
16 FP8Z0102.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-8
 装置本体 2
EQUIPMENT MAIN BODY 2 01B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.

E 1 347S0312 スペーサ Spacer 2

E 2 356N9058A ブラケット Bracket 1
E 3 356N9055 ブラケット Bracket 1
CR 4 113Y1625C IMG15C IMG15C 1
E 5 316N0449A 止め具 Fixture 2
E 6 316N0450 止め具 Fixture 2
C 7 113Y1662A MEM15B MEM15B 1 Image Memory
C 8.1 114S0168 メモリカード Memory Card 1 SDP3B-16-101-50
C 8.2 114S0172 メモリカード Memory Card 1 SDP3B-16-101-80
CR 9 857Y0400B CPU90K CPU90K 1
CR 10.1 113Y1706A LAN90C LAN90C 1
CR 10.2 113Y1850A LAN90E LAN90E 1 (∗1)
E 11 138S0195 フェライトコア Ferrite Core 1
CR 12.1 857Y0330L HAV90A HAV90A 1
CR 12.2 857Y0347C HAV90B HAV90B 1
CR 12.3 857Y0331K DVI90A DVI90A 1
CR 12.4 113Y1378C DPI90A DPI90A 1
CR 12.5 113Y1402C DPI90B DPI90B 1
CR 12.6 113Y1246C FIX90A FIX90A 1
CR 12.7 857Y0397B HAV90E HAV90E 1
CR 13 113Y1594A MTH15B MTH15B 1
E 14 405N2969 ラベル Label 1
E 15 316S1236 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 2
E 16 316S1237 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 1
E 17 316S1140 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 2
E 18 382N1768 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 19 382N1774 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 20 382N1773 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 21 382N1768 ガスケット Gusket 2 (∗1)
E 22 382N1769 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 23 382N1770 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 24 382N1765 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
E 25 382N1764 ガスケット Gusket 4 (∗1)
E 26 382N1763 ガスケット Gusket 4 (∗1)
E 27 382N1767 ガスケット Gusket 5 (∗1)
E 28 382N1766 ガスケット Gusket 1 (∗1)
(∗1) : Electromagnetic radiation disturbance immune model only

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-9
 オプション 1
02A OPTION 1
1

2-B3x6
3

2-B3x6 4

4-B3x6
5 3-B3x6

2-B3x20

4-B3x8

2-B3x8

B3x8

FP5Z0B01.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3359 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-10
 オプション 1
OPTION 1 02A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REM ARKS SERIAL NO.

Remote Panel
(Same for use in
CR 1 845Y0057C/D パネル部 Operation Panel 1
Japan and
overseas)

Panel Left-Hand
D 2 113Y1391B PNL90D PNL90D 1 Switch Board
Assembly

Panel Right-Hand
D 3 113Y1392B PNL90E PNL90E 1 Switch Board
Assembly

LCD Unit and

D 4 849Y0085B/C/D/E ディスプレイ部 Display Unit 1 PNL90A/PNL90B
Board Assembly

Button Assembly
D 5 340Y0032B ボタンアセンブリ Button Assembly 1 for Panel Front
Switch

Lower Case,
Connector Panel,
Power Swith,
D 6 813Y0148A 電源部 Power Supply Unit 1
Power Supply and
PNL90C Board
Assembly

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4010 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-11
 オプション 2
02B OPTION&2
7

8.1
10.1

1 2

9.1

10.3

8.2

10.2 2

9.2
9.3 11

6
3
FP8Z0002.EPS

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4152 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-12
 オプション 2
OPTION&2 02B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REM ARKS SERIAL NO.

AC Adapter for Remote Panel

D 1 125S0211 電源 Power Supply 1 (Required to distance more
than 20 m)
AC Power Cable for AC Adapter
E 2.1 136N0184 ケーブル Cable 1
(for U.S.A., Canada, Japan)
AC Power Cable for AC Adapter
E 2.2 136N5055 ケーブル Cable 1
(for EU)
AC Power Cable for AC Adapter
E 2.3 136N5056 ケーブル Cable 1
(for U.K.)
D 3 128N0069A スイッチ Switch 1 Foot Switch
D 4 128Y0235C スイッチ Switch 1 Hand Switch
E 5 136Y5308C ケーブル Cable 1 Cable for Hand Switch
D 6 113Y1127A PNL03E PNL03E 1 Switch Board for Hand Switch
Japanese Display (only for
DQ 7.1 114Y5458001A 記憶素子 IC Memory Card 1
software installation)
English Display (only for
DQ 7.2 114Y5458002A 記憶素子 IC Memory Card 1
software installation)
German Display (only for
DQ 7.3 114Y5458003A 記憶素子 IC Memory Card 1
software installation)
French Display (only for
DQ 7.4 114Y5458004A 記憶素子 IC Memory Card 1
software installation)
Italian Display (only for
DQ 7.5 114Y5458005A 記憶素子 IC Memory Card 1
software installation)
Spanish Display (only for
DQ 7.6 114Y5458006A 記憶素子 IC Memory Card 1
software installation)
Swedish Display (only for
DQ 7.7 114Y5458007A 記憶素子 IC Memory Card 1
software installation)
Signal Cable for Card Reader
E 8.1 136N0227C ケーブル Cable 1
(for REF. 9.1)
Signal Cable for Card Reader
E 8.2 136N0423 ケーブル Cable 1
(for REF. 9.2 or 9.3)

CR 9.1 852Y0046B テンキー付き磁気 Card Reader with

1 Type JIS II (PDC-641-019-Z5)
カードリーダ Ten-key

CR 9.2 852Y0078 テンキー付き磁気 Card Reader with

1 Type JIS II (PDC-643-059-ZM)
カードリーダ Ten-key

CR 9.3 852Y0080 テンキー付き磁気 Card Reader with

1 Type ISO (PDC-643-049-ZO)
カードリーダ Ten-key
AC Adapter for Card Reader
D 10.1 125S0184 電源 Power Supply 1 (DV-9400J) (for Japan) (for
REF. 9.1)
AC Adapter for Card Reader
D 10.2 125S0288 電源 Power Supply 1 (LS-A8561-ADT) (for Japan)
(for REF. 9.2)
AC Adapter for Card Reader
D 10.3 125N0075 電源 Power Supply 1 (SWA0902W-F) (for overseas)
(for REF. 9.3)
(PDC-6P0-T0A-00) (available
CR 11 852Y0081 バーコードリーダ Barcode Reader 1
with REF. 9.2 or 9.3)

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4152 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-13
 ケーブル
03 CABLE
CONNECTION
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.
DIAGRAM
AC Power Cable for
Main Unit (for
E 1 136N0367 ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
Japan; standard
use)

AC Power Cable for

E 2 136N0368 ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
Main Unit (for EU)

AC Power Cable for

E 3 136N0369 ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
Main Unit (for U.K.)
AC Power Cable for
Main Unit (for
U.S.A., Canada)
E 4 136N0371 ケーブル Cable 1 (for Japan; when 1/3
connect additional
protective
grounding cable)
Internal Cable (DC
power, power
E 5 136Y8640 ケーブル Cable 1 1/3, 2/3
control, FDD
control)

Internal Cable
E 6 136Y8643 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
(Panel Control)

Additional
Protective
E 7 136Y8545A ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
Grounding Cable
(Japan only)

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3670 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-14
 接続図
CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM 04
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3359 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-15
 接続図
04 CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3359 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-16
 接続図
CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM 04
006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4010 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-17
 部品番号検索表
05 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
PART NO. INDEX NO.-REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.-REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.-REF.NO.

113Y1127A 02B-6 316N0449A 01B-5 852Y0080 02B-9.3

113Y1246C 01B-12.6 316N0450 01B-6 852Y0081 02B-11
113Y1378C 01B-12.4 316S1140 01B-17 857Y0330L 01B-12.1
113Y1391B 02A-2 316S1236 01B-15 857Y0331K 01B-12.3
113Y1392B 02A-3 316S1237 01B-16 857Y0347C 01B-12.2
113Y1402C 01B-12.5 316S1238 01A-7 857Y0397B 01B-12.7
113Y1594A 01B-13 340Y0032B 02A-5 857Y0400B 01B-9
113Y1624A 01A-11.1 345Y0300A 01A-2
113Y1625C 01B-4 347S0312 01B-1
113Y1662A 01B-7 350N2683 01A-12
113Y1706A 01B-10.1 350N2685 01A-1.1
113Y1849 01A-11.2 350N2686 01A-9
113Y1850A 01B-10.2 350N2687 01A-8
114S0168 01B-8.1 350N3210 01A-1.2
114S0172 01B-8.2 350Y1656 01A-13
114Y5458001A 02B-7.1 356N10509 01A-21
114Y5458002A 02B-7.2 356N10510 01A-22
114Y5458003A 02B-7.3 356N9054 01A-14
114Y5458004A 02B-7.4 356N9055 01B-3
114Y5458005A 02B-7.5 356N9056 01A-3
114Y5458006A 02B-7.6 356N9058A 01B-2
114Y5458007A 02B-7.7 367N2063 01A-15
119Y0058 01A-6 376N0238 01A-16
125N0075 02B-10.3 382N1763 01B-26
125N0122B 01A-5.1 382N1764 01B-25
125N0122C 01A-5.2 382N1765 01B-24
125S0184 02B-10.1 382N1766 01B-28
125S0211 02B-1 382N1767 01B-27
125S0288 02B-10.2 382N1768 01B-18
128N0069A 02B-3 382N1768 01B-21
128Y0235C 02B-4 382N1769 01A-18
136N0184 02B-2.1 382N1769 01B-22
136N0227C 02B-8.1 382N1770 01B-23
136N0367 03-1 382N1771 01A-23
136N0368 03-2 382N1772 01A-17
136N0369 03-3 382N1773 01B-20
136N0371 03-4 382N1774 01B-19
136N0423 02B-8.2 382N1775 01A-19
136N5055 02B-2.2 382N1776 01A-20
136N5056 02B-2.3 405N2969 01B-14
136Y5308C 02B-5 813Y0148A 02A-6
136Y8545A 03-7 845Y0057C/D 02A-1
136Y8640 03-5 849Y0085B/C/D/E 02A-4
136Y8643 03-6 850S0089 01A-4
138S0195 01B-11 852Y0046B 02B-9.1
308S0062 01A-10 852Y0078 02B-9.2
006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-18
 SP-19

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3670 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-19
 ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧
06 TABLE OF SCREWS/WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS
TABLE OF SCREWS/WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS
Indication Symbol in the
No. Part name disassembly Size Shape
symbols chart (example)

1 Cross-recessed flat-head screw S S3 x 10 M3 x 10

1. 2.

2 Cross-recessed truss-head screw T *T4 x 8 M4 x 8

Flat-head screw Truss-head screw
S T
Cross-recessed pan-head screw
3 A A3 x 6 M3 x 6 3. 4.
with spring washer

Pan-head screw with Pan-head screw with

Cross-recessed pan-head screw spring washer spring and plain
4 B B3 x 16 M3 x 16 A washers
with spring and plain washers
B
5. 6.
5 Pan-head screw N N3 x 6 M3 x 6

6 Hexagon-headed bolt R R12 x 20 M12 x 20 Pan-head screw Hexagon-headed bolt

N R
Cross-recessed hexagon-headed 7. 8.
7 screw with spring and plain BR BR4 x 25 M4 x 25
washers
Hexagon-headed screw Bolt with hexagon hole
with spring and plain Q
8 Bolt with hexagon hole Q Q3 x 20 M3 x 20 washers
BR
Bolt with hexagon hole with 9. 10.
9 BQ BQ4 x 10 M4 x 10
spring and plain washers
Bolt with hexagon hole Deltight
Nominal with spring and plain
10 Deltight *1) DT DT4 x 8 diameter washers DT
4x8 BQ
Nominal 11. 12.
11 Self-tapping screw for resin Ps Ps3 x 8 diameter
3x8
Self-tapping screw Hexagon hole
for resin setscrew
12 Hexagon hole setscrew WP WP4 x 6 M4 x 6 Ps WP
13. 14.
(double-point) WP4 x 8 M4 x 8

Hexagon nut Plain washer

13 Hexagon nut Na Na3 M3 Na W

14 Plain washer W W4 M4 15. 16.

15 Spring washer SW SW3 M3

Spring washer E ring
SW E
Nominal
16 E ring E E6 diameter
6
*1): Top end non-circular self-tapping screw
* : Stainless-made FP8Z0D01.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3670 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-20
 消耗品一覧表
LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS 07
LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS

No. Part name Shape

1 Fixing plug
1. 2. 3.

2 Binding band
Fixing plug Binding band N. K. clamp
3 N.K. clamp
4. 5.
4 Edging

5 Edge saddle Edging Edge saddle

FP5Z0D02.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3670 DRYPIX Link Service Manual SP-21
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

INSTALLATION (IN)
 IN-1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
07/10/2002 00 New release (FM3360) All pages
10/25/2002 01 Revised (FM3576) 1, 9, 22, 24, 44, 45, 48, 51
01/20/2003 02 Revised (FM3671) 1, 10, 11, 18, 43, 45~47, 47.1~47.4,
52~55, 55.1~55.4, 56, 57, 59
05/15/2003 03 Revised (FM4011) 1, 9, 17, 26, 46, 47, 48~51, 51.1~51.4,
52, 53, 59, 100~121
11/10/2003 04 Revised (FM4153) 1, 40, 48~50, 120, 122~132
11/30/2004 05 Revised (FM4508) 1, 8~11, 11.1~11.8, 12, 13

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-1
 IN-2

1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Equipment Dimensions, Weight and Center of Gravity

■ Dimensions

● DRYPIX Link
160 mm x 433 mm x 323 mm (W x D x H)
(Excluding protrusions like louvers and screws)

323

433

160
FP8I0204.EPS

● Remote Panel
185 mm x 190 mm x 130 mm (W x D x H)

■ Weight

● DRYPIX Link
Maximum approximately 10 kg (differs according to specifications of optional parts)

● Remote Panel
Approximately 1.2 kg

■ Center of Gravity

● DRYPIX Link
Height : 233 mm
From right side : 85 mm
From front side : 205 mm

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-2
 IN-3

1.2 Environmental Requirements

■ Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure

❍ Operating
Temperature/Relative humidity : 15°C (40 to 70%RH) to 30°C (15 to 70%RH)
(No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa

• Operating temperature and relative humidity range:

[%RH]

70
Relative humidity

60
50
40
30
20
15
10

5 10 15 20 25 30 [°C]

Temperature FP8I0201.EPS

❍ Non-operating
Temperature : 0 to 45 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa

❍ Transit or Storage
Temperature : -10 to 50 °C
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa

■ Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement

Frequency: 10 to 55 Hz
Amplitude: Below 0.015 mm

■ Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less for both front and rear and right and left

■ Floor Flatness
Below 10 mm

■ Variable Magnetic Field

Below DC 100 Gauss

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-3
 IN-4

1.3 Electrical Requirements

■ Frequency
50 to 60 Hz ±3% (Single-phase)

■ Line Voltage

● DRYPIX Link
100 to 240 VAC ±10%

● Remote Panel
15 VDC (Supplied from the equipment main body or AC adapter)

■ Capacity
200 VA

■ Power Cable
3m

■ Rated Current

● DRYPIX Link
100 to 240 V : 2 to 1 A

● Remote Panel
1 A (15 VDC)

■ Grounding Registance
100 ohm or less

■ Overload Protection
3.15A

■ Power Consumption

● DRYPIX Link
80 W

● Remote Panel
15 W

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-4
 IN-5

1.4 Other Specifications

■ Maximum Heat Generation
Standby/Operation : 60 kcal/hr

■ Noise Level
Standby/Operation : Below 45 dB
(Measuring conditions: Distance of 1m from the equipment main body, and height of
1.5m)

■ Start up Time
Within 2 minutes

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-5
 IN-6

1.5 Equipment Installation Space

■ Minimum Installation Space
50

Rear

20 50

Front

Unit: mm
20 FP8I0202.EPS

■ Space Required for Maintenance Work

600

Rear

600 600

Front

Unit: mm
600 FP8I0203.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-6
 IN-7

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-7
 IN-8

2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW

START

3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION

3.1 Precautions on Installation

3.2 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves

3.2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

4. TEMPORARY PLACEMENT

4.1 Transportation

4.2 Unpacking

4.3 Checking Installation Package Contents

4.4 Preparations

4.5 Temporary Placement

5. INSTALLATION

5.1 Removing External Fixtures

5.2 Installing Separately Packaged Items

5.2.1 Pasting the Connector Cover Caution Label

5.2.2 Installing the Image Memory Board

5.2.3 Installing the Image Interface Board

A
FP8B0201.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-8
 IN-9

5.3 Connecting the Interface Cable

5.3.1 AD-I/F Connection

5.3.2 E-I/F Connection

5.4 Connecting the Network Cable

6. CHECKING SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT,

AND PRINTER CONNECTION

6.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility

6.1.1 Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable

6.1.2 Power ON

6.1.3 Starting the M-Utility

6.2 Common Settings of E-I/F Connection and

AD-I/F Connection

6.2.1 Setting the Date and Time

6.2.2 Setting the Sorter

6.2.3 Setting Network Information

6.2.4 Setting the DICOM Protocol

6.2.5 Setting Printer Information

B
FP8B0202.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-9
 IN-10

6.3 Settings for E-I/F Connection

6.3.1 Setting the Printer Start Standby Timer

6.3.2 Setting Film Information

6.3.3 Setting the Default Film Size

6.3.4 Setting Printer Substitution

6.3.5 Setting Printer Switching Notification

6.3.6 Setting Printer Switching Notification Time

6.3.7 Setting Printer Automatic Recovery

6.3.8 Ending System Settings

6.4 Settings for AD-I/F Connection

6.4.1 Setting for DRYPIX Station (Image Manager

Function) Connection

6.4.2 Ending the M-Utility

6.4.3 Starting the Remote Panel Maintenance Mode

6.4.4 Setting the Remote Panel Maintenance Mode

6.4.5 Language Display of Remote Panel

6.5 Checking Connection Between This

Equipment and Printer

6.5.1 Checks for E-I/F Connection

6.5.2 Checks for AD-I/F Connection

C
FP8B0203.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-10
 IN-11

7. CHECKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE IMAGE

INPUT DEVICE AND IMAGE I/O

7.1 E-I/F Connection

7.1.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment by

Remote Operations

7.1.2 Checking Film Output and Images from

Connected Device

7.1.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

by Remote Operations

7.2 AD-I/F Connection

7.2.1 Adjusting the Image Interface Board

7.2.2 Checking Film Output and Images from

Connected Device

7.2.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

by Remote Operations

8. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

8.1 Backing Up Individual Data

8.2 Checking and Deleting Error Logs Which

Occur at Installation

8.2.1 Checking the Error Log

8.2.2 Deleting Error Logs

8.3 Terminating the Equipment

8.4 Reinstalling Covers

D
FP8B0204.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11
 IN-11.1

8.5 Installing the Equipment

8.6 Cleaning the Equipment

END
FP8B0205.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11.1
 IN-11.2

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11.2
 IN-11.3

3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION

3.1 Precautions on Installation

The machine installation site must satisfy the “■ Installation Site Requirements” below.
Also be sure to complete procedures beforehand for necessary construction work,
electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation.

■ Installation Site Requirements

Avoid the following installation sites.
• Places where the temperature drastically changes.
• Places near heat sources such as heaters.
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur.
• Places where the equipment may be exposed to any corrosive gas.
• Dusty places.
• Places where the equipment is subject to constant or excessive vibration or
shock.
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.

■ Network Connection
As this equipment needs to be network-connected, obtain all necessary network parts
and accessories beforehand and complete network construction.
Prepare network parts and accessories appropriate for the installing environment.

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11.3
 IN-11.4

■ Additional Protective Grounding

For E-I/F connection, additional protective grounding will be required if installing this
equipment in the patient environment with the connected equipment in the non-
medically used room. This installation work should only be performed by persons
certified to handle electrical facility construction.
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
room” are given below.

● Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures
(treatment, tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four
directions and 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.

● Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.

● Non-Medically Used Room

Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.

■ Board Handling Precautions

Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
boards.

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11.4
 IN-11.5

3.2 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves

3.2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices
to the IEC60601-1-2 : 1994 (up to 29999), IEC60601-1-2 : 2001 (after 30001), Medical
Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a typical medical installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to other devices in the vicinity.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures;
• Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
• Increase the separation between the equipment.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the other
device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.

■ Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001

• Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to
be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as
follows.
• Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.
• The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD as
replacement parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or
decreased immunity of the DRYPIX Link.
List of Cables
Fuji Photo Film
Name General Specification
Parts code
I/F Cable - TIA/EIA-568 Cat5 or more.
Straight cable of UTP type.
TP8B0301.EPS

• The DRYPIX Link should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the DRYPIX Link should be observed to
verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11.5
 IN-11.6

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions

The DRYPIX Link is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the DRYPIX Link should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions The DRYPIX Link uses RF energy only for its
CISPR 11 internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are
Group 1
very low and are not likely to cause any interference
in nearby electronic equipment.

RF emissions
Class A
CISPR 11
The DRYPIX Link is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic and those
Harmonic emissions
Class A directly connected to the public low-voltage power
IEC 61000-3-2
supply network that supplies buildings used for
domestic purposes.
Voltage fluctuations/
flicker emissions Complies
IEC 61000-3-3
TP8B0302.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11.6
 IN-11.7

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The DRYPIX Link is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the DRYPIX Link should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic
Immunity test IEC 60601test level Compliance level
environment - guidance
Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be wood,
(ESD) ±4kV contact concrete or ceramic tile.
±8kV air ±6kV contact If floors are covered with
IEC 61000-4-2 synthetic material, the
±2kV air relative humidity should
±4kV air be at least 30%.
±8kV air

Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
transient/burst lines lines should be that of a
±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-4 lines lines hospital environment.

Surge ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality
should be that of a
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or
hospital environment.

Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality

interruptions and voltage (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) should be that of a
variations on power for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
supply input lines hospital environment.
40 % UT 40 % UT If the user of the DRYPIX
IEC 61000-4-11 (60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) Link requires continued
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles operation during power
mains interruptions, it is
70 % UT 70 % UT recommended that the
(30% dip inUT) (30% dip in UT) DRYPIX Link be
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles powered from an
uninterruptible power
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT supply or a battery.
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT)
for 5 s for 5 s

Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency

(50/60 Hz) magnetic field magnetic fields should
be at levels characteristic
IEC 61000-4-8 of a typical location in a
typical commercial or
hospital environment.

NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
TP8B0303.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11.7
 IN-11.8

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The DRYPIX Link is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the DRYPIX Link should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IEC 60601 test Compliance
Immunity test Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level level
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any part
IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz - of the DRYPIX Link, including cables, than the
80MHz recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.

Recommended separation distance

Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 Vrms d = 1.2√P

IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz - d = 1.2√P 80 MHz - 800 MHz

2.5GHz
d = 2.3√P 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz

where P is the maximum output power rating of

the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in metres (m).

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey,a
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.b

Interference may occur in the vicinity of

equipment marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which
the DRYPIX Link is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the DRYPIX Link should be observed
to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the DRYPIX Link.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
TP8B0304.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-11.8
 IN-12

Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications equipment

and the DRYPIX Link
The DRYPIX Link is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or the user of the DRYPIX Link can help prevent electromagnetic interference
by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the DRYPIX Link as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of
the communications equipment.

Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter

output power of m
transmitter 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
W d = 1.2 √P d = 1.2 √P d = 2.3 √P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23

0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73

1 1.2 1.2 2.3

10 3.8 3.8 7.3

100 12 12 23

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance
d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where
P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer.

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
TP8B0305.EPS

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-12
 IN-13

BLANK PAGE

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-13
 IN-14

4. TEMPORARY PLACEMENT

4.1 Transportation
(1) Clear the delivery path of the equipment and carry the equipment to the
installation site.
To ensure that the equipment can be carried out safely to the installation site, move any
obstacle out of the way on the delivery entry, entry corridor, and corners. Also make sure
that the elevator is made available to move the equipment.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• When carrying the equipment, support it so that it does not turn over.
• When carrying the equipment on a cart over bumps, move the cart slowly to avoid
impact to the equipment.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-14
 IN-15

4.2 Unpacking
(1) Remove the accessories from the top of the package.
[Remove] Accessories

FP8B0401.EPS

(2) Remove the protective materials.

#1
[Remove] Protective material
(cardboard)

#2
[Remove] Protective material
(cardboard)

Equipment main body

FP8B0402.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-15
 IN-16

(3) Remove the Equipment main body.

[Remove] Equipment main body

FP8B0403.EPS

(4) Take out the equipment main body from the plastic bag.

[Remove] Equipment main body

Plastic bag

FP8B0404.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-16
 IN-17

4.3 Checking Installation Package Contents

Inspect the installation components according to the PACKING LIST enclosed and
check that none are missing.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• The Test Results Sheet packed included in the packaging of the equipment must be
kept by the servicemen.
• Check that none of the options such as image interface board are missing.
“SPECIFICATIONS 1.2 List of Optional Parts”

■ Equipment Main Body

Name Qty. Remarks

Equipment main body 1

TP8B0401.EPS

■ Accessories

Name Qty. Remarks

Main unit software FD 4

DICOM Software FD 2
Ferrite core 1
Tie band 1 For fixing ferrite core.
Fuse (0.5A) 1 DPI90B (F3, F4)
Fuse (1A) 1 DPI90A (F1, F2)
DPI90B (F2), HAV90A (F1)
HAV90B (F1), DVI90A (F1), HAV90E (F1)
Connector cap (for D-SUB) 1
Connector cap (for BNC) 3
Connector cover caution label 1
Operation manual 1
Test results sheet 1
TP8B0402.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-17
 IN-18

4.4 Preparations
■ Tools Used
The installation of this equipment can be performed using standard tools.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• To connect analog video/digital video boards, an oscilloscope (above 100 MHz) will
be required, and to connect analog video board, an adjusting screwdriver (DA-85) will
be required.
• When connecting to a printer with sorter and using the sorting function, a PC for
servicing for setting sorting conditions will be required.
• When connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit
software version A03 or later, a PC for servicing for editing files related to connection
will be required.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-18
 IN-19

4.5 Temporary Placement

(1) Install the equipment temporarily, ensuring sufficient work space for installation.
“1.5 Equipment Installation Space”

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-19
 IN-20

5. INSTALLATION

5.1 Removing External Fixtures

(1) Remove the fixtures.
[Peel off] Tape

FP8B0512.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-20
 IN-21

5.2 Installing Separately Packaged Items

5.2.1 Pasting the Connector Cover Caution Label

<NOTE>
Paste the label of the appropriate language.

(1) Paste the label.

Connector cover caution label

FP8B0501.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-21
 IN-22

5.2.2 Installing the Image Memory Board

<NOTE>
This equipment is mounted with one image memory board as standard. Perform this
installation if adding a second image memory board.

(1) Remove the front cover.

Front cover

Hook

#3
[Remove]
Front cover
#2
[Release] Hook

#1
[Remove] 1-BR3x8 FP8B0511.EPS

(2) Remove the right cover.

#1
Right cover [Remove] 3-BR3x6

#3
[Remove] Right cover

Hook

#2
[Release] Hook

Hook

FP8B0509.EPS

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-22
 IN-23

(3) Remove the fixtures of the image memory board.

<NOTE>
Be careful not to drop screws and fixtures inside the equipment.

#2
[Remove] Fixture

#1
[Remove] 2-BR3x25

FP8B0502.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-23
 IN-24

(4) Insert the image memory board into the slot of the IMG15C board.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• Connect the second image memory board to CN12.
• Check the direction of the notch on the image memory board first before inserting.

<NOTE>
Be careful not to drop the image memory board inside the equipment.

CN13
CN12

IMG15C board
Image memory board

Notch FP8B0503.EPS

(5) Attach the fixture of the image memory board.

<NOTE>
• Be careful not to drop screws and fixtures inside the equipment.
• Check that the image memory board is inserted deeply into the grooves of the fixtures.

#1
[Attach] Fixture

#2
[Attach] 2-BR3x25
FP8B0504.EPS

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-24
 IN-25

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-25
 IN-26

5.2.3 Installing the Image Interface Board

Set the rotary switch of the image interface board and insert the image interface board
into the slot of the equipment.

■ Setting the Image Interface Board

Set the rotary switch on the image interface board to CH1.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When attaching the analog and digital image interface board, settings corresponding to
the connected modality will also be required apart from those shown below.
“APPENDIX 1. SETTING, CONNECTING, ADJUSTING THE IMAGE I/F
BOARD”

Board HAV90A/B/E DVI90A DPI90A/B FIX90A

Switch No. S4 S5 S4 S5 SLOT ADR S1 S2

Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
TP8B0501.EPS

■ Installing the Image Interface Board

(1) Remove the front cover.

Front cover

Hook

#3
[Remove]
Front cover
#2
[Release] Hook

#1
[Remove] 1-BR3x8 FP8B0511.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-26
 IN-27

(2) Remove the right cover.

#1
Right cover [Remove] 3-BR3x6

#3
[Remove] Right cover

Hook

#2
[Release] Hook

Hook

FP8B0509.EPS

(3) Remove the bracket.

Bracket
#1
[Remove] 3-BR3x6

#3
[Remove] Bracket #2
[Release] Hook
FP8B0507.EPS
Hook

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-27
 IN-28

(4) Remove the blank panel of the image interface board slot.
#1
[Remove] 2-BR4x8

Blank panel

FP8B0510.EPS

(5) Insert the image interface board into the slot on the MTH15B board, and secure
with the two screws.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Use the screw removed in step (4) to secure.

#1 #2
[Insert] Interface board [Tighten] 2-BR4x8

FP8B0508.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-28
 IN-29

(6) Reinstall the bracket removed in step (3).

<NOTE>
When reinstalling the bracket, check that the card pullers of each board have been inserted
firmly into the notches inside the bracket.

Notch

Bracket

Card puller

[Tighten] 3-BR3x6 FP8B0513.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-29
 IN-30

5.3 Connecting the Interface Cable

5.3.1 AD-I/F Connection

■ Connecting the AD-I/F Cable

<INSTRUCTIONS>
To prevent damage by static electricity, be sure to attach the protective cap to the
connector for unused external I/F.

(1) Check that the power of the equipment is OFF.

(2) Connect the interface cable from the external device connected to the connector
on the image interface board.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
For details on connection of the image interface board and external device connected,
refer to “APPENDIX 1. SETTING, CONNECTING, AND ADJUSTING THE IMAGE I/F
BOARD”.

FP8B0505.EPS

(3) Attach the protective cap provided to metal connectors which are not connected.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-30
 IN-31

■ Connecting the Remote Panel

Connect the remote panel (845Y0057) to the image interface board.
(1) Check that the power switch is set to Standby ( ).

Power switch FP3B0435.EPS

(2) Connect the remote panel interface cable to the MAIN connector.
(3) If a hand switch or foot switch is available, connect it to the EXT. SW connector.

(3) [Connect] Hand switch

or foot switch cable

(2) [Connect]
Remote panel I/F cable
FP3B0436.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-31
 IN-32

(4) If the length of the remote panel interface cable is more than 20m long, connect
the AC adapter (SWA1502W).

CAUTION
When using the remote panel in the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT (within 2.5m), do not
use the AC adapter.

For 100V to 120V For 200V to 230V For 240V

(Japan, U. S., (Germany, France, (U. K., etc.)
Canada, etc.) Spain, Sweden, etc.)

15V power input connector

AC adapter for 100V to 240VAC

(For both domestic use
in Japan and overseas use)
(SWA1502W)

AC adapter power cable

FP3B0489.EPS

(5) Connect the remote panel interface cable to the PANEL connector of the image
interface board.

Remote panel
interface cable

FP8B0506.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-32
 IN-33

5.3.2 E-I/F Connection

<INSTRUCTIONS>
To prevent damage by static electricity, be sure to attach the protective cap to the
connector for unused external I/F.

(1) Check that the power of the equipment is OFF.

(2) Connect the E-I/F cable to the CN3 of the FIX90A board.
(3) Attach the protective cap provided to metal connectors which are not connected.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-33
 IN-34

5.4 Connecting the Network Cable

CAUTION
Do not connect telephone lines to CN7 of the LAN90C board. Only the IEC60950/
UL1950 standard cables are appropriate for connecting to this connector.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
To prevent damage by static electricity, be sure to attach the protective cap to the
connector for unused external I/F.

(1) Check that the power of the equipment is OFF.

(2) Attach the ferrite core to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable (UTP).
<NOTE>
• Attach the ferrite core at 20 to 30 mm from the cable connector.
• Tie the two cables together with the tie band.

<REMARKS>
UTP: Unshielded type

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable (UTP)

#2
[Fix] Tie band
20 to 30mm
#1
[Attach] Ferrite core FR6H7810.EPS

(3) Connect the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable (UTP) to CN7 of the LAN90C board.
(4) Attach the protective cap provided to metal connectors which are not connected.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-34
 IN-35

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-35
 IN-36

6. CHECKING SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT ,

AND PRINTER CONNECTION

6.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility

Start the equipment and start the M-Utility.

6.1.1 Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable

CAUTION
• Use the power cable provided with the equipment.
• Do not connect the power plug to the outlet.

(1) Connect the power cable to the equipment.

(2) Measure the resistance between the terminals of the power plug using a tester.
(Germany, France,
(U. S., Canada, etc.) Spain, Sweden, etc.) (U. K., etc.)
E
E
E L
L
L N
N
N

Terminal L-N L-E N-E

Resistance 100kΩ ~ ∞ ∞ FP5B0601.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-36
 IN-37

6.1.2 Power ON
(1) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
(2) Set the REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the operation panel to LOCAL.
LED1 LED3
LED2 PWR RDY
ERR

SW5
R/L
VR1

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

REMOTE/LOCAL switch (LOCAL)

FP8B0601.EPS

(3) Turn ON the POWER switch on the equipment.

→ Check that the equipment starts normally.

6.1.3 Starting the M-Utility

When installing the equipment, the system parameters need to be set. Use the M-Utility
to set these.
(1) During the routine mode, press SW4 (CANCEL key) while pressing SW1 (UP
arrow key) for about one second.
LED1 LED3
LED2 PWR RDY
ERR
SW5
R/L

VR1

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

SW1 (UP arrow key) SW4 (CANCEL key) FP8U0301.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-37
 IN-38

6.2 Common Settings of E-I/F Connection and AD-I/F

Connection
Perform common system settings of E-I/F connection and AD-I/F connection using the
M-Utility.
<NOTE>
Each menu of the M-Utility is given a tree-structure divided into groups by functions. Selecting
a menu item of a tree proceeds to the next level below. After setting each menu item, press the
<CANCEL> key to return to the topmost level to proceed to the next setting.

6.2.1 Setting the Date and Time

Set the system date and time.
(1) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → [1-1-1. Set
Date>] → <ENTER> → [1-1-1-1. Check Date] → <ENTER>
→ The current date and time set in the system (year, month, date, hours, minutes) appear.
If the date and time are correct, end the settings.
To change the system date, proceed to step (2).
The following shows an example of setting January 1, 2002, 1:01 PM;
(2) <CANCEL> → <DOWN arrow key> → [YYYY>] → <ENTER>
Example: For 2002
Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to select the desired value, and then press <ENTER>
to confirm the value. Set in the same way for the following.
[0] → <ENTER>→ [2] → <ENTER>
(3) <DOWN arrow key> → [MM>] → <ENTER>
Example: For January
[0] → <ENTER> → [1] → <ENTER>
(4) <DOWN arrow key> → [DD>] → <ENTER>
Example: For 1
[0] → <ENTER> → [1] → <ENTER>
(5) <DOWN arrow key> → [hh>] → <ENTER>
Example: 1 PM
[1] → <ENTER> → [3] → <ENTER>
(6) <DOWN arrow key> → [mm>] → <ENTER>
Example: For 1 minute
[0] → <ENTER> → [1] → <ENTER>
<REMARKS>
• If the date and time entered is outside the specified range, the equipment will set into the
standby mode for entering values. Enter the correct values.
• The changes will be effective from the time they were made.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-38
 IN-39

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-39
 IN-40

6.2.2 Setting the Sorter

Set whether a sorter is connected, and the sorting conditions.
<NOTE>
Perform this setting only when connecting to a printer with sorter and using the sorting
function.

(1) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN

arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key>
→ The [1-1-3. Set Params>] setting display appears.
(2) To show the display for setting sorter connection, as the menu tree in [1-1-3. Set
Params>] differs between E-I/F connection and AD-I/F connection, enter as
follows.
For E-I/F connection
[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → < DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow
key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-1-3-5. Set Sorter>] →
<ENTER>
→ The [1-1-3-5-1. Connection>] setting display appears.
For AD-I/F connection
[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-1-3-5. Set
Sorter> → <ENTER>
→ The [1-1-3-5-1. Connection>] setting display appears.
(3) Set whether a sorter is connected.
[1-1-3-5-1. Connection>] → <ENTER>
• [1. Enable] : Set when a sorter is connected.
• [2. Disable] : Set when no sorter is connected.
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
Default: “2. Disable”

(4) Set a FD for saving (formatted) into the FD drive.

(5) Save sorter related files from the equipment.
[1-1-3-5-2. Save to FD] → <ENTER>
→ Saving starts.
(6) When “Completed.” appears, remove the FD from the FD drive.
(7) Set the sorter related files saved at step (5) using the PC for servicing.
“DPX PC Tools OPERATION MANUAL 5. DRYPIX Link Tool”
(8) Set the FD with sorter related files set at step (7) into the FD drive.
(9) Load the sorter related files in this equipment.
[1-1-3-5-3. Load from FD] → <ENTER>
→ Loading starts.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-40
 IN-41

(10) When “Completed.” appears, remove the FD from the FD drive.

<REMARKS>
Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-41
 IN-42

6.2.3 Setting Network Information

Set the network information required for DICOM connecting this equipment.
(1) [2. Set Network>] → <ENTER> → [2-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER>
→ The [2-1-1. AE-title>] setting display appears.
(2) Set the name of the equipment to be DICOM-connected.
[2-1-1. AE-title>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the AE Title.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “DRYPIXLINK”

(3) Set the IP address for using the DICOM protocol.

[2-1-2. IP Address>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
Default: “172.016.001.050”

(4) Set the subnet mask for using the DICOM protocol.
[2-1-3. Sub Net mask>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
Default: “255.255.000.000”

(5) Set the host name for using the DICOM protocol.
[2-1-4. Host name>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the host name.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “dplink”

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-42
 IN-43

(6) Set the gateway address for using the DICOM protocol.
[2-1-5. Gateways>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<NOTE>
Perform this setting only if different networks are connected.

<REMARKS>
If no gateway address has been set (default), the operation panel will show “000.000.000.000”.

(7) Set the IP address (FTP server address) of the PC for servicing to perform
DICOM settings, printer settings, and LAN board settings using the service tool
software (Net Tool).
[2-1-6. Net Tool>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<NOTE>
• Perform this setting only when performing various settings from the PC for servicing.
• For main unit software version up to A02, this command will be displayed as [2-1-6. FTP
Server>]. Settings are the same.

<REMARKS>
• Default: “172.016.001.020” (Compatible with up to main unit software version A02)
• Default: “172.016.001.080” (Compatible with main unit software version A03 or later)

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-43
 IN-44

6.2.4 Setting the DICOM Protocol

Set the various detailed information related to the DICOM protocol for the printer.
(1) [3. Set DICOM>] → <ENTER>
→ The [3-1. Timeout>] setting display appears.
(2) Set the timeout value (seconds) for each printer.
[3-1. Timeout>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “180”
• Range of timeout values (seconds) which can be entered: 0 to 600 seconds

(3) Set the mode for acquiring logs of communication with the printer.
[3-2. Log Mode>] → <ENTER>
• [1. Normal] : Normal
• [2. Detail] : Detailed
• [3. Disable] : No
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
Default: “2. Detail”

(4) Set the printer status acquisition interval (seconds).

[3-3. Polling Timer>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “060”
• Range of printer status acquisition interval (seconds) that can be entered: 0 to 600 seconds

006-260-01
10.25.2002 FM3576 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-44
 IN-45

(5) Set whether to use the substitute printer in normal printing jobs.
<NOTE>
• Up to main unit software version A02, set the time waited to switch to substitution processing
(seconds) in this setting if set to [1.Enable>] (enables the substitute printer).
The time waited to switch to substitution processing is used together with the time specified
in [3-5. Film Sub.>]. Consequently, if executing film substitution processing in [3-5. Film
Sub.>] without using the substitute printer in this setting, set this setting to [1. Enable >] first,
then set the time waited to switch to substitution processing, and then set this setting to [2.
Disable].
• From main unit software version A03, set the time waited to switch to substitution processing
if set to [1.Enable>] (enables the substitute printer) at [3-6. Printer Timer>].

[3-4. Printer Sub.>] → <ENTER>

• [1. Enable] : Enables the substitute printer.
• [2. Disable] : Disables the substitute printer.
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “1. Enable”
• Default, and range of time waited to switch to substitution processing which can be entered:
“0600”, 0 to 1200 seconds (Compatible with up to main unit software version A02).

(6) Set whether to execute film substitution processing.

[3-5. Film Sub.>] → <ENTER>
• [1. Enable] : Enables substitution processing.
• [2. Disable] : Disables substitution processing.
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
Default: “1. Enable”

(7) If the substitute printer is enabled in [3-4. Printer Sub.>], or substitution

processing is enabled in [3-5. Film Sub.>], set the time waited to switch to
substitution processing (retry time of transmission to printer (seconds)).
<NOTE>
• Perform this setting when using main unit software version A03 or later.
• The time waited to switch to substitution processing (retry time of transmission to printer) is
used together with the time to switching to the substitute printer and time to switching to film
substitution.

[3-6. Printer Timer>] → <ENTER>

→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “0600”
• Range of time waited to switch to substitution processing (retry time of transmission to
printer (seconds)) which can be entered: 0 to 1200 seconds

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-45
 IN-46

6.2.5 Setting Printer Information

Set the information of the printer used for DICOM printing.
<NOTE>
Up to ten substitute printers can be set. The priority of these printers is in the order of [4-1.
Printer #1>], then #2 to #10.

(1) [4. Set Printer>] → <ENTER>

→ The [4-1. Printer #1>] setting display appears.
(2) Set the information of the first printer.
[4-1. Printer #1>] → <ENTER>
→ The [4-1-1. PrinterAEname>] setting display appears.
<REMARKS>
• If connecting only one printer, set only [4-1. Printer #1>].
• If setting the information of several printers (up to ten), set [4-2. Printer #2>] to [4-10. Printer
#10>].

(3) Set the printer name (AE Title).

[4-1-1. PrinterAEname>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the AE Title.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “dplink”
• The default for [4-2. Printer #2>] to [4-10. Printer #10>] is not set.
• For main unit software version up to A02, this command will be displayed as [4-1-1. Printer
Name>]. Settings are the same.

(4) Set the printer IP address.

[4-1-2. IP Address>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “172.016.001.030” (Compatible with up to main unit software version A03)
• Default: “172.016.001.040” (Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later)
• Default of [4-2. Printer #2>] to [4-10. Printer #10>]: “000.000.000.000”

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-46
 IN-47

(5) Set the port number for DICOM input of the printer.
[4-1-3. Port No.>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “0000017238” (Compatible with up to main unit software version A03)
• Default: “0000000104” (Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later)
• The first five digits or seven digits of the default port number are set at 0s. When entering the
port number, these 0s need not be entered.
Example
Port=17238←

(6) Set the printable film size and film base color.
[4-1-4. Film Size>] → <ENTER> → [4-1-4-1. Film Size #1>] → <ENTER>
• [1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<NOTE>
• Do not select [2. 35x35].
• Repeat [4-1-4-1. Film Size #1>] to [4-1-4-4. Film Size #4>] for all film sizes printable by the
printer.
• Set unrequired film sizes to “5. Disable”.

<REMARKS>
• The default of [4-1-4-1. Film Size #1>] is “1. 35x43 (Blue)”.
• The default of [4-1-4-2. Film Size #2>] to [4-1-4-4. Film Size #4>] is “5. Disable”.

(7) Set the printable recording method.

[4-1-5. Image Type>] → <ENTER>
• [1. Standard Scan] : Select for 10 pix/mm only.
• [2. Enable Fine S.] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 20 pix/mm.
• [3. Enable 300dpi] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 300 dpi.
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “3. Enable 300dpi” (Compatible with up to main unit software version A03)
• Default: “1. Standard Scan” (Compatible with main unit software version A04 or later)

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-47
 IN-47.1

(8) Set the printer name for display.

<NOTE>
• Perform this setting when using main unit software version A03 or later. However as this
setting is valid only if connecting AD-I/F, it need not be set if connecting E-I/F.
• When entering the printer name for display in this setting, do not use the same name as [4-
1-1. PrinterAEname>] (printer AE Title). Otherwise, this setting will be set to [2. Disable].

[4-1-6. Alias Name>] → <ENTER>

• [1. Enable>] : The printer name for display is used.
• [2. Disable] : The printer name for display is not used.
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• The printer name for display can be set with a unique name different from that set at [4-1-1.
PrinterAEname>] (printer AE Title) to enable easy differentiation of printers connected on
the network.
The printer name for display set is used as the printer name displayed on the remote panel
if connecting AD-I/F.
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the printer name for display.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “2. Disable”

(9) To set the information of several printers (up to 10), change the printer number,
and repeat steps (2) to (8).

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-47.1
 IN-47.2

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-47.2
 IN-47.3

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-47.3
 IN-47.4

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-47.4
 IN-48

6.3 Settings for E-I/F Connection

If connecting E-I/F, after setting “6.2 Common Settings of E-I/F Connection and AD-I/F
Connection”, set the following using the M-Utility.

6.3.1 Setting the Printer Start Standby Timer

Set the standby time (seconds) for the first printer registered to start.
<NOTE>
Perform this setting when using main unit software version A01 or later.

(1) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN

arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key>
→ The [1-1-3. Set Params>] setting display appears.
(2) Set the printer start standby timer.
[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-1-3-2.
WakupSub.tmr>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• When this equipment is started, it waits for the standby time set for the first printer to start. If
the first printer does not start within the standby time, the equipment substitutes it with the
second printer onwards registered.
• The default is “0”. In this case, this equipment will continue waiting for the first printer to start
without substituting the printer.
• Range which can be entered: 0 to 6000 seconds (100 minutes)
• As it normally takes less than 5 minutes for the printer to set into the image data receivable
state (this equipment determines whether the printer has started or not by checking this
state) after power ON, set the standby time for this equipment to wait, if it has determined to
substitute the first printer with another printer after checking whether the first printer has
started, to more than 5 minutes. [Recommended value: 600 seconds (10 minutes)]
However, the time taken for the printer to set into the printable state varies by printer model.
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

6.3.2 Setting Film Information

Set the film size, film base color, and printer recording method notified to the image
input device when returning information on equipment configuration.
<NOTE>
If connecting E-I/F, be sure to set this setting because connection with the printer is confirmed
based on the information of this setting.

(1) [1. System >] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN

arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key>
→ The [1-1-3. Set Params>] setting display appears.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-48
 IN-49

(2) Set the film size, and film base color.

[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow
key> → [1-1-3-3. Film Info. #1>] → <ENTER> → [1-1-3-3-1. Film Size>] →
<ENTER>
• [1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<NOTE>
Do not select [2. 35x35>].

<REMARKS>
Default: “1. 35x43 (Blue)”

(3) Set the printer recording method.

[1-1-3-3. Film Info. #1>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-1-3-3-2.
Image Type>] → <ENTER>
• [1. Standard Scan] : Select for 10 pix/mm only.
• [2. Enable Fine S.] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 20 pix/mm.
• [3. Enable 300dpi] : Select for 10 pix/mm + 300 dpi.
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
Default: “1. Standard Scan”

(4) If two film sizes are available, change to [1-1-3-4. Film Info. #2>], and carry out
steps (2) and (3).
<NOTE>
If only one film size is available, set only [1-1-3-3. Film Info. #1>], and set the film size of [1-1-
3-4. Film Info. #2>] to “5. Disable”.

<REMARKS>
Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-49
 IN-50

6.3.3 Setting the Default Film Size

Set the film size and film base used by the image input device.
<NOTE>
Perform this setting only when inputting images from the E-I/F connected FCR7000/AC-2
series image reader.

(1) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN

arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key>
→ The [1-1-3. Set Params>] setting display appears.
(2) Set the film size and film base color.
[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow
key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-
1-3-6. Film Size>] → <ENTER>
• [1. 35x43>] : Select for 35x43 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [2. 35x35>] : Select for 35x35 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [3. 26x36>] : Select for 26x36 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
• [4. 20x25>] : Select for 20x25 cm film size.
Also select the film base color (blue, clear).
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<NOTE>
Do not select [2. 35x35>].

<REMARKS>
• Default: “1. 35x43 (blue)”
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-50
 IN-51

6.3.4 Setting Printer Substitution

Set whether to use the substitute printer during operations.
<NOTE>
• Perform this setting when using main unit software version A01 or later.
• Set the same value (Enable/Disable) as that of [3-4. Printer Sub.>] performed in step (5) of
“6.2.4 Setting the DICOM Protocol”.

(1) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN

arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key>
→ The [1-1-3. Set Params>] setting display appears.
(2) Set whether to use the substitute printer during operations.
[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow
key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> →
<DOWN arrow key> → [1-1-3-7. Printer Sub.>] → <ENTER>
• [1. Enable] : Enables the substitute printer.
• [2. Disable] : Disables the substitute printer.
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “1. Enable”
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-51
 IN-51.1

6.3.5 Setting Printer Switching Notification

Set whether to notify the image input device when the printer is switched (substituted
and recovered).
<NOTE>
• Perform this setting when using main unit software version A04 or later.
• This setting is effective when values other than “0 (seconds)” is set at “6.3.1 Setting the
Printer Start Standby Timer”, or when [1. Enable] (enables the substitute printer) is set at
“6.3.4 Setting Printer Substitution”.

(1) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN

arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key>
→ The [1-1-3. Set Params>] setting display appears.
(2) Set whether to notify the image input device when the printer is switched.
[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow
key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> →
<DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-1-3-8. Report PrtChg>] →
<ENTER>
• [1. Enable] : Enables notification.
• [2. Disable] : Disables notification.
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “2. Disable”
• When [1. Enable] (enables notification) is set, messages such as “Printer error” or “Standing
by for printer operations”, etc, (differs according to the type of input device) are displayed at
the image input device.
• When [1. Enable] (automatic recovery is enabled) is set at “6.3.7 Setting Printer Automatic
Recovery”, whether printer switching notification is sent to the image input device depends
on this setting.
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-51.1
 IN-51.2

6.3.6 Setting Printer Switching Notification Time

Set the time (seconds) from notification of printer switching error to notification that the
error has been cleared.
<NOTE>
• Perform this setting when using main unit software version A04 or later.
• This setting is effective only when [1. Enable] (enables notification) is set at “6.3.5 Setting
Printer Switching Notification”.

(1) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN

arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key>
→ The [1-1-3. Set Params>] setting display appears.
(2) Set the printer switching notification time.
[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow
key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> →
<DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-1-3-9.
Notice Timer>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “20”
• Range of printer switching notification time (seconds) which can be entered: 1 to 60 seconds
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-51.2
 IN-51.3

6.3.7 Setting Printer Automatic Recovery

Set whether to perform automatic recovery of the printer that was being used before
substitution when this former printer recovers after substitution.
<NOTE>
• Perform this setting when using main unit software version A04 or later.
• This setting is effective only when [1. Enable] (enables the substitute printer) is set at “6.3.4
Setting Printer Substitution”.

(1) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → [1-1. Configuration>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN

arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key>
→ The [1-1-3. Set Params>] setting display appears.
(2) Set whether to perform automatic recovery of the output destination printer.
[1-1-3. Set Params>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow
key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> →
<DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN arrow key> → <DOWN
arrow key> → [1-1-3-10. Prt. Restore>] → <ENTER>
• [1. Enable] : Automatic recovery is enabled.
• [2. Disable] : Automatic recovery is disabled (substitute printer is used).
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “1. Enable”
• Changes made will be effective when the equipment is started up again.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-51.3
 IN-51.4

6.3.8 Ending System Settings

Reboot the equipment to make the settings changed effective.
(1) [0. RETURN>] → <ENTER> → [Are you sure?] → <ENTER>
→ The M-Utility ends.
(2) Turn OFF the POWER switch of the equipment.
→ Check that the equipment terminates.
(3) Turn ON the POWER switch of the equipment.
→ Check that the equipment starts up normally.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-51.4
 IN-52

6.4 Settings for AD-I/F Connection

If connecting AD-I/F, after setting “6.2 Common Settings of E-I/F Connection and AD-I/
F Connection”, perform M-Utility settings (if connecting DRYPIX Station (Image
Manager Function)), and start the remote panel maintenance mode to perform the
necessary settings.

6.4.1 Setting for DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function)

Connection
<NOTE>
• Perform this settings when connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using
main unit software version A03 or later.
Also perform the settings for connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) in
“6.4.4 Setting the Remote Panel Maintenance Mode”.
• If not connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function), or if using main unit software
version up to A02, skip this settings and proceed onto “6.4.2 Ending the M-Utility”.

(1) [7. Set Station>] → <ENTER>

→ The [7-1. Station Name] setting display appears.
(2) Set the host name of DRYPIX Station.
[7-1. Station Name] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 16 characters can be entered for the host name of DRYPIX Station.
If using less than 16 characters, enter “←” at the end to indicate the end of the character
string.
• Default: “DS”

(3) Set the IP address of DRYPIX Station.

[7-2. IP Address>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
Default: “170.016.001.070”

(4) Set the port number of DRYPIX Station.

[7-3. Port No.>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “0000010101”
• The first five digits of the default port number are set at 0s. When entering the port number,
these 0s need not be entered.
Example
Port=10101←

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-52
 IN-53

(5) Set the response waiting time (seconds) from DRYPIX Station.
[7-4. Response tmr>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “60”
• Range of response waiting time (seconds) which can be entered: 1 to 60 seconds

(6) Set the timeout time (seconds) for detecting communication errors with DRYPIX
Station.
[7-5. Reset Timer>] → <ENTER>
→ After setting, press <ENTER>.
<REMARKS>
• Default: “0300”
• Range of timeout time (seconds) which can be entered: 1 to 1800 seconds

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-53
 IN-54

6.4.2 Ending the M-Utility

Reboot the equipment to make the settings changed effective.
(1) [0. RETURN>] → <ENTER> → [Are you sure?] → <ENTER>
→ The M-Utility ends.
(2) Turn OFF the POWER switch of the equipment.
→ Check that the equipment terminates.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-54
 IN-55

6.4.3 Starting the Remote Panel Maintenance Mode

Start the maintenance mode from the remote panel.
<NOTE>
• For details on how to use the remote panel and parameter settings, refer to “SERVICE
MODE 4. REMOTE PANEL SERVICE MODE”.
• Once the maintenance mode has been started, the operation panel will not accept anymore
inputs.

(1) Set the REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the operation panel to REMOTE.

(2) Turn ON the POWER switch on the equipment.
(3) Turn ON the power of the remote panel.
(4) The start-up screen appears, the alarm (beep) sounds, and the initialization
processing screen appears. Press the <F5> key and <F9> key together
continuously within 2 seconds, check that the numeric icon is displayed, and
release the keys.

F5
CPU HARDWARE START UP . . . . .
PROGRAM MEMORY TEST done.
VRAM TEST done.
CHARACTER GENERATOR TEST done.
BUS ERROR TEST done.
BUZZER TEST done.
IPL DIAGNOSTICS DONE
WAIT A MINUTE Initialization in progress. F9
Wait a minute.

Start-up screen Initialization processing screen

FP3B0512.EPS

→ The main menu of the maintenance mode is displayed about a minute after the numeric
icons appear.

0 1.Installation 5
2.Utility
0.End
1 6
Select no.=_
2 7

3 8

4 9

FP3F0352.EPS

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-55
 IN-55.1

6.4.4 Setting the Remote Panel Maintenance Mode

<NOTE>
• At [1-2-4. Language to operation panel] (set up displayed language) of “Connection” (set up
system connection), select Japanese or English as standard. In other cases, complete all
the settings in the following, and perform the settings for the desired language.
• If connecting an analog video or digital video, enter “Video Parameter” (create video
parameters) according to the Video Parameter Table provided for each connecting device.
• If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version
A03 or later, also implement [1-2-7. DRYPIX Station] (DRYPIX Station connection setting)
of “Connection” (set up system connection).
Also edit other files related to connection according to the environment of the place of
installation.
“SERVICE MODE 4.5 Specifications of Files Related to DRYPIX Station
(Image Manager Function) Connection”

(1) Execute all the “installation” items of the maintenance mode below in order.
“SERVICE MODE 4.2 Maintenance Mode”
Set the followings for CH1.
• Connection (System connection setting)
• Default value (Default value setting)
• Action switch (Software processing function setting)
• Film parameter (Film output setting)
• Video parameter (Video parameter creation)
(2) When ending the maintenance mode, save the configuration. If video parameters
have been entered, save the video parameters.
(3) Turn OFF the power of the remote panel according to the message.
(4) Turn ON the power of the remote panel, and check that the equipment starts up
normally.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-55.1
 IN-55.2

6.4.5 Language Display of Remote Panel

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Prepare a memory card for installing a foreign language to the remote panel.

<NOTE>
• Implement this item only when displaying the remote panel in languages other than
Japanese or English.
• Supported languages:
Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish

(1) Start the maintenance mode from the remote panel.

(2) Select “Installation”-“Connection”-“Language to operation panel”.

[1] [Store] [2] [Store] [4] [Store]

(3) Select the desired language from the display language selection menu.
(4) Save the configuration, and turn OFF the power of the remote panel.
(5) Install the remote panel software of the language selected at step (3) above.
“REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT 2.3 Installing the Remote Panel Software”
(6) Turn OFF/ON the power of the remote panel, and check that the language set is
displayed.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-55.2
 IN-55.3

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-55.3
 IN-55.4

BLANK PAGE

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-55.4
 IN-56

6.5 Checking Connection Between This Equipment and

Printer
Print the test pattern image from this equipment, and check for problems in the
connection between this equipment, DICOM network, and printer.
<NOTE>
• Before carrying out this check, check the installation and operations of the printer, and that
all settings related to DICOM input have been completed.
If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version
A03 or later, check that installation and various settings of DRYPIX Station have been
completed.
• If misoperations and image output problems occur in this check, refer to
“TROUBLESHOOTING” for the appropriate remedy.
Check for problems in the settings of this equipment and connected devices, as well as
those in the network facilities.

6.5.1 Checks for E-I/F Connection

Start the M-Utility, and carry out test printing.
Check that test print film is output normally from the printer.
(1) Start the M-Utility.
(2) [5. Test Print>] → <ENTER> → [5-1. Pattern 1] → <ENTER>
→ The printer information set in “6.2.5 Setting Printer Information” will be displayed.
<NOTE>
Information on printers connected which are in the printable state and whose information have
been preset in this equipment will be displayed.

(3) Select the printer name (AE Title), and press <ENTER>.
→ The film size input display appears.
(4) Select the film size, and press <ENTER>.
→ The film base color input display appears.
(5) Select the base color, and press <ENTER>.
→ Check that test print film (SMPTE pattern) is output to the selected printer.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-56
 IN-57

6.5.2 Checks for AD-I/F Connection

Start the service option on the remote panel, and carry out test printing.
Check that test print film is output normally from the printer.
(1) Turn ON the power of the remote panel.
Check that the SERVICE OPTION icon is displayed on the remote panel.
If the icon is not displayed, check that “SERVIVE MODE 4.3 SERVICE OPTION“, and
display the SERVICE OPTION icon.
(2) Select “SERVICE OPTION”, and implement “TEST 9 PATTERN 1” of “TEST
PRINT”.
“SERVICE MODE 4.3.5 TEST PRINT”
→ Check that test print film (SMPTE pattern) is output to the printer.
<NOTE>
If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version A03
or later, “TEST PRINT” must be implemented with study information in the unidentified state. If
implemented with study information in the identified state, test patterns will not be printed
normally.
Also check that when “TEST PRINT” is implemented, test print film is output to the printer via
DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function).
Data will not be output for storage regardless of whether the Network icon on the remote panel
routine screen is displayed as ON or OFF.

006-260-02
01.20.2003 FM3671 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-57
 IN-58

7. CHECKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE IMAGE

INPUT DEVICE AND IMAGE I/O
<NOTE>
• Before carrying out this check, check the installation and operations of connected devices
independently, and that all settings related to image output have been completed.
• If misoperations and image output problems occur in this check, refer to
“TROUBLESHOOTING” for the appropriate remedy.
Check for problems in the settings of this equipment and connected devices, and in the
connection of the interface cable.

7.1 E-I/F Connection

7.1.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment by Remote

Operations
(1) Set the REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the operation panel to REMOTE.
(2) Turn ON the power of the E-I/F image input device.
(3) Check that this equipment starts up.

7.1.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Device

Ask the user to output images from the E-I/F image input device to which this
equipment is connected, and check that films are output normally to printers connected
on the network.
Check the following items.
• Check that printing is error-free.
• Check that there are no problems in the image.
<NOTE>
This equipment does not have the image quality adjustment function. Adjust the image quality
of printed images at the E-I/F image input device.

7.1.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment by Remote

Operations
(1) Turn OFF the E-I/F image input device.
(2) Check that this equipment starts system termination, and the power goes OFF.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-58
 IN-59

7.2 AD-I/F Connection

7.2.1 Adjusting the Image Interface Board

For details on adjusting the image interface board when an analog video or digital video
is connected, refer to “APPENDIX 1. SETTING, CONNECTING, ADJUSTING THE
IMAGE I/F BOARD”.
• DVI90A → “A1.2.3 Adjusting the DVI90A Board”
• HAV90A → “A1.3.3 Adjusting the HAV90A Board”
• HAV90B → “A1.4.3 Adjusting the HAV90B Board”
• HAV90E → “A1.5.3 Adjusting the HAV90E Board”
• Video fine adjustment → “A1.6 Adjusting Image Format”
<NOTE>
If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version A03
or later, video fine adjustment must be implemented with study information in the unidentified
state. If implemented with study information in the identified state, films for checking will not be
printed normally.
Data will not be output for storage regardless of whether the Network icon on the remote panel
routine screen is displayed as ON or OFF.

7.2.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Device

Ask the user to output images from the external device to which this equipment is
connected, and check that films are output normally to printers connected on the
network.
Check the following items.
• Check that printing is error-free.
• Check that there are no problems in the image.
<NOTE>
• This equipment does not have the image quality adjustment function. Adjust the image
quality of printed images at the printer. (The LUT number and enlargement/reduction
processing type can be specified in this equipment.)
• If connecting DRYPIX Station (Image Manager Function) using main unit software version
A03 or later, be sure to identify study information and complete the procedure for starting
studies first.
Also check that films are output to the printer via DRYPIX Station (Image Manager
Function).
Check that data is output to the image server/viewer for storage via DRYPIX Station (Image
Manager Function) after completing the procedure for ending studies.

7.2.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment by Remote

Operations
(1) Turn OFF the power of the remote panel.
(2) Check that this equipment starts system termination, and the power goes OFF.
006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-59
 IN-60

8. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

8.1 Backing Up Individual Data

Save individual data set on a FD to create a backup FD.
<REMARKS>
Set the FD for saving (DOS formatted) into the FD drive, and execute [2-2-2. Save to FD>] to
save only LAN configuration files.

(1) Turn ON the power of the equipment.

(2) Set a FD (DOS formatted) for saving into the FD drive.
<REMARKS>
The FD can be formatted in this equipment.

(3) Start the M-Utility.

(4) [1. System>] → <ENTER> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-2. FD>] → <ENTER> →
[1-2-1. Indiv. Data>] → <ENTER> → [Save to FD] → <ENTER>
→ The individual data will be saved in the FD.
<REMARKS>
Execution time: About 6 minutes

(5) Remove the FD from the FD drive.

(6) <CANCEL> → <CANCEL> → <CANCEL> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-3. Err.
Log Data>]
Proceed to “8.2.1 Checking the Error Log”.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-60
 IN-61

8.2 Checking and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at

Installation
Check for the presence of errors which occur at installation using the M-Utility, and
save the error log on a FD if necessary.

8.2.1 Checking the Error Log

(1) [1-3. Err.Log. Data>] → <ENTER> → [1-3-1. Error Log #1] → <ENTER>
→ The error log #1 display appears.
(2) Refer to the error codes one by one, and check that no serious error has occurred.
(3) <CANCEL> → <DOWN arrow key> → [1-3-2. Clear>]
Proceed to “8.2.2 Deleting Error Logs”.

8.2.2 Deleting Error Logs

(1) [1-3-2. Clear>] → <ENTER> → [CONTINUE?] → <ENTER>
→ All error log data will be cleared.
(2) <CANCEL> → <CANCEL> → <CANCEL> → <UP arrow key> → [0. RETURN>]
→ <ENTER> → [Are you sure?] → <ENTER>
→ M-Utility is ended.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-61
 IN-62

8.3 Terminating the Equipment

If connected to E-I/F image input device, turn OFF the power of the device, and then
check that the power of this equipment goes OFF.
If connected to AD-I/F image input device, turn OFF the power of the remote panel, and
then check that the power of this equipment goes OFF.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-62
 IN-63

8.4 Reinstalling Covers

(1) Install all covers removed.
• Right cover
• Front cover

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-63
 IN-64

8.5 Installing the Equipment

Move the equipment to the actual place of installation, and set the equipment for use by
the user.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-64
 IN-65

8.6 Cleaning the Equipment

(1) Clean all covers with a moist cloth.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-65
 IN-66

APPENDIX 1 SETTING, CONNECTING, ADJUSTING

THE IMAGE I/F BOARD

A1.1 DPI90A/B Board

A1.1.1 Setting and Installing DPI90A/B Board

Make appropriate switch settings on the DPI90A/B board, and insert the board into the
image interface board slot.
T1 setting Setting time T1 setting Setting time T2 setting Setting time T3 setting Setting time
0 500ns 8 128µs 0 150ns 0 150ns
1 1µs 9 256µs 1 250ns 1 250ns
2 2µs A 512µs 2 500ns 2 500ns
3 4µs B 1.024ms 3 1µs 3 1µs
4 8µs C 2.048ms 4 2µs 4 2µs
5 16µs D 4.096ms 5 4µs 5 4µs
6 32µs E 8.192ms 6 8µs 6 8µs
7 64µs F 16.384ms 7 16µs 7 16µs
8 32µs 8 32µs
9 64µs 9 64µs
∗ CN6, CN7 : Not used
A 102µs A 102µs
∗ JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5 : No Jumper (Not used)
B~F Invalid B~F Invalid

Rotary switch for image data transfer request Image data parity setting (S7-1, -2)
signal width setting (T1, T2, T3) OFF
T1 None
DAREQ 2 1
[Normal] (OFF time)
T1 T2 OFF
[Retransmission DAREQ Odd
request] (OFF time) 2 1
REP OFF
(ON time) T3 Even
2 1

JP2 CN3
S7 S6
CN7 ADR SLOT T3 T2 T1 DIGITAL
JP1 DATA
JP3
CN4
S8
HOST
JP4
JP5 F3 F4
CN5
PANEL
CN6
F1 F2

CN1 CN2

HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch HOST-I/F baud rate select switch
(S8, S6-6) (S6-1-4)
RS232C setup RS422 setup OFF
9600 bps setup
Rotary switch for selecting S8 S8 4 3 2 1
DPI90A/DPI90B board
OFF

OFF
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

input channel OFF

IN ch ADR SLOT 4800 bps setup

4 3 2 1
1ch 1 1
OFF
Invalid Other
2400 bps setup
4 3 2 1
S6 S6
OFF OFF OFF
1200 bps setup
6 6 4 3 2 1

FP8C0308.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-66
 IN-67

<NOTE>
• HOST I/F switch settings are necessary only when HOST I/F auto-filming is used; these
switches should be set in accordance with the unit-specific data in the auto-filming
parameter table set forth separately.
• Image data setup switches should be set in accordance with the unit-specific data in the
digital image data parameter table set forth separately.

A1.1.2 Connecting to DPI90A/B Board

(1) Connect the digital data I/F cable to CN3 (labeled DIGITAL DATA on the board
retaining panel) of the DPI90A/B board.
(2) Connect the HOST auto-filming I/F cable to CN4 (labeled HOST on the board
retaining panel) of the DPI90A/B board.
<NOTE>
The HOST auto-filming I/F cable should be connected only when the HOST auto-filming is
applicable. Types of interfaces include the RS232C interface, RS422 interface, and DPI
board-specific interfaces (those specific to Siemens auto-filming and Picker MR auto-filming,
etc.).

(3) Connect the remote panel I/F cable to CN5 (labeled PANEL on the board
retaining panel) of the DPI90A/B board.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-67
 IN-68

A1.2 DVI90A Board

A1.2.1 Setting and Installing DVI90A Board

Make appropriate switch and connector (short pin) settings on the DVI90A board, and
insert the board into the image interface board slot.

CN8 configuration HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch (S1, S2)

3
ID

O
O

F
F
F
F
ID 2
ID
1
8

RS422 setup
N
C

2
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
2
1
Rotary switch for DV190A
board input channel select (S4, S5) Fixed to OFF
DVI board setup because not
(factory default setup) S5 S4 used

O
F
F

F
F
IN ch (SLOT) (ADR)
ID2
RS232C setup
1ch 1 1

2
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3

1
ID1 Invalid Other S1 S2

S5 S4
CN8 S1 S2

CN6 DIGITAL
CN5 VIDEO

CN4
CN50 HOST
CN51

CN18
CN13
F1 PANEL

CN1 CN2

Connector for selecting Connector for Connector selecting pixel clock Connector for selecting sync
video signal type selecting pixel clock rising edge/falling edge of signal polarity of video signal
frequency of video video signal (Supported by H/K version)
signal (Supported by H/K version) Factory default setup
Factory default setup
1 CN50 (Horizontal sync)
HS LS

CS Component & Less than CN51 (Vertical sync)

2
SS HD & VD 40 MHz
CLKH
3 Falling edge NOM Normal sync
CLKL polarity
REV (Factory default
1
HS LS

CS Component & Over 40 MHz setup)

2 to less than CLKH Rising edge NOM
SS Composite-sync 80 MHz (Factory default
3 CLKL setup)
Reversed
REV
sync polarity

CN5/CN6 Connector for selecting horizontal sync interval of video signal

VR CN5/CN6 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal sync frequency
H70K
H50K H70K 14.286~20.000µs 50~70kHz
H37K H50K 20.000~27.027µs 37~50kHz
H37K 27.027~36.364µs 27.5~37kHz
VR Invalid
FP8C0305.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-68
 IN-69

<NOTE>
• HOST I/F switch settings are necessary only when HOST I/F auto-filming is used; these
switches should be set in accordance with the unit-specific data in the auto-filming
parameter table set forth separately.
• The video signal select connector (short pin) should be set in accordance with the unit-
specific data in the video parameter table set forth separately.

A1.2.2 Connecting to DVI90A Board

(1) Connect the digital video cable to the connector (labeled DIGITAL VIDEO on the
board retaining panel) of the DVI90A board.
<NOTE>
When connecting the digital video cable to the HOST, use the supplied cable clamp to screw
the shield exposed portion of the cable down to the metal portion of the HOST housing.
Metal portion of HOST housing

Shield exposed portion

Digital video cable

connecting portion
Digital video cable

[Attach] Cable clamp

Screw

FP3B0937.EPS

(2) Connect the remote panel I/F cable to the connector (labeled PANEL on the
board retaining panel) of the DVI90A board.
(3) Connect the HOST auto-filming I/F cable to the connector (labeled HOST on the
board retaining panel) of the DVI90A board.
<NOTE>
The HOST auto-filming I/F cable should be connected only when the HOST auto-filming
specification is applicable.
There are two interface types: RS232C and RS422.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-69
 IN-70

A1.2.3 Adjusting DVI90A Board

Sync phase signal
adjustment switch (S1)

Interlace acquisition start line switching connector S1 Phase delay

(Supported by version G or later)
0 0ns
Acquisition start line ODD setting 1 2ns
(factory default setup)
ODD EVEN 2 4ns
Acquisition start line EVEN setting 3 6ns
ODD EVEN 4 8ns
(Only Q1 labeled on the EVEN side for the G/J version) 5 10ns
6 12ns
7 14ns

D2 D1

S1 DIGITAL
VIDEO

CN450
HOST

F1 PANEL

CN1 CN2
FP8A0101.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-70
 IN-71

■ Adjusting Sync Signal Phase of DVI90A Board

The sync signal phase adjustment has two roles as follows.

● Phase Adjustment for Sampling Clock and Image Input Signal

Assume that an input signal (8-bit digital video data for the DVI90A board) is provided
containing black and white vertical stripes at intervals of one dot. Even if the input
signal has the same dot clock and sampling frequency, there may be cases where
accurate sampling is not made if sampling is made at dot transitions from white to black
as shown in [B]. In this case, the image looks blurred.
This phenomenon can be remedied by achieving the sampling phase as shown in [A].
To do so, adjust the sync signal phase.
White
Image input signal

Black

[A] Correct sampling point

[B] Incorrect sampling point

FP3B0904.EPS

● Phase Adjustment for Sampling Clock and Horizontal Sync Signal

If the horizontal sync signal is unstable with respect to the sampling clock, an image
with several pixel offsets in the horizontal direction may be generated.
Examples of vertical-grid images acquired are shown below.
Normal image Pixel offset image

Straight line Offset in several pixels

FP3B0905.EPS

A video signal with a pixel clock frequency of 40MHz or higher is acquired with a two-
split sampling scheme (one line is recorded twice by splitting it into odd and even
pixels). For example, if pixel offset occurs only during acquisition of odd pixels, an
improper image with every other pixel offset results.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-71
 IN-72

For example, if a rising edge of the horizontal sync signal is located in the middle of the
rising edge of the sampling clock as shown in [C], a normal image is outputted.
However, if the horizontal sync signal rises with virtually the same timing as the rising
edge of the sampling clock as shown in [D], the timing of the horizontal sync signal
becomes unstable with respect to the sampling clock, so that the count start position is
offset for each line, resulting in pixel offset.
If pixel offset occurs for the reason mentioned above, it can be remedied by varying the
phase of the sampling clock. To do so, adjust the sync signal phase.
1 line

Horizontal sync signal

Correct sampling
[C]
clock timing

Incorrect sapling
[D] clock timing
FP3B0906.EPS

● Adjustment Procedure
In order to prevent occurrence of two types of image artifacts mentioned above, make
sync signal phase adjustments.
Print out while tweaking the phase adjustment rotary switch S1, and determine
optimum conditions based on the resulting images.
Note that the phase can be adjusted in 8 steps (2 ns for one step, from 0 to 14 ns) with
S1.

■ Digital Video Signals That Permit Proper Image Acquisition According to Version of
DVI90A Board
When connected to a diagnosis unit that outputs digital video signals of the following
specifications, the DVI90A board of version G or later should be used. If an image is
acquired using the DVI90A board of any earlier version, the resulting image will
become improper.

● Signal Where the Total Number of Pixels Per Line is Odd

• Example of relevant host equipment (there may be more host equipments in addition
to the one shown below)
Hitachi DFA-100 Series (video spec ID No. 518 used)
Total number of pixels per line
= Pixel clock frequency ÷ horizontal sync frequency
= Pixel clock frequency x horizontal sync interval
= H-back + H-active + H-front (displayed on VIDEO ADJUST screen)
• Phenomenon of improper image
Because image data is acquired with offsets in increments of one pixel per line,
vertical stripes in the image look jaggy.
• Adjustment procedure
If the DVI90A board of version G or later is used, images are acquired properly, so
there is no need for adjustment.
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-72
 IN-73

● Signal That is Interlaced and Whose Blank Interval is at a White Level (note,
however, that a composite sync signal with no serrated pulse cannot be
supported)
• Example of relevant host equipment (there may be more host equipments in
addition to the one shown below)
Shimadzu CT INTELLECT (video spec. ID No. 501 used)
• Phenomenon of improper image
One blank line is placed at the beginning in the horizontal direction of an image.
When the image acquisition area is moved for one line (minimum unit of adjustment)
with VIDEO ADJUST in order to eliminate this blank line, both ODD and EVEN fields
are moved if the signal is interlaced, so that the area is actually moved for two lines.
As a result, the image that lacks one line of information at the beginning will result.
Furthermore, even if interlace ODD/EVEN switching in VIDEO ADJUST is
performed, this capability switches ODD/EVEN fields during image data synthesis
after image acquisition, so that the blank line cannot be eliminated.
“A1.5 Adjusting Image Format”
• Adjustment procedure
Using the DVI90A board of version G or later, adjust the acquisition position for the
beginning line in accordance with the following adjustment steps.
Occurrence of an image that is blank at the beginning or
image that lacks a line at the beginning

Using VIDEO ADJUST in Service Option, "A1.5 Adjusting Image Format"

adjust the vertical parameters (V-back/V-front)

Check the OK
output image

NG
Change the interlace acquisition start line switching connector CN450
(for G/J version, Q1 is labeled on the board)
from the factory default setting of ODD to EVEN.

Check the OK
output image

NG
Change the interlace switching in VIDEO ADJUST of the "A1.5 Adjusting Image Format"
Service Option from the default setting of ODD to EVEN

Check the OK
output image

NG
Change the interlace acquisition start line switching connector CN450
(for G/J version, Q1 is labeled on the board)
back to ODD from EVEN

Check the OK
output image

NG
Change the interlace switching in VIDEO ADJUST of
the Service Option back to ODD from EVEN
(Check to see that the setting on the DVI90A board is ODD) End of adjustment
FP5B0099.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-73
 IN-74

• Interlace acquisition start line switching connector of DVI90A board

CN450 (For G/J version, only Q1 is labeled on the EVEN side.)
Acquisition start line ODD setting (factory default)
EVEN ODD

Acquisition start line EVEN setting

EVEN ODD FP3B0939.EPS

• Explanation for beginning-line acquisition position adjustment

For an interlaced signal, image data is transferred twice: one for the ODD (odd lines)
field and the other for the EVEN (even lines) field.
Thus, the image data is sent in the following format. Note, however, that the format
diagram shown below is a conceptual diagram, so actual signal waveforms and
timings may be different.
(EVEN field) –2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12

(ODD field) –1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13

(For Shimadzu CT INTELLECT, image data is placed at 0 line, and data prior to -1 line is blsnk.) FP3B0940.EPS

When the image data of the above-described format is adjusting by varying the
settings for interlace acquisition start line switching on the DVI90A board, interlace
switching in VIDEO ADJUST, and VIDEO ADJUST value, the image are configured
in the order shown in the table below.
Acquisition start line Interlace setting in
Con- Order of line writes on print image
setting on DVI90A VIDEO ADJUST
dition
board
1 ODD ODD –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 ODD EVEN 0 –1 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 10 9
3 EVEN ODD –1 –2 1 0 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8
4 EVEN EVEN –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VIDEO ADJUST value –1 line Optimal value +1 line +2 line +3 line +4 line
TP3B0901.EPS

If image data is placed at 0 line, as in Shimadzu CT INTELLECT, Condition 1 means

that even when VIDEO ADJUST value is changed, data for both 0 line and –1 line is
moved together, so that white blank or line omission at the beginning occurs.
Conditions 2 and 3 will result in an improper image due to improper interlaced line
format.
By optimally adjusting the VIDEO ADJUST value under Condition 4, a proper image
acquisition can be achieved without white blank or line omission at the beginning.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-74
 IN-75

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-75
 IN-76

A1.3 HAV90A Board

A1.3.1 Setting and Installing HAV90A Board

Make appropriate switch and connector (short pin) settings on the HAV90A board, and
insert the board into the image interface board slot.
HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch (S1, S2)
CN8 configuration
3
ID

O
O

F
F
F
F
RS422 setting
ID 2
ID
C 1
8
N

2
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
2
1
Fixed to OFF
because not
Rotary switch for HAV90A used

O
F
F

F
F
HAV board setup board input channel
(factory default setup) select (S4, S5) RS232C setting
ID1 ID2 S5 S4

2
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3

1
IN ch (SLOT) (ADR) S1 S2
1ch 1 1
CN5
Invalid Others Location for
retaining spare
connector (s)
(Version H or later)
S5 S4
CN8 S1 S2
CN11
CN12 A•IN
CN13 CN10
CN7

CN8
A•OUT

HOST
CN15
HD•CS
CN801
VD
F1
PANEL
Connector for selecting video signal
pixel clock frequency
CN1 CN801 Pixel clock frequency CN2
<20M Less than 20 MHz
≥20M 20 MHz or higher

Connector for selecting video signal type

CN15
Video signal type CN11 CN10
With serration pulse Without serration pulse Connector for switching video signal input/output
Composite NO SP CS CV This setup should
normally be used CN7 Buffer output
Component &
NO SP CS SV regardless of the
Composite-sync BF TH
connection type
of the external OP TR
Component &
NO SS SV
HD & VD devices CN8 75 Ω termination
(HOST/CRT).
Connector for selecting horizontal sync interval of video signal If glitches such as
CN12/CN13 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal sync frequency improper CN7 Through output
brightness occur
H80K 12.500~13.333µs 75~80kHz BF TH
with the CRT
connected to the OP TR
H75K 13.333~20.000µs 50~75kHz
A·OUT connector CN8 Termination OFF
H50K 20.000~27.027µs 37~50kHz when the power is
turned ON/OFF.
H37K 27.027~37.037µs 27~37kHz
H27K 37.037~50.000µs 20~27kHz
H20K 50.000~64.516µs 15.5~20kHz FP8A0102.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-76
 IN-77

<NOTE>
• HOST I/F switch settings are necessary only when HOST I/F auto-filming is used; these
switches should be set in accordance with the unit-specific data in the auto-filming
parameter table set forth separately.
• The video signal select connector (short pin) should be set in accordance with the unit-
specific data in the video parameter table set forth separately.

A1.3.2 Connecting to HAV90A Board

(1) Connect the video cables or supplied termination connectors to the connectors
(labeled as A•IN, A•OUT, HD•CS, VD on the board retaining panel) of the
HAV90A board. There are four types of connections as follows.
For COMPOSITE VIDEO signal (with video return)
H A• A
V D O •
D • U I
C N HAV90A board
S T Remove the supplied termination connector,
and connect the video cable to the A•OUT connector.
COMPOSITE VIDEO HOST

CRT

For COMPOSITE VIDEO signal (with no video return)

H A• A
V D O •
D • U I
C N HAV90A board
S T Keep the supplied termination connector attached
to the A•OUT connector.
Termination
connector CRT

COMPOSITE VIDEO
HOST

For COMPONENT & COMPOSITE SYNC signals

H A• A
V D O •
D • U I
C N HAV90A board
S T Keep the supplied termination connector attached
Termination connector to the A•OUT connector.
HOST
VIDEO

COMPOSITE SYNC

For COMPONENT & HD & VD signals

H A• A
V D O •
D • U I
C
S T N HAV90A board
Keep the supplied termination connector attached
Termination connector to the A•OUT connector.
HOST
VD HD VIDEO

FP3B0941.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-77
 IN-78

<NOTE>
• For the video cable, its end marked as HOST should be connected to the diagnostics unit.
• To connect in the order of HOST, monitor (CRT), and HAV90A board, the termination select
switch located on the CRT should be in the “no termination” position.
To connect in the order of HOST, HAV90A board, and CRT, the termination select switch
located on the CRT should be in the “terminated” position.
• To connect in the order of HOST, CRT, and HAV90A board, attach the supplied termination
connector to the A•OUT connector.
If not, the termination circuit within the HAV90A board is shut down when the power of this
equipment is turned OFF, resulting in impedance mismatch. Impedance mismatch
produces glitches such as improper brightness or ghost on the CRT.

(2) Connect the remote panel I/F cable to the connector (labeled PANEL on the
board retaining panel) of the HAV90A board.
(3) Connect the HOST auto-filming I/F cable to the connector (labeled HOST on the
board retaining panel) of the HAV90A board.

<NOTE>
The HOST auto-filming I/F cable should be connected only when the HOST auto-filming
specification is applicable.
There are two interface types: RS232C and RS422.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-78
 IN-79

A1.3.3 Adjusting HAV90A Board

TP105 TP12 R302 R301

AGND ADIN GAIN OFFSET

S1 ON(S2)OFF D8
Side View
Side View

Connector for selecting filter

Connector for setting presence/
absence of serration pulse F20M 20 MHz low pass filter inserted
With serration pulse CN15:NO F40M 40 MHz low pass filter inserted
Without serration pulse CN15:SP F80M 80 MHz low pass filter inserted
TH No filter
PLL lock Check pin for
display LED adjusting
GAIN, OFFSET

D2 D1
TP105 R302 CN9
S1 S2 D8 A•IN
TP12 CN7
AGND R301
CN8
A•OUT

Switch for
adjusting HOST
Control for
sync phase CN15 adjusting GAIN
signal CN16 HD•CS

Control for
adjusting OFFSET VD
F1
PANEL

CN1 CN2

Connector for switching video signal input/output

Connector for adjusting pixel deviation This setup should
RG: No delay of the sampling clock normally be used CN7 Buffer output
count start signal regardless of the
IR: Delay of the sampling clock count start signal BF TH
connection type
of the external OP TR
devices CN8 75 Ω termination
(HOST/CRT).
If glitches such as
improper CN7 Through output
brightness occur
BF TH
with the CRT
connected to the OP TR
A·OUT connector CN8 Termination OFF
when the power is
turned ON/OFF.

FP8A0103.EPS

<NOTE>
The adjustment procedures described below must be performed in order named.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-79
 IN-80

■ Supplementary Explanation for Video Signal Input/Output Select Connector Setup

The video signal input/output select circuit of the HAV90A board is configured as
illustrated below.

Relay
HOST ON CN7 CN8
75Ω A•IN
A/D
OFF
TH 75Ω TR
BF OP
CRT ON
A•OUT

75Ω OFF

75Ω

FP3B0942.EPS

● CN7 and CN8 Settings

It is necessary to set CN7 and CN8 depending on whether or not CRT’s brightness
glitches caused by power ON/OFF of this equipment.

• When normal (CRT’s brightness glitches are not conspicuous)

CN7 and CN8 should normally be set to BF (buffer output) and TR (75Ω terminated),
respectively, regardless of the connection type of the external devices (HOST and
CRT) (whether connected in the order of HOST, CRT, and HAV90A or in the order of
HOST, HAV90A, and CRT).
With CN7 and CN8 so set, however, if the CRT (which should be terminated at 75Ω)
is connected to the A•OUT connector of the HAV90A board, some difference in the
output signal may occur between power-ON and -OFF of this equipment thus
resulting in brightness glitches for CRT images.
This is because the signal passed via the buffer circuit in the HAV90A board is
outputted to the CRT when this equipment is powered ON; whereas the buffer circuit
is bypassed when powered OFF, so the signal passed through from the A•IN
connector to the A•OUT connector is outputted to the CRT.
• When CRT’s brightness glitches are conspicuous
If the CRT’s brightness glitches are conspicuous with CN7 and CN8 set as described
above, CN7 and CN8 should be set to TH (through output) and OP (termination
OFF), respectively.
With these settings, the signal passed through the A•OUT connector (i.e. the buffer
circuit bypassed) is always outputted, regardless of the power-ON/OFF of this
equipment.
With CN7 and CN8 so set, however, because the signal between the HOST and CRT
is inputted into the HAV90A board, improper image (such as ghosts) are more likely
to occur due to input signal reflections if the connection cable is too long.
Therefore, it is recommended that if CN7 and CN8 are set to TH (through output) and
OP (termination OFF), respectively, the connection cable be as short as possible.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-80
 IN-81

■ Setting Special Input Spec

CN15 should normally be set to NO.
In special cases where there is no serrated pulse in the vertical sync signal of the unit
connected, CN15 should be set to SP. In this case, there is no need for adjustment of
special input spec.

● Example of Special Input Spec. (there is no serrated pulse in the vertical sync
interval)

NO. Host Equipment

1 IMATRON C100

2 GE Advantage Windows

3 GE Starcam 3000
TP5B0001.EPS

More types of applicable host equipment than indicated in the table above are possible.
• Vertical sync signal waveform 1

1 line
No serrated pulse
FP3B0910.EPS

• Vertical sync signal waveform 2

1 line
No serrated pulse
FP3B0911.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-81
 IN-82

■ Adjusting A/D Converter Input of HAV90A Board

Make the following adjustment with a video signal containing both maximum density
and minimum density is supplied from the image signal generator.
Using the oscilloscope, observe the waveform at the GAIN/OFFSET check pin TP12
(ADIN), and adjust the GAIN (R302) and OFFSET (R301) adjustment trimmers until the
voltage is held within the range from 0V to –2.0V. For GND, use the check pin AGND
(TP105).
<NOTE>
Observe the waveform with the oscilloscope set in the DC mode.

0V 00H

Video signal
Adjust to hold the
video signal within
this range.

–2.0V FFH
FP3B0912.EPS

Make adjustments so that the video signal is held within the voltage rage from 0 to –2V
excluding the overshoot and undershoot.

(1) Adjust OFFSET with trimmer R301.

Pedestal level = Black level
When the "setup"
is zero

GND

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

Pedestal level
When the "setup"
is not zero

Black level

GND

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

FP3B0913.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-82
 IN-83

<NOTE>
• Never tamper with trimmers other than specified above.
• Be sure to measure one vertical interval with a specified gray scale signal generated.
• When the “setup” is zero, align the GND line to the pedestal level. When the “setup” is not
zero, align the GND line to the black level.

(2) Adjust GAIN with trimmer R302.

Pedestal level = Black level
When the "setup"
is zero

GND

–2V

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

Pedestal level
When the "setup"
is not zero

Black level

GND

–2V

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

FP3B0914.EPS

<NOTE>
• Never tamper with trimmers other than specified above.
• Be sure to measure one vertical interval with a specified gray scale signal generated.
• The character or other signal level may overshoot the white level. However, be sure to
adjust the white level to –2V.
• If this adjustment is not made properly, optimum gradation conditions will not be obtained.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-83
 IN-84

■ Adjusting Sync Signal Phase of HAV90A Board

Assume that an input signal is provided containing black and white vertical stripes at
intervals of one dot.
Even if the input signal has the same dot clock and sampling frequency, there may be
cases where accurate sampling is not made depending on the sampling point in one
dot. In this case, the image (vertical stripes) appears blurred or wavy.
For actual images, letters look fuzzy on screen or edges of the image appear
unfocused.
Normal image Out-of-phase image

Straight lines Looks wavy

FP3B0930.EPS

1 dot

White
Input signal

Black

[A] Correct (stable) sampling point

[B] Incorrect (unstable) sampling point

FP3B0931.EPS

When sampling is made at dot transitions from white to black as shown in [B], white and
black cannot be sampled correctly. In this case, adjust the sampling phase to attain
sampling in the middle of one dot as shown in [A]. To do so, adjust the sync signal
phase as appropriate.

<NOTE>
Wait until the PLL lock indicator LED (D8) lights, and press the STORE key. When the switch
is changed, it may take some time for the PLL lock indicator LED (D8) to light.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-84
 IN-85

● Adjustment Procedure
Print out while tweaking the phase adjustment rotary switch S1 and slide switch S2 to
obtain optimum conditions such that edges of the image, such as vertical lines and text,
do not look blurred.
The phase can be adjusted in 16 steps (1 ns for one step, 15 ns in total) with S1, and by
16 ns with S2. For adjustment, try out the steps listed in the table below.
Pixel clock S1 S2 Phase delay
Less than 40MHz 0 OFF 0 ns
4 OFF 4 ns
8 OFF 8 ns
C OFF 12 ns
0 ON 16 ns
4 ON 20 ns
8 ON 24 ns
C ON 28 ns
From 40MHz or 0 OFF 0 ns
higher to less than
80MHz 2 OFF 2 ns
4 OFF 4 ns
6 OFF 6 ns
8 OFF 8 ns
A OFF 10 ns
C OFF 12 ns
E OFF 14 ns
TP5B0002.EPS

■ Adjusting Pixel Offset

If the count start signal (horizontal sync) of the sampling clock is unstable with respect
to the sampling clock, an image with several pixel offsets in the horizontal direction may
be generated.
Examples of vertical-grid images acquired are shown below.
Normal image Pixel offset image

Straight lines Offset in several pixels

FP3B0917.EPS

A video signal with a pixel clock frequency of 40MHz or higher is acquired with a two-
split sampling scheme (one line is recorded twice by splitting it into odd and even
pixels). For example, if pixel offset occurs only during acquisition of odd pixels, an
improper image with every other pixel offset results.
006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-85
 IN-86

For example, if a rising edge of the count start signal is located in the middle of the
rising edge of the sampling clock as shown in [A], a normal image is outputted.
However, if the count start signal rises with virtually the same timing as the rising edge
of the sampling clock as shown in [B], the timing of the count start signal becomes
unstable with respect to the sampling clock, so that the count start position is offset for
each line, resulting in pixel offset.
If pixel offset occurs for the reason mentioned above, it can be remedied by delaying
the count start signal.
Sampling clock

1 line
Correct count start
[A]
signal timing

Incorrect count start

[B] signal timing
FP3B0918.EPS

● Adjustment Procedure
In order to delay the count start signal (about 6 ns delay), set CN16 to IR.
RG IR
CN16 With delay in the count start signal of the sampling clock
RG IR
CN16 With no delay in the count start signal of the sampling clock

■ Selecting Filter of HAV90A Board

If image noise is conspicuous, filtering may effectively correct this condition. It is not
recommended, however, to use filter since it may reduce image sharpness to some
degree.
To apply filtering, set the short pins of CN9 as needed.
No filtering

TH
F80M
F40M
F20M

80MHz low-pass filtering

TH
F80M
F40M
F20M

40MHz low-pass filtering

TH
F80M
F40M
F20M

20MHz low-pass filtering

TH
F80M
F40M
F20M FP3B0915.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-86
 IN-87

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-87
 IN-88

A1.4 HAV90B Board

A1.4.1 Setting and Installing HAV90B Board

Make appropriate switch and connector (short pin) settings on the HAV90B board, and
insert the board into the image interface board slot. The short pins used for connectors
CN12 and CN13 for selecting the horizontal sync interval of a video signal are
contained in a vinyl pack attached on the shielding plate when shipped. Use these
short pins for this setting.
Connector for selecting sync signal polarity of video signal
(effective only when CN10 is set to SV)
CN14 CN17 Remarks
Connector for selecting horizontal sync interval of video signal Polarity (horizontal sync) (vertical sync)
CN12/CN13 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal sync frequency
Negative LA (factory default) LA(factory default setup) Use the factory
H80K 12.500~13.333µs 75~80kHz default setting
Positive HA HA fixed
H75K 13.333~20.000µs 50~75kHz
H50K 20.000~27.027µs 37~50kHz
Switching for A•OUT connector termination
H37K 27.027~37.037µs 27~37kHz
When connected in the order
H27K 37.037~50.000µs 20~27kHz of HOST, CRT, and HAV90B 75 Ω
board;or when no CRT is termination
H20K 50.000~64.516µs 15.5~20kHz connected OP TR
When connected in the order
of HOST, HAV90B board, Termination
CN8 configuration OFF
and CRT OP TR
3
ID

ID 2
ID
C 1

HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch

8
N

(S1, S2) S1 S2

O
O

F
F
F
F
Rotary switch for HAV90B board
HAV board setup input channel select (S4, S5) RS422 setting
(factory default setup) S5 S4

2
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
2
1
IN ch (ADR) (SLOT) Fixed to OFF
ID1 ID2
because not
1ch 1 1 used
O

O
F
F

F
F
Invalid Others
Location where the RS232C setting
CN12/CN13 short pins
2
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3
are packed when 1
shipped
S5 S4
CN8 S1 S2

CN17 A•IN
CN12 CN11 CN14
CN13 CN10
CN15 CN19 A•OUT
Connector for selecting
video signal pixel
clock of video signal; HOST
fixed at ≥20M CN8 CN7
(i. e. 20 MHz or higher)
HD•CS

CN801
VD
F1
PANEL

CN1 CN2
Connector for switching video signal input/output
This setup should
Connector for selecting video signal type normally be used CN8 CN7
regardless of the OP BF
CN15 (SP3 is invalid) connection type of
Video signal type CN10 CN11 TR TH
With serration pulse Without serration pulse the external
Composite CV CS NO SP1
devices 75 Ω
(HOST/CRT). Buffer output
termination
Component & If glitches such as
SV CS NO SP1
Composite-sync improper CN8 CN7
Component & brightness occur
SV SS NO with the CRT OP BF
HD & VD
connected to the TR TH
A·OUT connector
when the power is Termination Through output
turned ON/OFF. OFF
FP8A0104.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-88
 IN-89

<NOTE>
• HOST I/F switch settings are necessary only when HOST I/F auto-filming is used; these
switches should be set in accordance with the unit-specific data in the auto-filming
parameter table set forth separately.
• The video signal select connector (short pin) should be set in accordance with the unit-
specific data in the video parameter table set forth separately.

A1.4.2 Connecting to HAV90B Board

(1) Connect the video cables to the connectors (labeled as A•IN, A•OUT, HD•CS, VD
on the board retaining panel) of the HAV90B board. There are four types of
connections as follows.
For COMPOSITE VIDEO signal (with video return)
H A A
D • •
V • O I
D C U
S T N HAV90B board
Connect the video cable to the A·OUT connector.

COMPOSITE VIDEO HOST

CRT

For COMPOSITE VIDEO signal (with no video return)

H A A
V D • •
• O I
D C U
S T N HAV90B board

CRT

COMPOSITE VIDEO
HOST

For COMPONENT & COMPOSITE SYNC signals

H A A
D • •
V • O I
D C U
S T N HAV90B board

HOST
VIDEO

COMPOSITE SYNC

For COMPONENT & HD & VD signals

H A A
V D • •
• O I
D C U HAV90B board
S T N

HOST
VD HD VIDEO

FP3B0922.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-89
 IN-90

<NOTE>
• For the video cable, its end marked as HOST should be connected to the diagnostics unit.
• To connect in the order of HOST, monitor (CRT), and HAV90B board, the termination select
switch located on the CRT should be in the “no termination” position.
To connect in the order of HOST, HAV90B board, and CRT, the termination select switch
located on the CRT should be in the “terminated” position.
• The video cable for use with the HAV90B board is either 3 or 5 meters long. Note, however,
that if the pixel clock is 130MHz or higher, the 3 meter cable be used, and the 5 meter cable
not be used.

(2) Connect the remote panel I/F cable to the connector (labeled PANEL on the
board retaining panel) of the HAV90B board.
(3) Connect the HOST auto-filming I/F cable to the connector (labeled HOST on the
board retaining panel) of the HAV90B board.
<NOTE>
The HOST auto-filming I/F cable should be connected only when the HOST auto-filming
specification is applicable.
There are two interface types: RS232C and RS422.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-90
 IN-91

A1.4.3 Adjusting HAV90B Board

Switching for A•OUT connector termination
When connected in the order
of HOST, CRT, and HAV90B 75 Ω
board;or when no CRT is termination
connected OP TR
When connected in the order
of HOST, HAV90B board, Termination
and CRT OFF
OP TR

Connector for selecting filter(CN9, CN18)

Connector for setting presence/ CN9 CN18
absence of serration pulse F20M:20 MHz low pass filter inserted
With serration pulse CN15:NO F40M:40 MHz low pass filter inserted
Without serration pulse CN15:SP1 F80M:80 MHz low pass filter inserted
(SP3: invalid) TH :No filter

Check pin for adjusting

GAIN, OFFSET
AGND D2 D1

S1 S2
D8 R301 R302
PLL lock TP12 TP105 A•IN
display LED

CN15 CN19
A•OUT
Switch for CN18
adjusting sync
phase signal HOST
CN9
CN8 CN7
Control for
adjusting OFFSET HD•CS
CN16
Control for
adjusting GAIN VD
F1
PANEL

CN1 CN2

Connector for switching video signal input/output

This setup should
normally be used CN8 CN7
regardless of the OP BF
Connector for adjusting pixel deviation connection type of
TR TH
RG: No delay of sampling clock the external
count start signal devices 75 Ω
IR: Delay of sampling clock count start signal (HOST/CRT). Buffer output
termination
If glitches such as
improper CN8 CN7
brightness occur
with the CRT OP BF
connected to the TR TH
A·OUT connector
when the power is Termination Through output
turned ON/OFF. OFF

FP8A0105.EPS

<NOTE>
The adjustment procedures described below must be performed in order named.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-91
 IN-92

■ Supplementary Explanation for Video Signal Input/Output Select Connector Setup

The video signal input/output select circuit of the HAV90B board is configured as
illustrated below.
Relay
HOST ON CN7 CN8
75Ω A • IN
A/D
OFF
TH 75Ω TR
BF OP
CRT ON
A • OUT
CN19 OFF
75Ω
75Ω
OP
TR

75Ω
FP3B0924.EPS

● CN7 and CN8 Settings

It is necessary to set CN7 and CN8 depending on whether or not CRT’s brightness
glitches caused by power ON/OFF of this equipment are noticeable.
• When normal (CRT’s brightness glitches are not conspicuous)
CN7 and CN8 should normally be set to BF (buffer output) and TR (75Ω terminated),
respectively, regardless of the connection type of the external devices (HOST and
CRT) (whether connected in the order of HOST, CRT, and HAV90B or in the order of
HOST, HAV90B, and CRT).
With CN7 and CN8 so set, however, if the CRT (which should be terminated at 75Ω)
is connected to the A•OUT connector of the HAV90B board, some difference in the
output signal may occur between power-ON and -OFF of this equipment, thus
resulting in brightness glitches for CRT images.
This is because the signal passed via the buffer circuit in the HAV90B board is
outputted to the CRT when this equipment is powered ON; whereas the buffer circuit
is bypassed when powered OFF, so the signal passed through from the A•IN
connector to the A•OUT connector is outputted to the CRT.
• When CRT’s brightness glitches are conspicuous
If the CRT’s brightness glitches are conspicuous with CN7 and CN8 set as described
above, CN7 and CN8 should be set to TH (through output) and OP (termination
OFF), respectively.
With these settings, the signal passed through the A•OUT connector (i.e. the buffer
circuit bypassed) is always outputted, regardless of the power-ON/OFF of this
equipment.
With CN7 and CN8 so set, however, because the signal between the HOST and CRT
is inputted into the HAV90B board, improper image (such as ghosts) are more likely
to occur due to input signal reflections if the connection cable is too long.
Therefore, it is recommended that if CN7 and CN8 are set to TH (through output) and
OP (termination OFF), respectively, the connection cable be as short as possible.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-92
 IN-93

● CN19 Setting
It may be necessary to change the CN19 setting depending on how the HAV90B board,
HOST, and CRT are connected. If the CRT is not connected, CN19 should be set to TR
(75Ω terminated).
• When connected in the order of HOST, CRT, and HAV90B board
CN19 should be set to TR (75Ω terminated), and the termination select switch on the
CRT should be set to “not terminated.” If not, the termination circuit in the HAV90B
board is shut off when this equipment is powered OFF, resulting in impedance
mismatch. Impedance mismatch may cause CRT’s brightness glitches or image
ghosts.
• When connected in the order of HOST, HAV90B board, and CRT
CN19 should be set to OP (termination OFF), and the termination select switch on
the CRT should be set to “terminated.”

■ Setting Special Input Spec

CN15 should normally be set to NO.
Only in special cases where there is no serration pulse in the vertical sync signal of the
unit connected, CN15 should be set to SP1.

● Examples of Special Input Spec

• Vertical sync signal waveform 1

1 line
No serrated pulse FP3B0925.EPS

• Vertical sync signal waveform 2

1 line
No serrated pulse FP3B0926.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-93
 IN-94

■ Adjusting A/D Converter Input of HAV90B Board

Make the following adjustment with a video signal containing both maximum density
and minimum density supplied from the image signal generator.
Using the oscilloscope, observe the waveform at the GAIN/OFFSET check pin TP12
(ADIN), and adjust the GAIN (R302) and OFFSET (R301) adjustment trimmers until the
voltage is held within the range from 0V to -2.0V. For GND, use the check pin AGND
(TP105).
<NOTE>
Observe the waveform with the oscilloscope set in the DC mode.

0V 00H

Video signal
Adjust to hold the
video signal within
this range.

–2.0V FFH
FP3B0927.EPS

Make adjustments so that the video signal is held within the voltage range from 0 to -2V
excluding the overshoot and undershoot.

(1) Adjust OFFSET with trimmer R301.

Pedestal level = Black level
When the "setup" is zero

GND

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

When the "setup" is not zero Pedestal level

Black level

GND

Correct Incorrect Incorrect FP3B0928.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-94
 IN-95

<NOTE>
• Never tamper with trimmers other than specified above.
• Be sure to measure one vertical interval with a specified gray scale signal generated.
• When the “setup” is zero, align the GND line to the pedestal level. When the “setup” is not
zero, align the GND line to the black level.

(2) Adjust GAIN with trimmer R302.

Pedestal level = Black level
When the "setup" is zero

GND

–2V

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

When the "setup" is not zero Pedestal level

Black level

GND

–2V

Correct Incorrect Incorrect FP3B0929.EPS

<NOTE>
• Never tamper with trimmers other than specified above.
• Be sure to measure one vertical interval with a specified gray scale signal generated.
• The character or other signal level may overshoot the white level. However, be sure to
adjust the white level to -2V.
• If this adjustment is not made properly, optimum gradation conditions will not be obtained.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-95
 IN-96

■ Adjusting Sync Signal Phase of HAV90B Board

Assume that an input signal is provided containing black and white vertical stripes at
intervals of one dot.
Even if the input signal has the same dot clock and sampling frequency, there may be
cases where accurate sampling is not made depending on the sampling point in one
dot. In this case, the image (vertical stripes) appears blurred or wavy.
For actual images, letters look fuzzy on screen or edges of the image appear
unfocused.
Normal image Out-of-phase image

Straight lines Looks wavy

FP3B0930.EPS

1 dot

White
Input signal

Black

[A] Correct (stable) sampling point

[B] Incorrect (unstable) sampling point

FP3B0931.EPS

When sampling is made at dot transitions from white to black as shown in [B], white and
black cannot be sampled correctly. In this case, adjust the sampling phase to attain
sampling in the middle of one dot as show in [A]. To do so, adjust the sync signal phase
as appropriate.

<NOTE>
Wait until the PLL lock indicator LED (D8) lights, and press the STORE key. When the switch
is changed, it may take some time for the PLL lock indicator LED (D8) to light.

● Adjustment Procedure
Print out while tweaking the phase adjustment rotary switch S1 and slide switch S2 to
obtain optimum conditions such that edges of the image, such as vertical lines and text,
do not look blurred.
The phase can be adjusted in 16 steps (1 ns for one step, 15 ns in total) with S1, and by
16 ns (0 when OFF, +16ns when ON) with S2. Adjust both S1 and S2 in combination so
as to obtain an optimal image over a range from 0 to 31 ns.

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-96
 IN-97

■ Adjusting Pixel Offset

If the count start signal (horizontal sync) of the sampling clock is unstable with respect
to the sampling clock, an image with several pixel offsets in the horizontal direction may
be generated. Examples of vertical-grid images acquired are shown below.
Normal image Pixel offset image

Straight lines Offset in several pixels

FP3B0932.EPS

A video signal with a pixel clock frequency of 80MHz or higher is acquired with a four-
split sampling scheme (one line is acquired by splitting into four). If any offset occurs in
an image being acquired during four acquisitions, an improper image with every four
pixels offset results.
For example, if a rising edge of the count start signal is located in the middle of the
rising edge of the sampling clock as shown in [A], a normal image is outputted.
However, if the count start signal rises with virtually the same timing as the rising edge
of the sampling clock as shown in [B], the timing of the count start signal becomes
unstable with respect to the sampling clock, so that the count start position is offset for
each line, resulting in pixel offset.
If pixel offset occurs for the reason mentioned above, it can be remedied by delaying
the count start signal.
Sampling clock

1 line
Correct count start
[A] signal timing

Incorrect count start

[B] signal timing
FP3B0933.EPS

● Adjustment Procedure
In order to delay the count start signal (about 6 ns delay), set CN16 to IR.
IR RG
CN16 With delay in the count start signal of the sampling clock
IR RG
CN16 With no delay in the count start signal of the sampling clock

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-97
 IN-98

■ Selecting Filter of HAV90B Board

If image noise is conspicuous, filtering may effectively correct this condition. It is not
recommended, however, to use filter since it may reduce image sharpness to some
degree.
To apply filtering, set short pins CN9 and CN18 as needed. Note that both CN9 and
CN18 be set in the same position.
<NOTE>
Because the on-board filter labeling for CN9 and CN18 is located beneath the parts, it cannot
be observed. So, check the board orientation and each setup status with reference to the
illustration below, and then set the short pins as appropriate.

No filtering
CN9 CN18

80MHz low-pass filtering

CN9 CN18

CN9 CN18

40MHz low-pass filtering

CN9 CN18

20MHz low-pass filtering

CN9 CN18

FP8A0106.EPS

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-98
 IN-99

BLANK PAGE

006-260-00
07.10.2002 FM3360 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-99
 IN-100

A1.5 HAV90E Board

A1.5.1 Setting and Installing HAV90E Board

Make appropriate switch and connector (short pin) settings on the HAV90E board, and
insert the board into the image interface board slot.
Switch for selecting horizontal sync interval of video signal
S12/S13 Horizontal sync interval Horizontal sync frequency
Switching connector for A•OUT connector termination
100K 10.000~13.333µs 75~100kHz
When connected in the order
75K 13.333~20.000µs 50~75kHz of HOST, CRT, and HAV90E TR 75 Ω
board;or when no CRT is OP termination
50K 20.000~27.027µs 37~50kHz connected
37K 27.027~37.037µs 27~37kHz When connected in the order TR Termination
27K 37.037~50.000µs 20~27kHz of HOST, HAV90E board,
OP OFF
and CRT
20K 50.000~64.516µs 15.5~20kHz

HAV board setup CN8 configuration HOST I/F RS232C/RS422 select switch
(factory default setup) (S1, S2) S1 S2
3
ID

O
O

F
F
F
F
ID1 ID2
RS422 setting
ID 2
ID
C 1
8
N

2
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
2
1
Fixed to OFF
because not
Rotary switch for HAV90E board used

O
S18

F
F

F
F
PR input channel select (S4, S5)
RS232C setting
S5 S4
NO IN ch (ADR) (SLOT)

2
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3

1
Fixed at
S20 NO setting
PR 1ch 1 1
CN5
NO Invalid Others Location for
retaining spare
connector (s)

S5 S4
CN8 S1 S2

A•IN
S13 S12
CN8
CN19 A•OUT
S18
CN7

S20 S14 HOST

CN10
S17 HD•CS

S19 VD
F1
PANEL

Connector for switching video signal input/output

CN1 CN2
This setup should
normally be used CN8 CN7
regardless of the
OP TH
connection type of
Connector/Switch for selecting TR BF
the external
video signal type
devices 75 Ω
(HOST/CRT). Buffer output Switch for selecting sync signal polarity
termination
Video signal type CN10 S19 of video signal
If glitches such as
improper CN8 CN7 (effective only when CN10 is set to SV)
Composite CV CV brightness occur
TH S14 S17
with the CRT OP Polarity (horizontal sync) (vertical sync)
Component &
SV SV connected to the TR BF
Composite-sync
A·OUT connector Negative LA (factory default) LA (factory default)
Component & when the power is Termination Through output
SV SV
HD & VD turned ON/OFF. OFF Positive HA HA
FP8A0111.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-100
 IN-101

<NOTE>
• HOST I/F switch settings are necessary only when HOST I/F auto-filming is used; these
switches should be set in accordance with the unit-specific data in the auto-filming
parameter table set forth separately.
• The video signal select switch and connector (short pin) should be set in accordance with
the unit-specific data in the video parameter table set forth separately.

A1.5.2 Connecting to HAV90E Board

(1) Connect the video cables to the connectors (labeled as A•IN, A•OUT, HD•CS, VD
on the board retaining panel) of the HAV90E board. There are four types of
connections as follows.
For COMPOSITE VIDEO signal (with video return)
H A A
V D • •
• O I
D C U
S T N HAV90E board
Connect the video cable to the A•OUT connector.

COMPOSITE VIDEO HOST

CRT

For COMPOSITE VIDEO signal (with no video return)

H A A
V D • •
• O I
D C U
S T N HAV90E board

CRT

COMPOSITE VIDEO
HOST

For COMPONENT & COMPOSITE SYNC signals

H A A
V D • •
• O I
D C U HAV90E board
S T N

HOST
VIDEO

COMPOSITE SYNC

For COMPONENT & HD & VD signals

H A A
V D • •
• O I
D C U HAV90E board
S T N

HOST
VD HD VIDEO

FP8A0114.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-101
 IN-102

<NOTE>
• For the video cable, its end marked as HOST should be connected to the diagnostics unit.
• To connect in the order of HOST, monitor (CRT), and HAV90E board, the termination select
switch located on the CRT should be in the “no termination” position.
• To connect in the order of HOST, HAV90E board, and CRT, the termination select switch
located on the CRT should be in the “terminated” position.
• The length of the video cable for use with the HAV90E board is as follows.
Pixel clock frequency Video cable length
Less than 80MHz 3,5,10,15, or 20 m
Over 80MHz to less than 130MHz 3 or 5 m
130MHz or higher 3m only
TP8A0101.EPS

(2) Connect the remote panel I/F cable to the connector (labeled PANEL on the
board retaining panel) of the HAV90E board.
(3) Connect the HOST auto-filming I/F cable to the connector (labeled HOST on the
board retaining panel) of the HAV90E board.
<NOTE>
The HOST auto-filming I/F cable should be connected only when the HOST auto-filming
specification is applicable.
There are two interface types: RS232C and RS422.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-102
 IN-103

A1.5.3 Adjusting HAV90E Board

Switching connector for A•OUT connector termination
When connected in the order
Switch for setting MASK of HOST, CRT, and HAV90E TR 75 Ω
S3 : FRONTMASK Check pin for measuring board;or when no CRT is OP termination
vertical sync signal (VSYNCL) connected
S4 : BACKMASK
When connected in the order TR Termination
of HOST, HAV90E board,
OP OFF
Check pin for measuring and CRT
MASK signal (MASK)
Switch for selecting filter
PLL lock 1-OFF : No filter
Check pin for adjusting 2-80M : 80 MHz low pass filter inserted
Adjustment display LED
GAIN, OFFSET (ADIN) 3-40M : 40 MHz low pass filter inserted
mode display
LED 4-20M : 20 MHz low pass filter inserted

AGND Check pin for measuring

Switch for adjusting input video signal (VIN)
sync signal phase
D2 D1

S6 S5 S301S300 S303 S302 S9

A•IN
TP21 TP30 TP23TP24 TP7
D11 S4 S3 D7 S1
CN8
CN19 A•OUT
CN7 TP14
Adjustment
mode switch
TP29 HOST

HD•CS
S21 AUTOGAIN
execution switch
VD
F1
PANEL
Check pin for measuring
PLL lock misalignment
(UNLOCK)
CN1 CN2
Switch for adjusting GAIN
S302 : Rough adjustments Check pin for measuring
Switch for adjusting separate sync signal
CHARGE POMP S303 : Fine adjustments
(HDCS)
Switch for adjusting OFFSET
S300 : Rough adjustments Connector for switching video signal input/output
S301 : Fine adjustments This setup should
normally be used CN8 CN7
regardless of the
OP TH
connection type of
TR BF
the external
devices 75 Ω
(HOST/CRT). Buffer output
termination
If glitches such as
improper CN8 CN7
brightness occur
with the CRT OP TH
connected to the TR BF
A·OUT connector
when the power is Termination Through output
turned ON/OFF. OFF
FP8A0112.EPS

<NOTE>
The adjustment procedures described below must be performed in order named.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-103
 IN-104

■ Supplementary Explanation for Video Signal Input/Output Select Connector Setup

The video signal input/output select circuit of the HAV90E board is configured as
illustrated below.
Relay
HOST ON CN7 CN8
75Ω A • IN
A/D
OFF
TH 75Ω TR
BF OP
CRT ON
A • OUT
CN19 OFF
75Ω
75Ω
OP
TR

75Ω
FP3B0924.EPS

● CN7 and CN8 Settings

It is necessary to set CN7 and CN8 depending on whether or not CRT’s brightness
glitches caused by power ON/OFF of this equipment are noticeable.
• When normal (CRT’s brightness glitches are not conspicuous)
CN7 and CN8 should normally be set to BF (buffer output) and TR (75Ω terminated),
respectively, regardless of the connection type of the external devices (HOST and
CRT) (whether connected in the order of HOST, CRT, and HAV90E or in the order of
HOST, HAV90E, and CRT).
With CN7 and CN8 so set, however, if the CRT (which should be terminated at 75Ω)
is connected to the A•OUT connector of the HAV90E board, some difference in the
output signal may occur between power-ON and -OFF of this equipment, thus
resulting in brightness glitches for CRT images.
This is because the signal passed via the buffer circuit in the HAV90E board is
outputted to the CRT when this equipment is powered ON; whereas the buffer circuit
is bypassed when powered OFF, so the signal passed through from the A•IN
connector to the A•OUT connector is outputted to the CRT.
• When CRT’s brightness glitches are conspicuous
If the CRT’s brightness glitches are conspicuous with CN7 and CN8 set as described
above, CN7 and CN8 should be set to TH (through output) and OP (termination
OFF), respectively.
With these settings, the signal passed through the A•OUT connector (i.e. the buffer
circuit bypassed) is always outputted, regardless of the power-ON/OFF of this
equipment.
With CN7 and CN8 so set, however, because the signal between the HOST and CRT
is inputted into the HAV90E board, improper image (such as ghosts) are more likely
to occur due to input signal reflections if the connection cable is too long.
Therefore, it is recommended that if CN7 and CN8 are set to TH (through output) and
OP (termination OFF), respectively, the connection cable be as short as possible.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-104
 IN-105

● CN19 Setting
It may be necessary to change the CN19 setting depending on how the HAV90E board,
HOST, and CRT are connected. If the CRT is not connected, CN19 should be set to TR
(75Ω terminated).
• When connected in the order of HOST, CRT, and HAV90E board
CN19 should be set to TR (75Ω terminated), and the termination select switch on the
CRT should be set to “not terminated.” If not, the termination circuit in the HAV90E
board is shut off when this equipment is powered OFF, resulting in impedance
mismatch. Impedance mismatch may cause CRT’s brightness glitches or image
ghosts.
• When connected in the order of HOST, HAV90E board, and CRT
CN19 should be set to OP (termination OFF), and the termination select switch on
the CRT should be set to “terminated.”

The following table shows whether the CRT is terminated or not terminated and the
settings of the HAV90E board (CN7, CN8, CN19) in each configuration.

HAV90E Board Settings

Configuration CRT Output Output Input
Terminated Termination Setting Termination
(CN19) (CN7) (CN8)
HOST-HAV90E board (CRT not connected) - TR BF TR
HOST-CRT-HAV90E board No TR BF TR
HOST-HAV90E Normal Yes OP BF TR
board-CRT When CRT brightness is abnormal Yes OP TH OP
TP8A0102.EPS

■ Description of Adjustment Mode Switch

To perform settings and adjustments using the following switches, the adjustment
mode switch (S6) must be set to ON to set the adjustment mode. When S6 is set to ON,
the adjustment mode display LED (D11) lights up.
• Switch for setting mask (S3: FRONTMASK)
• Switch for setting mask (S4: BACKMASK)
• Switch for adjusting OFFSET (S300: Rough adjustments)
• Switch for adjusting OFFSET (S301: Fine adjustments)
• Switch for adjusting GAIN (S302: Rough adjustments)
• Switch for adjusting GAIN (S303: Fine adjustments)
• AUTOGAIN execution switch (S5)
• Switch for adjusting sync signal phase (S1)
The values of the above switches are read as setting and adjustment values only when
S6 is ON. If S6 is OFF, the setting and adjustment values will not change even if switch
settings are changed.
<NOTE>
While the adjustment mode switch (S6) is ON, do not change the settings of switches not used
because the values of all switches are read.
After completing settings and adjustments, be sure to turn OFF S6 to return to the routine
mode.
006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-105
 IN-106

■ Handling of Special Video Signals

● Preventing PLL Lock Misalignment by Mask Signal

For video signal with special vertical sync period for the device connected (the vertical
sync signal does not have a serrated pulse, etc.), mask the input signal before and after
the vertical sync period. This temporarily stops phase comparison operations of the
PLL circuit, preventing PLL lock misalignment.

• Examples of Special Video Signals

Vertical sync signal waveform 1

1 line
No serrated pulse FP3B0925.EPS

Vertical sync signal waveform 2

1 line
No serrated pulse FP3B0926.EPS

<NOTE>
The input specifications of the HAV90E board are applicable for the connection of devices with
video signals that have constant horizontal sync period. This section describes a method
which enables connection by sacrificing the stability of PLL lock for special video signal.
For special video signal which do not have constant horizontal sync period for the device
connected, consult the manufacturer of the device connected regarding signal correction.

<REMARKS>
PLL lock misalignment can be checked by observing the check pin TP29 (UNLOCK) for
checking PLL lock misalignment using the oscilloscope. For GND, use the periphery check pin
GND.
If PLL is locked, TTL-Low level will be displayed all the time. If PLL lock misalignment occurs,
TTL-High level will be displayed for that period. (The PLL lock recovery period shows a pulse
waveform.)
The PLL lock misalignment position can be checked by comparing the following signals.
Check pin TP7 (VIN: for COMPOSITE VIDEO signal) for checking video input signal, or
check pin TP14 (HDCS: for COMPONENT & COMPOSITE SYNC signals) for checking
separate sync signal.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-106
 IN-107

• Setting Mask Signal

(1) Set the adjustment mode switch (S6) to ON to set the adjustment mode. Check
that the adjustment mode display LED (D11) lights up.
(2) Set the horizontal sync number to be masked in front of the vertical sync to mask
switch S3 (FRONTMASK). In the same way, set the horizontal sync number to be
masked after to mask switch S4 (BACKMASK).
(3) Set the adjustment mode switch (S6) to OFF to set the routine mode. Check that
the adjustment mode display LED (D11) goes off.

• Checking Mask Signal

Observe the following signals on channel 1 of the oscilloscope using the signal of the
check pin TP21 (VSYNCL) for checking vertical sync signal as the trigger. For GND,
use the periphery check pin AGND.
Check pin TP7 (VIN: for COMPOSITE VIDEO signal) for checking video input
signal, or check pin TP14 (HDCS: for COMPONENT & COMPOSITE SYNC
signals) for checking separate sync signal.
While performing the above observation, observe the signal of the check pin TP30
(MASK) for checking mask signal on channel 2 of the oscilloscope.
Check that the parts to be masked in the vertical sync period on channel 1 (input
signal) of the oscilloscope are masked.

Examples of mask signal to be checked

1H
[1ch]
Input signal VD
(TP7 or TP14)

[2ch]
Mask signal (TP30)
(Example FRONT=2, BACK=4)
FRONTMASK BACKMASK

[Trigger]
Vertical sync signal
(TP21) FP8A0113.EPS

<NOTE>
Check the mask signal with the adjustment mode switch (S6) set to OFF. Mask signal cannot
be observed with S6 set to ON.
However, mask processed signal is acquired even when storing images with S6 set to ON.

<REMARKS>
• Phase comparison can be stopped by masking the input sync signal and PLL countup signal
in the mask signal period. This prevents PLL lock misalignment even with special sync
signal.
• The values set for the mask signal can only be shared between devices with the same
connected method (devices using the same special video signal).

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-107
 IN-108

● Preventing Distortion of Image Top Edge by PLL Response Speed Adjustment

If PLL lock misalignment cannot be prevented by mask signal adjustments, and this
causes the distortion of the image top edge, increase the PLL response speed. This
helps normalize PLL lock in the vertical back porch period.

• Adjusting PLL Response Speed

Increase the setting of the CHARGE POMP adjustment switch S21 gradually (100 →
200 → 300 → 400 → 500 → 600µA). Increase and adjust the PLL response speed
until the image top edge does not distort.
<NOTE>
Increasing the response speed inappropriately causes the PLL circuit to react easily to
external noise. In addition, it may also cause wavy vertical lines due to jitter. Normally use the
default setting (All OFF=200µA).

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-108
 IN-109

BLANK PAGE

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-109
 IN-110

■ Adjusting A/D Converter Input of HAV90E Board

Make the following adjustment with a video signal containing both maximum density
and minimum density supplied from the image signal generator. Perform this
adjustment in the adjustment mode.
Using the oscilloscope, observe the waveform at the GAIN/OFFSET check pin TP23
(ADIN), and adjust the switch for adjusting GAIN (S302/S303) and switch for adjusting
OFFSET (S300/S301) until the voltage is held within the range from 0V to -2.0V. For
GND, use the check pin AGND (TP24).
<NOTE>
Observe the waveform with the oscilloscope set in the DC mode.

0V 00H

Video signal
Adjust to hold the
video signal within
this range.

–2.0V FFH
FP3B0927.EPS

Make adjustments so that the video signal is held within the voltage range from 0 to -2V
excluding the overshoot and undershoot.

(1) Set the adjustment mode switch (S6) to ON to set the adjustment mode. Check
that the adjustment mode display LED (D11) lights up.
(2) Adjust OFFSET using S300 (rough adjustments) and S301 (fine adjustments).
Pedestal level=Black level
When the
“setup” is
zero

GND

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

Pedestal level
When the
“setup” is
not zero

Black
level
GND

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

FP8A0115.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-110
 IN-111

<NOTE>
• Never tamper with trimmers and switches other than specified above.
• Be sure to measure one vertical interval with a specified gray scale signal generated.
• When the “setup” is zero, align the GND line to the pedestal level. When the “setup” is not
zero, align the GND line to the black level.

<REMARKS>
The following shows the approximate change in OFFSET value using the above switches in
OFFSET adjustment.
• S300 (Rough adjustments): Approx. 60 mV/step
• S301 (Fine adjustments): Approx. 4 mV/step

(3) Adjust GAIN using S302 (rough adjustments) and S303 (fine adjustments).
Pedestal level=Black level
When the
“setup” is
zero

GND

-2V

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

Pedestal level
When the
“setup” is
not zero

Black
level
GND

-2V

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

FP8A0116.EPS

<NOTE>
• Never tamper with trimmers and switches other than specified above.
• Be sure to measure one vertical interval with a specified gray scale signal generated.
• The character or other signal level may overshoot the white level. However, be sure to
adjust the white level to -2V.
• If this adjustment is not made properly, optimum gradation conditions will not be obtained.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-111
 IN-112

<REMARKS>
The following shows the approximate change in GAIN value using the above switches in GAIN
adjustment.
• S302 (Rough adjustments): Approx. 50 mV/step
• S303 (Fine adjustments): Approx. 3 mV/step

(4) Set the adjustment mode switch (S6) to OFF to set the routine mode. Check that
the adjustment mode display LED (D11) goes off.
<REMARKS>
If the video signal measured contains continuous white and black level signals of more than 60
pixels, automatic GAIN adjustment can be performed using the following procedure after
adjusting OFFSET.
• Set the adjustment mode switch (S6) to ON to set the adjustment mode. Check that the
adjustment mode display LED (D11) lights up.
• Press the AUTOGAIN execution switch (S5) to execute automatic adjustment.
• Check that GAIN is adjusted to the required level (-2V) using the oscilloscope.
• Set the adjustment mode switch (S6) to OFF to set the routine mode. Check that the
adjustment mode display LED (D11) goes off.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-112
 IN-113

BLANK PAGE

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-113
 IN-114

■ Adjusting Sync Signal Phase of HAV90E Board

Assume that an input signal is provided containing black and white vertical stripes at
intervals of one dot.
Even if the input signal has the same dot clock and sampling frequency, there may be
cases where accurate sampling is not made depending on the sampling point in one
dot. In this case, the image (vertical stripes) appears blurred or wavy.
For actual images, letters look fuzzy on screen or edges of the image appear
unfocused.
Normal image Out-of-phase image

Straight lines Looks wavy

FP3B0930.EPS

1 dot

White
Input signal

Black

[A] Correct (stable) sampling point

[B] Incorrect (unstable) sampling point

FP3B0931.EPS

When sampling is made at dot transitions from white to black as shown in [B], white and
black cannot be sampled correctly. In this case, adjust the sampling phase to attain
sampling in the middle of one dot as show in [A]. To do so, adjust the sync signal phase
as appropriate. Perform this adjustment in the adjustment mode.

<NOTE>
Wait until the PLL lock indicator LED (D7) lights, and press the STORE key. When the switch
is changed, it may take some time for the PLL lock to stabilize.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-114
 IN-115

● Adjustment Procedure
(1) Set the adjustment mode switch (S6) to ON to set the adjustment mode. Check
that the adjustment mode display LED (D11) lights up.
(2) Print out while tweaking the switch S1 (PHASE) for adjusting sync signal phase to
obtain optimum conditions such that edges of the image, such as vertical lines
and text, do not look blurred.
The phase can be adjusted in 16 steps (one step = 1/16 pixel clock cycle) with S1.
(3) Set the adjustment mode switch (S6) to OFF to set the routine mode. Check that
the adjustment mode display LED (D11) goes off.

■ Selecting Filter of HAV90E Board

If image noise is conspicuous, filtering may effectively correct this condition. It is not
recommended, however, to use filter since it may reduce image sharpness to some
degree.
To apply filtering, set using the switch for selecting filter (S9).
S9 can be set in the following four ways.
• 1-OFF: No filter
• 2-80M: 80MHz low pass filter inserted
• 3-40M: 40MHz low pass filter inserted
• 4-20M: 20MHz low pass filter inserted

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-115
 IN-116

A1.6 Adjusting Image Format

Even if video parameters specific to the host equipment have been set during analog
video signal input, the image acquisition timing may sometimes call for finer
adjustment.
After completing the adjustments of the video interface boards, generate image outputs
from HOST. Then, using Video adjustment of the Service option, precisely adjust the
image acquisition timing.

■ Flow of Video Adjustment

START

Starting the Maintenance Mode

of the Remote Panel Service Mode

Activating the Icon of the Service

Option

Rebooting after Power OFF

Selecting the Service Option

Selecting VIDEO ADJUST

Adjusting Parameters Set the amount of adjustment as needed.

Select Re-adjust Selecting TRIAL PRINT Output images with parameters changed.

NG
Checking If the adjustment is inappropriate,
Output Images adjust again.

OK
Selecting Enter to Exit The contents modified of all the fine
the Service Option adjustment items are written into the file.

Starting the Maintenance Mode

of the Remote Panel Service Mode

Deactivating the Icon of

the Service Option

Check if the icon of the service option

Rebooting after Power OFF is dimmed out.

END FP8A0110.EPS

<NOTE>
For more details on the operating procedures of the Maintenance Mode and Service Option,
refer to “SERVICE MODE 4. Remote Panel Service Mode”.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-116
 IN-117

■ Parameters for Video Adjustment

Image signal
Output image

SYNC BACK PORCH FRONT PORCH

Image output at
Image acquisition this acquisition timing
control signal Image output
before adjustment

a b c
Image format
The output
image is shifted
rightward and
downward. Output image
x
Image output after
Image acquisition
Image output adjustment
control signal after
adjustment

a-x b c+x
Image format
FP3B0945.EPS

• To ensure that the output image fits the given image format, adjust the timing of the
acquisition control signal in respect to the image signal.
• It is assumed here that the horizontal directions a, b, and c are represented by H-
back, H-active, and H-front, respectively, while the vertical directions a, b, and c are
represented by V-back, V-active, and V-front, respectively.
• The sum of a, b, and c must be constant.
With the shift amount is assumed to be x (when the output image is to be shifted
rightward or downward), proceed as follows: a-x, b, c+x.
If shifted in the opposite direction, + and - become reverse.
If sufficient correction cannot be made with shift amount x alone, make readjustment
by incrementing or decrementing value b.

<NOTE>
Normally, video adjustments should be made within the following range. If video adjustments
cannot be done within this range, it is conceivable that setup values for video parameters may
be inappropriate. In that case, reexamine the video parameters that have been set up.
For HAV90A or DVI90A board:
Horizontal direction : Up to ±30, depending on the pixel clock
Vertical direction : ±10
For HAV90B or HAV90E board:
Horizontal direction : Up to ±60, depending on the pixel clock
Vertical direction : ±10

• For inputs of interlaced image, if the starting line for interlaced image acquisition is
improper, perform the following procedure depending on the type of image input
board used.
For HAV or DVI board:
Switch the interlace ODD/EVEN mode during VIDEO ADJUST.
006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-117
 IN-118

APPENDIX 2 ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING

For E-I/F connection, additional protective grounding will be required if installing this
equipment in the patient environment with the connected equipment in the non-
medically used room. Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC60601-1-1.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and isolated
supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures for
additional protective grounding” on the next page.
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical
facility construction.
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
room” are given below.

● Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures
(treatment, tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four
directions and 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.

● Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The
protective grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the
protective grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the
other medically-used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.

● Non-Medically Used Room

Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used
room.

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-118
 IN-119

■ Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective Grounding of the

Equipment and Clamp Locations

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the additional
protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical standard of the country to
which the equipment is to be installed.

<Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>

1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
connection of additional protective grounding.
2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move the
connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital grade earth
terminal.
3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply from the
connected device will be separated from the main power supply.

Grounding screw
(M4x6)

Clamp here.

Additional protective
grounding cable
(More than AWG16)

Power cable FP8A0202.EPS

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-119
 IN-120

BLANK PAGE

006-260-04
11.10.2003 FM4153 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-120
 IN-121

BLANK PAGE

006-260-03
05.15.2003 FM4011 DRYPIX Link Service Manual IN-121
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04

APPENDIX 3 SETTING EXAMPLES OF CONNECTION WITH OTHER DEVICES

This section provides setting examples and precautions for the connections given below.
In these setting examples, only precautions to be observed during setting are described.
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

• For this equipment (DRYPIX Link), important settings for film information and printer information.
• For output device (each printer), important settings for DICOM communication with this equipment.
Other settings need to be set appropriately according to the installation environment.
Connection
example Input device Output device Remarks
(1) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 7000 (35X43, 26X36)
(2) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 7000 (35X43, 26X36) Request only 26x36 film output from FCR 5000
(3) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 7000 (26X36)
(4) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 1000
(5) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 3000
(6) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 1000, DRYPIX 3000
(7) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 3000, DRYPIX 1000
(8) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 3000, DRYPIX 1000, DRYPIX 7000
(9) FCR 5000 DRYPIX 7000, DRYPIX 1000, DRYPIX 3000
(10) FCR 7000 DRYPIX 1000
(11) FCR 7000 DRYPIX 1000, DRYPIX 7000
(12) MF-300L DRYPIX 7000
(13) MF-300L DRYPIX 3000 (x2 units)
(14) Diagnostic devices such as CT/MRI, etc. DRYPIX 7000, DRYPIX 1000 (x2 units), DRYPIX 3000
(15) FCR 5000MA DRYPIX 7000 (x2 units) 20 pix/mm recording is possible for 26x36 film output
(16) FN-PS551 DRYPIX 7000
(17) FCR 5000 FL-IM D via FN-PS551
TP8A0301.EPS

(*1): Here, the output device DRYPIX 7000 can be read as FM-DP L.
IN-122

IN-122
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting FCR 5000 and DRYPIX 7000 (x1 Unit) (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(1)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue)

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 7000
26X36 26X36
35X43 35X43

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(2) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 5. Disable
[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type>
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 7000
26X36
26X36
35X43

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(3) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 5. Disable
[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type>
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 7000

26X36 26X36

FP8A0301.EPS
IN-123

IN-123
(*1): When connecting E-I/F, DRYPIX Link does not specify the LUT number for the printer. At the printer, set [SAR 49] for the LUT number specified at [default LUT].
For this connection example, the LUT number specified at [default LUT] is [1]. (Same for the following connection examples)
(*2): Apart from connections with the FCR 5000 series image reader, settings are the same for connections with the FCR 9000/AC-3 series image reader.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting FCR 5000 and DRYPIX 1000 or DRYPIX 3000 (x1 Unit) (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(4)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 5. Disable

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type>
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 1000

26X36 26X36

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(5) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 5. Disable
[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type>
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 3000

35X43 35X43

FP8A0302.EPS
IN-124

IN-124
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting FCR 5000 and DRYPIX 1000, DRYPIX 3000 (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(6)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue)

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 1000
26X36
26X36
35X43

[4-2] Printer #2> DRYPIX 3000

[4-2-4-1] Film Size #1> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
[4-2-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 35X43
[4-2-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(7) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 3000
26X36
35X43
35X43

[4-2] Printer #2> DRYPIX 1000

[4-2-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
[4-2-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 26X36
[4-2-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

FP8A0303.EPS
IN-125

IN-125
(*1): For connection examples (6) and (7), as both [Film Info. #1] and [Film Info. #2] have been set, the input device cannot be connected unless both DRYPIX 1000 and
DRYPIX 3000 are enabled for use.
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting FCR 5000 and DRYPIX 1000, DRYPIX 3000, DRYPIX 7000 (1) (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(8)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue)

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 3000
26X36
35X43
35X43

[4-2] Printer #2> DRYPIX 1000

[4-2-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
[4-2-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 26X36
[4-2-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

[4-3] Printer #3> DRYPIX 7000

[4-3-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
26X36
[4-3-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue) 35X43
[4-3-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan

FP8A0304.EPS

(*1): For connection example (8), as both [Film Info. #1] and [Film Info. #2] have been set, DRYPIX 3000 and DRYPIX 1000 serve as normally used printers according to
the printer registration order.
(*2): The printer priority order is the printer registration order (Printer #1 → #2 → #3).
(*3): If DRYPIX 3000 cannot be used in this connection example, use DRYPIX 1000 and DRYPIX 7000.
(35x43 film is output to DRYPIX 7000, and 26x36 film is output to DRYPIX 1000)
(*4): If DRYPIX 1000 cannot be used in this connection example, use DRYPIX 3000 and DRYPIX 7000.
(35x43 film is output to DRYPIX 3000, and 26x36 film is output to DRYPIX 7000)
IN-126

IN-126
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting FCR 5000 and DRYPIX 1000, DRYPIX 3000, DRYPIX 7000 (2) (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(9)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue)

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 7000
26X36 26X36
35X43 35X43

[4-2] Printer #2> DRYPIX 1000

[4-2-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
[4-2-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 26X36
[4-2-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

[4-3] Printer #3> DRYPIX 3000

[4-3-4-1] Film Size #1> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
[4-3-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 35X43
[4-3-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

FP8A0305.EPS

(*1): For connection example (9), as both [Film Info. #1] and [Film Info. #2] have been set, DRYPIX 7000 serves as the normally used printer according to the printer
registration order.
(*2): The printer priority order is the printer registration order (Printer #1 → #2 → #3).
(*3): If DRYPIX 7000 cannot be used in this connection example, use DRYPIX 1000 and DRYPIX 3000.
IN-127

IN-127
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting FCR 7000 (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(10)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 5. Disable

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type>
FCR 7000 [1-1-3-6] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 1000

26X36 26X36

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(11) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 5. Disable
[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type>
FCR 7000 [1-1-3-6] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 1000

26X36 26X36

[4-2] Printer #2> DRYPIX 7000

[4-2-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
26X36
[4-2-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue) 35X43
[4-2-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan

FP8A0306.EPS

(*1): When connecting with the FCR 7000/AC-2 series image reader, both [1-1-3-3. Film Info. #1>] and [1-1-3-6. Film Size>] need to be set.
IN-128

IN-128
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting MF-300L (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(12)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue)

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan
MF-300L DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 7000
26X36
35X43 26X36
FL-IM D setting 35X43

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(13) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 5. Disable
[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type>
MF-300L DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 3000
35X43
CR-DP/FM-DP 35X43
setting

[4-2] Printer #2> DRYPIX 3000

[4-2-4-1] Film Size #1> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
[4-2-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 35X43
[4-2-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

FP8A0307.EPS

(*1): Set the printer type at MF-300/300S/300L according to the output destination printer.
• FM-DP L/DRYPIX 7000: FL-IM D setting
• DRYPIX 1000/3000: CR-DP/FM-DP setting
IN-129

IN-129
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting Diagnostic Devices such as CT/MRI, Etc. (AD-I/F Connection)

[4-1] Printer #1>

[4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
[4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
Connection example [4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan
(14)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

CT/MRI, etc DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 7000

26X36
35X43

[4-2] Printer #2> DRYPIX 1000

[4-2-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
[4-2-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 26X36
[4-2-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

[4-3] Printer #3> DRYPIX 3000

[4-3-4-1] Film Size #1> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
[4-3-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 35X43
[4-3-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

[4-4] Printer #4> DRYPIX 1000

[4-4-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
[4-4-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable 26X36
[4-4-5] Image Type> 3. Enable 300dpi

FP8A0308.EPS

(*1): For AD-I/F connection, the output printer can be selected freely. The output printer on start-up of DRYPIX Link is [Printer #1].
However, if [Printer #1] cannot be used, select another printer on the remote panel and output images to that printer.
(*2): For AD-I/F connection, DRYPIX Link specifies the LUT number and enlargement/reduction process type for the printer used.
At the printer side, set the contents corresponding to each diagnostic device for the LUT number and enlargement/reduction process type specified by DRYPIX Link.
(*3): When using the Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS format or PHILIPS Easy Vision format, set the extension format setting at the printer [Use extension format] to [1:Yes],
and set the extension format ID as follows.
• Hitachi DR2000H/HI-PACS format: HM
• PHILIPS Easy Vision format: EV
IN-130

IN-130
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting FCR 5000MA (E-I/F Connection)

[4-1] Printer #1>

[4-1-1] PrinterAEname> DRYPIX1
[4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue)
[4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
[4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-2] Printer #2> [default LUT] : 1
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-2-1] PrinterAEname> DRYPIX1HIGH [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 2. Enable Fine S. [4-2-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [AE Title] : DRYPIX1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-2-4-2] Film Size #2> 5. Disable [Fine AE Title] : DRYPIX1HIGH
(15) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [4-2-5] Image Type> 2. Enable Fine S.
[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan DRYPIX 7000 (DRYPIX1)
FCR 5000MA DRYPIX Link (20 pix/mm recording is possible)
26X36 26X36
35X43 35X43

DRYPIX 7000 (DRYPIX2)

[4-3] Printer #3> (Only 10 pix/mm recording is possible)
[4-3-1] PrinterAEname> DRYPIX2
26X36
[4-3-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) 35X43
[4-3-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
[4-3-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan
[Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[ID] : CR
[default LUT] : 1
[γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
[AE Title] : DRYPIX2

FP8A0309.EPS

(*1): In this connection example, [Printer #1/#2] means that 20 pix/mm recording is possible for DRYPIX 7000 (DRYPIX1).
(If both 10 pix/mm and 20 pix/mm recording are possible for DRYPIX 7000/FM-DP L, register the printer name (AE Title) and recording method (Image Type) for each
printer separately)
(*2): In this connection example, [Printer #3] means that only 10 pix/mm recording is possible for DRYPIX 7000 (DRYPIX2).
IN-131

IN-131
11.10.2003 FM4153
006-260-04
● When Connecting FN-PS551 as the Input Device (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(16) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
DRYPIX Link Service Manual

[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan

FN-PS551 DRYPIX Link DRYPIX 7000

26X36 26X36
35X43 35X43

FP8A0310.EPS

● When Connecting FN-PS551 as the Output Device (E-I/F Connection)

[1-1-3-3] Film Info. #1> [4-1] Printer #1> [Use extention format] : 1 : Yes
[1-1-3-3-1] Film Size> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [4-1-4-1] Film Size #1> 3. 26X36 (Blue) [ID] : CR
[1-1-3-3-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [4-1-4-2] Film Size #2> 1. 35X43 (Blue) [default LUT] : 1
Connection example [1-1-3-4] Film Info. #2> [4-1-5] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan [γ table no. of LUT1] : SAR 49
(17) [1-1-3-4-1] Film Size> 1. 35X43 (Blue)
[1-1-3-4-2] Image Type> 1. Standard Scan
FCR 5000 DRYPIX Link FN-PS551 FL-IM D

26X36 26X36 26X36

35X43 35X43 35X43

FP8A0311.EPS
IN-132

IN-132
DRYPIX Link
SERVICE MANUAL

PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

 PC-1

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

11/30/2004 05 New release (FM4508) All pages

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PC-1
 PC-2

INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX Link - Checklist

The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps preformed and record the values
determined at the time a DRYPIX Link is installed at a site. This document is not intended to
replace the installation checklist located in the DRYPIX Link Service Manual but to be
followed concurrently.
Before passing over this equipment to the customer, check the system connection and
output image (from section 6 on) after service as well as at installation.

Installation Information

Serial Number: ____________________ Software Ver.: ____________________

Site Name: ____________________ Installed by: ____________________

Site Number: ____________________ Signature: ____________________

Room Number: ____________________ Date Completed: ____________________

Checklist
❐ 4. TEMPORARY PLACEMENT
❐ 4.3 Checking Installation Package Contents

❐ 5. INSTALLATION
❐ 5.1 Removing External Fixtures
❐ 5.2 Installing Separately Packaged Items
❐ 5.3 Connecting the Interface Cable
❐ 5.4 Connecting the Network Cable

❐ 6. CHECKING SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT, AND PRINTER

CONNECTION
❐ 6.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility
❐ 6.1.1 Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable
• Record resistance value measured:
Resistance between L and N: ________ Ω
Resistance between L and E: ________ Ω
Resistance between N and E: ________ Ω
❐ 6.2 Common Settings of E-I/F Connection and AD-I/F Connection
❐ 6.3 Settings for E-I/F Connection
❐ 6.4 Settings for AD-I/F Connection

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PC-2
 PC-3

❐ 6.5 Checking Connection Between This Equipment and Printer

❐ 6.5.1 Checks for E-I/F Connection
• Check for output film ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
❐ 6.5.2 Checks for AD-I/F Connection
• Check for output film ❐ Pass ❐ Fail

❐ 7. CHECKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE IMAGE INPUT DEVICE AND

IMAGE I/O
❐ 7.1 E-I/F Connection
❐ 7.1.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment by Remote Operations
❐ 7.1.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Device
• Check for error occurence ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
• Check for image problem ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
❐ 7.1.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment by Remote
Operations
❐ 7.2 AD-I/F Connection
❐ 7.2.1 Adjusting the Image Interface Board
❐ 7.2.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Device
• Check for error occurence ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
• Check for image problem ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
❐ 7.2.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment by Remote
Operations

❐ 8. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

❐ 8.1 Backing Up Individual Data
❐ 8.2 Checking and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
❐ 8.3 Terminating the Equipment
❐ 8.4 Reinstalling Covers
❐ 8.5 Installing the Equipment
❐ 8.6 Cleaning the Equipment

Summary Test ❐ Pass ❐ Fail

❐ Leave the final film at the customer site.

Test equipment: ________, Model: ________, S/N: ________, Calibration Due: ________

Test equipment: ________, Model: ________, S/N: ________, Calibration Due: ________

Test equipment: ________, Model: ________, S/N: ________, Calibration Due: ________

Test equipment: ________, Model: ________, S/N: ________, Calibration Due: ________

006-260-05
11.30.2004 FM4508 DRYPIX Link Service Manual PC-3